UC-NRLF
^B ESb 7TD
SKiX/M) CUUKs!:
XKW YOWK:
K. __S teigei
1
^
IN MEMORIAM
rrof. «J . rienry Senper
N
-^
J
Steiger's French Series.
AHN'S
Practical and Easy Method
OP LEARNING THE
FRENCH LANGUAGE.
Dr. P. HENN.
SECOND COURSE.
NEW YORK.
E. Steiger.
1874.
IN MEMORtAM
^'^' I ^*^"^ ^^"^
• •• • •
5ffice oV the ^ Ararian oC (focjpW at ^aaSio^
in the Office
E, Steigkr, New York,
Printer and Electrotyper.
PREFACE.
The present volume is the thu-d in the AHN Series of
French Text-books. Its grade has been carefully adapted
to the wants of pupils who have already acquired a fair vocabu-
lary of words as well as some facility in easy translations, and
a general knowledge of the regular French inflections. In its
aim, mode, simplicity of style, progressiveness, and naturalness
this Second Course corresponds to the First; it differs only
by introducing the more difficult relations of the language, and
in regard to this point attention is invited to the following
remarks explanatory of the plan adopted.
A special and distinetive feature are the numerous and
copious Exercises on the Irregular Verbs. Each of these,
with only a tew exceptions, is taken up separately, and in
order to confine the learner's attention to the one point in hand,
the exercises are based upon a comprehensive^ clear^
and practical paradigm of the respective verb. The
new words to be used are placed at the head of each exercise.
In their selection, regard has been had to the fact that it is
better to learn a few things thoroughly than many superficially.
, For recalling a word which is entirely or partially forgotten,
the Vocabularies should be consulted. These contain all
words occurring in the book, with their meanings, but only as
used in the Exercises.
The style of the latter is mainly colloquial, so as to enable
the pupil to surmount the primary difficulties of French con--
versation, and in order to impart greater fluency, a series of
Conversations is added.
^^ Example is in all things more powerful than precept," as
the proverb has it, and this is especially true in reference to
the teaching of languages. No rules should, therefore, be given
textually in a book for beginners; practice alone is the great
- IT - ^
agent through which the first result must be attained. At a
later stage of instruction, however, a regular course of lessons
in grammar is not only desirable, but of great importance.
It is in accordance with this principle that the second part
of the book, entitled Elements of French Granimur,
has been written. The rules herein given are comprehensive
without being prolix, and the examples in illustration so sim-
ple and direct as to admit of the most ready and practical
application. For those teachers who desire to exercise their
pupils orally in the practice of the rules, while they are learning
them, references to the corresponding Exercises of \)oih CouraeM
are inserted throughout. The little grammar is completed by
a full and detailed Indeuc of Subjects^ which cannot fail to
prove a valuable help to both teacher and learner.
A separate Key to the Exercises in the Second Course
also is published. Private learners are thereby enabled to test
their knowledge of what they have studieii, and teachers may
use this inverted series of exercises for the purjwse of training
their pupils orally in translation.
Throughout the work the author has exercised a scrupulous
discrimination, whilst aiming at comparative completeness so
far as necessary or desirable, to omit that which, being of less
importance, would encumber the learner's mind, needlessly take
up his time, discourage him. For this reason grammatical
niceties, and exceptions of rare occurrence are passed over.
French grammarians and writers are differing considerably
on various points of language, and in view of this fact the
author wishes to state expressly that, in the main, he aims to
present French grammar as now taught at the Normal College
of Paris.
New York, June, 1874.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
FIRST PART.
French and English Exercises.
1. 2. Indicative Moody Preterit Tense of avoir and etre 1
3. 4. Indicative Moody Preterit Tense of parler, finir cmd vendre 2
5. 6. Imperative of avoir and etre 3
7. 8. Imperative of parler, finir and vendre 4
9. 10. Subjunctive Mood of avoir and etre 5
11. 12. Subjunctive Mood of parler, finir and vendre 7
13. 14. Infinitives 8
15. 16. Participles 9
17. 18. Irregular Verbs, dire 10
19. 20. ecrire 11
21. 22. lire m 12
23. 24. mettre 14
25. 26. prendre. 15
27. 28. faire 16
29. 30. connaitre 18
31. 32. croire " 19
33. 34. boire 20
35. 36. venir 21
37. 38. tenir 22
39. 40. servir 24
41. 42. sortir 25
43. 44. partir, dormir 26
45. 46. sentir, mentir, se repentir 28
47. 48. couvrir, souffrir, offrir, ouvrir 29
49. 50. pouvoir 30
51. 52. savoir 31
53. 54. valoir 32
55. 56. voir 34
57. 58. vouloir 35
69.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101-
-103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
Ill-
-113.
lU— 116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127-
-140.
— VI —
devoir
falloir
aller, s'en aller.
mourir, courir. .
hair, fair
cneiUir, acquerir
craindre, plaimlre, se plaiudrt*. \.i
bouUlir, cuire , rire
vivre, paraitre . .
suiyre, coudrc . .
naitre, ofoUra
86 taire, plaire, se plaire. .
plenvoir, neiger, gelcr, greler, tonmr
recevoir, apercevoir, deoeroir, conc«voir, devoir
8*as8eoir
toe aasia, etre debout . .
The Passive Verb
Jmpersonal Ekprt s skms* U y
il est, c*eflt, oela est. . .
il fait, il vant mienz. . .
ReoapUulalory Eurdses on the Lj
OttttaveandDaUveOMsts
The Partmve ArtieU
Partitive Artide cnUUedi avoir faim, tic..
Ikgree of BquaiUy; si, anssi, tant, antant. .
plos de, moins de
plufl^.plns, moins. .moins
Oon^paraUves and antra, antrpment frith ne .
Siqterlaiives
Interrogative Pronouns .
Rdative Pronouns
Ind^nite Pronmnis; qnelqne, chaqne,' qnelqn'mi, ohftcnn .
personne, rien, aucnn, nul
tout, meme, tel
Tun Tantre, certain, plnaimura, autrui
quiconque, quelconqne, qnelqne, qni que ce soil, rtr
On the tise cf en and y .
Conversations
SECOND PART.
Elements of French Grammar.
The Alphabet .89
The Paris cf Speech .90
The Article . 90
— VII —
Page
The Noun 90
Numbers 90
Formation of the Plural 90
Genders 92
Cases 94
The Declension of Nouns 94
Use of the Articles 96
The Adjective 98
The Plural of Adjectives 98
The Feminine of Adjectives 98
Agreement 100
Comparison 100
The Place of Adjectives 101
The Government of Adjectives 102
Numerals 103
Cardinals 103
Ordinals ^. 104
Pronouns 105
Personal Pronouns 105
Declension of the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 106
Declension of the Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. 106
Pronouns used with reference to Animals and Things 106
Compound Personals 107
Use of the Personal Pronouns 107
Place of the Personal Pronouns 109
Possessive Pronouns 110
Demonstrative Pronouns Ill
Relative Pronouns 112
Interrogative Pronouns 113
Indefinite Pronouns 114
The Verb ..,.. 117
Classes 117
Modifications 117
Conjugation 118
Auxiliary Verbs 118
Formation of Tenses 122
Megular Verbs 123
First Conjugation 123
Second Conjugation 124
Fourth Conjugation 126
Notes to the Conjugations 127
Forms of Conjugation 128
The Passive Verb 130
The Reflective Verb 131
Impersonal Verbs ,...,., 133
— vm —
tht Verb,
Irregular Verbi. .........
F^rst (bnjugcUion ....
Secoml Conjngaiion.
Tfiinl (hnjwjat'iun. .
Fourth Conjugation, .
Agreement of the Verb
Oovernment of Verbs
Uses of the Moods (wtl Tnutts
Indicative
(hmlitiomil
Imperative
S*fhjfnirfirr
J'artuijMts .
Adverbs
Prepositions. .
Conjunct ions . .
Interjections . .
Index of Subject^f . .
Page
135
135
135
136
138
140
140
142
142
144
144
144
146
148
149
152
153
154
155
1. Frnirlt and Emjlo
'I Kti'ilish antl FVcn <
THIRD PART.
Vocabularies.
163
183
First Part,
FRENCH AND ENGLISH EXERCISES.
>• the news
1, Indicative Mood, Preterit Tense,
j'eus, I had je fus, I was
tu eus, thou hadst tu fus, thou wast
il eut, he had il fut, he was
nous euiiies, we had nous fumes, we were
vous eutes, you had vous ftites, you were
lis eurent, they had lis furent, they were
Compound Tenses,
j'eus eu, I had had j'eus ete, I had been
rencontrer, to meet obtenir, to obtain, get
accompagneFj to accompany la nouvelle,
passe, passee, past, last les nouvelles,
inconsolable, inconsolable - Tarrivee (f,), the arrival
la satisfaction, the satisfaction aussitot que, as soon as
\2ihont6, the M7idness, goodness oblige, obligee, obliged
partir, to go away, depart^ set out, start
Georges Washington fut un grand general. J'eus hier le
plaisir de rencontrer Mr. Belmont; il eut la bonte de m'accom-
pagner au theatre. L'annee pass^e nous eumes le malheur de
perdre notre pere. Ma m^re en fut inconsolable, mais elle eut
la satisfaction d'avoir des enfants bien eleves. Mes freres eu-
rent le bonheur d'obtenir de bonnes places. Nous fumes tres-
contents lorsque nous eumes la nouvelle de I'arrivee de notre
oncle. Aussitot que le me'decin eut et^ chez notre tante, elle
fut mieux." Aussitot que nous eumes eu la visite de notre p^re,
nous ftimes obliges de partir.
— 2 —
apr^s que, after
le service, the sei^vice
rendre service, to do ft ser-
vice
Tavantage (mj, the advantage
a i>eine — que, scarcely — when
recouvrer, to rexiover
la saut(^, the health
diner, to dine
Where were .you yesteniay? We woi:e at the theatri', and
our sisters were at tiie concert. AfYei' ihy friends had had the
pleasure of seeing their parents, they were obliged to start.
We had last week the advantage of dining at Mr. Boisuiard's.
We were very pleased to sec our uncle. Had you the kindness
to lend nie this book? You had the kindness to do nie this
service. How is your father? He had scarcely been three
months in the country when he had recovered his health. We
had a visit from your :^""» ^^^sterdav.
3.
je parlal, / spokr
tu piirlas, thou spokest
il paiia, he spoke
nous parldnies, we spoke
vous parldtes, you ffpoke
ils parlerent, they spoke
IndioftiiTe Mood, Preterit TenM.
je rtnin, / Jinished
tu finis, thou Jinishedst
il fmit, he finished
nous fiiiiiiies. ire finished
vous tinites, you finished
ils linireHt, they finished
je vendis, I so^
tu vendin, tho^i sniihst
il vend it, lie sitbl
nous vendimes, tve sold
vous vendites, you sold
ils vendirent, tJiey sold
pour, to, in order to
\ la bourse, the purse
renfernier, to contain
plusieurs, several, many
raconter, to telly relate
Thistoire (/.j, the story
celui-la. the former
intdressant, -ante, interesting
la piece, the piece
en detail, retail
en gros, wholesale
la question, the quei^tion
le maitre, the teacher
celui-ci, the latter
— 3 —
Hier je parlai a voire cousin; il me raconta une histoire
tres-interessante. Mon ami vendit hier son jardin. II pari a au
marchand, et celui-ci lui donna de I'argent. Nous trouvames
hier un petit chien. Les enfants furent punis. J'ai 6t6 a
Vienne pour y voir mon frdre Francois. Charles trouva une
bourse qui renfermait plusieurs pieces d'or. Montrez-moi, s'il
vous plait, le canif que vous avez trouve. Nous obeissons
avec piaisir a nos parents, et nous remplissons volontiers nos
devoirs. Nous ne vendons pas ces rubans en detail, mais en gros,
Les ecoliers repondront aux questions de leurs maitres.
4.
des que, as soon as, lulien inviter a diner, to invite to
sonner, to strike^ ring vers, toivards [dinner
quitter, to leave nombreux, -euse, numerous
arriver, to arrive <■ ' lasociete, the society , company
11 y a, ago
il y a un mois, a month ago
Yesterday I sold my dog. Last week our uncle sold his
house. Three months, ago this poor woman lost her daughter.
As soon as it struck four (hours), we set out for Brussels. We
left the city towards (the) evening, and we arrived in the country
towards eight o'clock. Julius and Henry accompanied us.
My sisters will arrive this evening. Mr. Renaud has Invited
me to dinner; I think that I shall find a numerous company
there. Last year we lost three hundred francs.
aie, have (thou)
ayons, let us have
ayez, have (you)
Imperative.
sois, de (thou)
soyons, let us de
soyez, be (you)
la pitie, pity
le sort, the lot
juste, justj right
reconnaissant, -ante, grateful
le bienfaiteur, the benefactor
est-ce que ton frere parle?
qu'est-ce que vous avez la?
I'indulgence (f), forbearance
autrui, others
I'indigence (f), need, poverty
avoir peur, to fear
le commerce, the intercourse
does thy brother speak?
what have you there?
Aio piti^ des malhenreux. Sois content do ton sort, et tu
8cras heureux. Sois reconnaissant envers tea bienfaiteurs.
Ayons patience en tout. Soyons justes envers tout le monde.
Ayez (le I'indulgence pour les ddfauts d'autrui. Soyons labo-
rieux, et nous ne serons jamais dans I'indigence. N'ayez-pas
IKJur, mes enfants. N'ayons point <le commerce avec les me-
chants. Est-ce que voire socur a ro<;u de jolis cadeaux?
Qu'est-ce que vous donnerez k ce pauvre homme? Es^cc que
mou th>re vous a raconte cette int^ressante histoire? Est-ce que
votre soeur est malade'r Non, niadame, elle se porte tr6s-bien.
6. gagner, to gain^ make age, ag^e, oldj aged
les riclu^sses (/J, riches la vertu, (the) virhie
poll, p<ilie, polite la science, (the) knowledge
avoir des t*^anls, to have IMoucear, (the) gentleness
consideration rendre, to make
la persoiine, the person vraimeiit, really
Be modest, and yorfwill have friends. Be active, and you
will make riches. Be polite towards everybody. Have con-
sideration lor aged persons. Virtue, knowledge, and gentleness
will make us really amiable. Have the kindness to lend me
your book. Do not fear, my friends. Do not be ungrateful to
him. Uave the goodness to do me this service. Are you
talking to my brother ? Were you at the theatre yesterday ?
7. Imperative.
parle, ap^akWhOu) finis, ^finish (thou) vends, s}^ (thou)
parloiis, letusspeak finissons, letusjinish vc^dolas, fe^w^^W
parlez, speak (you) iiiilssez, finish (yoibJT vendie^ sell (you)
regarder, to look at tarder, to loiter
V ony nev (m.)jtlieivorkman plus haut, louder
le toit, tJie roof I'apr^s-midi (/.), the afternoon
possible, possible sans faute, without fail
honorer, to lionor le gateau, the cake
ordonner, to order m^riter, to deserve
Regardez cet ouvrier qui est sur le toit de notre maison.
Finissez, mon ami. Rendez-moi Targent que je vous ai pr^te.
Aimez vos parents. Ne blamez pas vos amis. R-epondez-moi
aussitot que possible. Honore ton pere et ta mere, et tu seras
honore. Parlez plus haut. Obeissez a votre maitre. Je
lui obeis toujours. Avez-vous porte mes bottes an cordonnier ?
Fortez-les lui sans faute cette apres-midi. Donnez du gateau
a ces enfants. Ne louez pas ce gargon; 11 ne le merite pas.
Henri, je vous ai ordonne de m'apporter mon chapeau et ma
canne; pourquoi tardez-vous tant? Quelle heure est-il ? Re-
gardez a votre montre. II est neuf heures et demie.
S, garder, to keep faire, to do^ make
attentif, attentive, attentive cependant, yet
agir, to actj behave oisif, oisive, idle
ainsi, thus prudent, prudente, prudent
Keep the book which I have given you. Do not punisli
these scholars; thej are attentive. Are you hungry, my chil-
dren ? Eat a piece of bread. Do not lose patience. Finish
as soon as possible, gentlemen. You will lose all your Mends,
if you act thus. We have many friends; we are happy. You
have much to do, and yet you are idle. This misfortune would
not have (be) happened to you, if you had been more prudent.
Be good, my children. Be honest and just.
9. Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense.
que j'aie, that I may have que je sois, that I may be
que tu aies, that thou &e. que tu sois, that tliou &g.
qu'il ait, that he dbc, qu'il soit, that he &c.
que nous ayons, that we &c, que nous soyons, that we &c,
que vous ayez, that you (he. que vous soyez, that you dc,
qu'ils aient, that they &c. qu'ils soient, that they Sc.
Subjunctive Mood. Preterit Tense,
que j'eusse, that I might have que je fusse, that I might be
que tu eusses, that thou Sc, que tu fusses, that thou &c,
qu'il eiit, that he Sc. qu'il fiit, that he &g.
que nous eussions, that ive Sc, que nous fussions, that we Sc,
que vous eussiez, that you &c, que vous fussiez, that you <&c,
qu'ils eussent, that they So, qu'ils fussent, that they dbc.
— 6 ~
Sabjonctive Mood. Compoond TensM.
que j'aie eu, that I inay fiave had
que j'aie ^t<^, that I may have been
que j'cusse cu, that 1 might have had
que j'eusse ^t^, thcU I might Jiave been
il taut, it is necessary vous croyez, you think
il semble, it seems [comes entendu, heard^ understood
il convient, it is proper y it be- les gens, (m, df.) people
jc xondrmSj I (should) tcishjlike alin que, ) in order t fiat
il serait a souhaiter, it tvoiUd be pour que, ( so that
desirable quoique, although
il faut que j*aie de Targent, / must have some money
(it is necessary that I may have some money)
The ConjnnctionH afiii que, pour que, in tn'drr to, quoique,
although^ are foUowed by thu Sabjanciiye Mood.
II faut que nous ajons de Targent aujourd'hui. Parlez plus
haut,afin quo vou8 soyez entendus. II est juste que les cnfahts
soient reconnaissant.s en vers Icurs parents. II semblc que Sophie
u'ait pas 6t6 a Tdcole. II convient que les jeunes gens soient
modestes. Quoique vous soyez pauvres, vous ^tes honn^tes.
Je voudrais que tu n'eusses pas tant d'amiti(^ pour les cnfants
de notre voisin. II serait a souhaiter que tons les homraes fus-
sent justes. Yous ne croyez pas que mon Mre ait tort. Faites
votre devoir, pour que vous ne soyez pas punis.
10. jamais, ever la reputation, tJie reputation
la eonipagnie, the company mauvais, mauvaise, bad
The ^CJonj unction que, f/i«f, should never be omitted in French.
Is it possible that a bad man is (be) ever happy? My brother
must have a book. I must have some paper, a pen, and some
ink. Do you believe my brother is (be) in the garden? It
become3 you to be (that you may be) contented with your
lot: you have deserved it. I wish you were in my place. It
is good that you are {he) here. My father wishes that I ^ere
not so often in the company of that young man; he has
a bad reputation. We had the pleasure of finding what we
were looking for. ^^
— 7 —
XX^ Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense. Preterit Tense.
que je parle, that I may speak que je parlasse, that I might sp.
que tu paries, that thou Sc. que tu parlasses, that thou Sc.
qu'il parle, that he &c. qu'il parlat, that he &c,
que nous parlions, that we dec. que nous parlassioiis, that &c.
que vous parliez, that you Sc. que vous parlassiez, that &c.
qu'ils parleiit, that they d;c, qu'ils parlassent, that they So,
q\iQie^nis^e,t7iat I may finish que je finisse, that I might f.
que tu finisses, that thou dbc. que tu finisses, that thou &c,
qu'il finisse, that he &c, qu'il finit, that he &c.
que nous llnisslons, that we Sc. que nous iinissions, that ive &c.
que vous finlssiez, that you (&c, que vous finissiez, that you &c,
qu'ils finissent, that they Sc, qu'ils finissent, that they &e.
queje vende, that I may sell queje vendisse, that I might s.
que tu vendes, that thou Sc, que tu vendisses, that thou dbc.
qu'il vende, that he &c. qu'il vendit, that he &c.
que nous vendions, that we &c. que nous vendissions,^/ia^ <^c.
que vous vendiez, that you Sc, que vous vendissiez, that Sc.
qu'ils vendenty that they dbc. qu'ils vendisseiit, tJiat they (bo.
Subjunctive Mood. Compound Tenses.
que j'aie parle, that I may have spoken
que j'aie fini, that I may have finished
que j'aie vendu, that I ma;y have sold
que j'eusse parle, that I might have spoken
que j'eusse fini, that I might have finished
que j'eusse vendu, that I might have sold
rester, to remain^ stay longtemps, a long timej long
rentrer, to come in again la carafe, the decanter
a la raaison, at home vide, empty
Taction (f.), action, deed, share marcher, to loalkj march
la promenade^j the ivalk, promenade
— 8 —
Restez k la maison,afin que nous vous trouvions^quand nous
rentrerous. D^sirez-vous qu<> je vous accompagne a la pro-
menade ? Je ne crois pa.s que votre ami ait fait cette mau vaise
action. Ces messieurs souhaitent que nous les rencontrions au
tht^atre. Croyez-vous que votre frt^rc reste lougtemps a Paris?
Jean, il faut que tu remplisses la carafe; die est vide. II faut
que je r^ponde a la lettro de ma cousine. Notre m^ecin
d^sirait que nous marchassions deux heures. Vous d^iriez que
je vous vendisse ma maison. Nous ddsirons que vous parliez
toujours fran(;ais. Nous avons dt^ quinze jours a la campagnCi
cl nos amis (U'sirent que nous y iT'tournions.
1^. rt'ussir, to succeed l'enirepri:5L' (J.J, ihc undertalcing
We must give these chihlron some bread. I wish (that)
you may be well. Your mother desires that you (may) i*emain
always here. T (should) wish (that) you would (might) always
act well. It would Ix^ desirable that our friends auftVEeped
(might answer) our letter. You must finish your exercise
to-day. It is proper that you (may) obc} your master. Your
mother desires that you may Succeed in all your undertakings.
I (should) wish (that) your brothers would (might) sell their
dogs and their horses. Your sisters are happy, although they
are (be) poor. I desire that you always (may) speak English,
IS. proposer, to propose venir, to come
prier, to beg, ask louer, to let
quelquc, somey any ^rire, to torite
le neveu, t?ie nephetv
Mon oncle m'a proniis de me donner un livre. Mon cousin
est arrived. Nous lui avons propose de faire une promenade
avec nous. Mon neveu m'a prie de lui prater mon cheval pour
quelques jours. Je suis oblige de partir demain. Ayez la
bonte de me prater ce livre. Faites-moi le plaisir de venir chez
moi. Ma tante m'a invito a diner. Mon voisin a un cheval
a vendre. Cette maison est a louer. Combien de lettres avez-
vous a ecrire ? Cela est tr^s-difficile a faire. Ton p^re a raisen
de parler ainsi; tu n'es pas toujours attentif.
— 9 —
iJ. la harpe, the harp enseigner, to teach
garni, garniej furnished I'affaire (/J, the affair
Your brother has adviaad me to wait (still) some--time4onger
(some time). Where is thy brother^ My mother has ordered
fe^ft- to stay at home. My friend has had the misfortune to lose
his father. Mr. Bigot teaches m» to play the harp. I do not
like to speak of that affair. My uncle has a fine horse to sell.
Furnished rdoms to let. My son has still several letters to
write. We have had the pleasure of meeting your uncle at the
bookseller'^ These fish are not good to eat.
IS* " Participles.
ayant, having eu, Jiad etant, heing ^te, heen
parlant, speaking finissant, finishing vendant, selling
parle, spoken fini, finished vendu, sold
j'ai cueilli des fleurs / have gathered some floivers
les fleurs que j'ai cueillies, the flowers ivhich I have gath-
sont belles ered, are beautiful
tailler, to cut, mend (of a pen) traduit, traduite, translated
dieter, to dictate la figure, the figure^ face
dessiner^ to draw en, ^/^, on, hy
En rentrant chez moi j'ai trouve votre frere. Nous avons
rencontre vos cousines en nous promenant. En agissant ainsi
vous serez blame. J'ai vu un homme qui vendait des cerises
a une petite fiUe. Yotre frere a-t-il rempli la bouteille ? Oui,
madame, il I'a remplie. Les fleurs que j'ai trouv^es, sont tres-
belles. Avez-vous taille ma plume ? Non, je ne I'ai pas encore
taill^e. Avez-vous vendu votre maison ? Oui, je I'ai vendue.
Yoici la lettre que vous m'avez dictde. Les themes que nous
avons traduits, sont tres-faciles. La figure que mon frere a
dessin^e, est belle.
16. entrer (dans), to come go in (to) la poste, the post-office
Being in the country, I met your uncle. Where is my
brother? He is in the garden, I spoke to him on coming into the
house. Have you gathered any flowers, my children? Yes,
— 10 —
madam, the fbwers which we have gathered, are very beautl-
ftil. The books which I have bought, are very iuterestiug.
Have you sold your horses ? Yes, Sir, I have sold them. Have
you finished your exercises? No, Sir, I have not yet finished
theni. John, have you taken (carried) my letters to the post-
otlice? Yes, Sir, I took (have carricil') them thoiv an hoiir ago.
J 7, <lire, to say, tell
Indicative Mood.
Pret. je dis, I say, am saying nous disons, we say
tu dis, tfiou sayest (or sayst) youa dit es, ymi say
il dit, he says ils disent, they say
Imperf. je disais, / was saying
Pwt. je dis, / said
Fui je dirai, / shaU say
Conl je dirais, / should say
SabjonotiTe Mood.
Pm. que je dise, thai I may say
Pwi que je disse, thai I might say
PartioiplM.
Proi. disant, saying
Put. dit, said
quelque chose, something la v^rit^, the truth
la fois, the time Ton sait, one knows
le lit, the bed fach^, fach^, angry, sorry
Foreille (f.), the ear mentir, to lie
dire a Toreille, to whisper to regretter, to regret
J'ai quelque chose a vous dire. Qu'avez-vous a me dire ?
Je ne vous dis rien. Dites-le-moi, s'il vous plait. Je vous le
dirai une autre fois. Yous ne direz pas a mon fr^re ce que je
vous ai r^pondu. Ne lui dites pas que je suis encore au lit.
Que vous a-t-il dit? Ne vous Tai-je pas dit? Yous ne me I'avez
pas encore dit. II ne faut pas dire tout ce que Ton sait. II me
— li-
ra dit a Toreille. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous a dit? Nous vous disons
la verite. Je suis fache de I'avoir dit. Qu'en dites-vous? Si
je disais autrement, je mentirais. J'ai dit hier a mon cousin de
venir me voir. II disait souvent qu'il regrettait la mort de son
ami. Le temps, e'est de I'argent, dit Franklin.
18. la guerre, the war plus tot, sooner
What do you say of my garden? My brother told me that
you were here. Bid I tell you to bring this book ? What do
they say in town of the war ? My father told me yesterday
that you would sell your house. I will say no (nothing) more
toJiim. Tell me is there any fault in your exercise ? I have
already told you (it) this morning. All that you say is false.
Did you say that I Avas there? Who told you so (it) ? Nobody.
I think (that) he has said everything. If I had told it sooner,
he would have been angry. What has my mother told you?
19 ^ ^crire, to tvrite
Indicative Mood.
Pros, j'ecris, I write
tu ecris, thou writest
11 ^crit, he writes
nous ^crivons, we write
vous ecrivez, you write
ils ecrivent, they write
Imp. j'^crivais, / loas writing
Prei j'ecrivis, I wrote
Fnt. y6QviY2i\j I shall ivrite
. Cond. j'ecrirais, I should write
Subjunotive Mood.
Pre8.)^que j'^crive, that I may write
Pret. que j'^crivisse, that I might write
Participles.
Pres. ^crivant, writing
Past, ecritj written
\ _ 12 —
le loisir, (tfie) leisu/re je reconnais, I recognize
au long, at length T^riture (f,),the (?iand)toriting
n^cessaire, necessary encore unc fois, once more
lentement, slowly mal, badly
J'dcris une lettre k mon ft-^re; mais vous ne lui ^crivez pas.
Ne lui derit-il paH? Non, mais sa sceur lui 6cr\t. J'^rirai a
mon p^re aussit6t que j*en aurai le loisir. J't^rivis hier a mon
oncle. As-tu ^rit aujourd*hui a ton oncle ? Je lui ai ^rit ce
matin. p]crivez-lui cela. Je le lui ai d^ja ^rit. Si j'avais une
bonne plume, j'ecrirais aussi. Lorsque j' aurai plus de loisir, je
vous dcrirai plus au long. Quand lui dcrirez-vous ? II n'est
pas ndcessaire dc lui derire. Vous ^rivez trop vite; ^rivez
plus lentement. Montrez-moi ce que vous avez ^rit 11 faut
que vous ^crivioz cela encore une fois. Je reconnais ton ^ri-
ture. Votrc IrAro (^(Tit trt^s-nial.
30. MiniiHiiij 'f/fiitmy \c biWvi J Uir note
My mother has written to me. My friends will certainly
write to me. I wrote to him a year ago. You write better
than your brother. I have written to him to buy some books
fur me. What has he written to yon ? Are you writing to
your father ? I would have written to him sooner, if I had not
thought he li^d (that he might be) set out for Washington.
Wliat are you writing ? Wliat have you written to him ? Will
you not write (arc you not wTiting) to him to-day? Who has
written this note ? I think that my brother has written it; I
recognize his handwriting.
2 In lire, to read
Indioative Mood.
Pres. je lis, / read nous lisons, we read
tu lis, thou readest vous lisez, you read
11 lit, he reads ils lisent, tliey read
Imp. je lisais, / was reading
Piet. je lus, I read
Fui je lirai, / shall read
Cond. je lirais, 1 shxruld read
— 13 —
Subjanotive Mood.
Pres. que je lise, that I may read
Pret. que je lusse, that I might read
Participles.
Pros, lisant, reading
Past, lu, read
le journal, the (neivs)paper la lecture, reading
la gazette, the gazette le coeur, the heart
done, then I'esprit fm. j, the mind
voulez-vous? do you wish? negliger, to neglect
retenez, keep, remember le gout, taste
presque pas, scarcely former, to form, improve
Que lisez-vous la ? Je lis le journal d'aujourd'hui. Nous le
lisons aussi. Mon pere le lisait autrefois, mais a present il ne
le lit plus. J'ai lu aujourd'hui la gazette de Baltimore. Mon
pere lut hier celle dlllinois. Je lirai bientot un beau livre
qu'on m'a pr6te. Nous lirions plus souvent, si nous avions
plus de temps. Yous aimez done beaucoup la lecture ? Youlez-
vous que je vous lise cette lettre ? Yous ne lisez pas bien.
Comment faut-il lire ce mot-ci ? Retenez bien ce que vous avez
lu. Mes enfants ne liaent presque pas; ils ont pen de gout pour
la lecture. Je leur dis souvent qu'ils ont tort de negliger la
lecture, qui forme le coeur et I'esprit.
22. allemand, -de, German aussi bien que, as well as
frangais, -se, French le garcjon, the boy, waiter
What books do you read ? We read German books; but
you are always reading French books. My brother never
reads. My sisters used to read (Imp.) every day to my uncle.
We used formerly to read much more. Have you already
read to-day's paper ? We have not yet read it, but I think that
my father has (read it). Will you read your uncle's letter to me ?
I would read it willingly, if I had it with (sur) me. Do you wish
me to read (that I may read) this letter to you ? That boy
has not read this morning. He must read this afternoon. Your
brother reads as well as you.
- 14 —
^« mettre, th patf place, ptU on
Indicative Mood.
Prei. je raets, Iput^ I am putting
tu mets, thou puttest
il met, he puts
nous mettons, we put
V0U8 mcttcz, you put
lis mottent, tltey put
Imp. jo inettais, /if7cwpi/W/7if7
Pret. je mis, / put
Put. je inettrai, / shall put
Oond. je mettrais. f shotihl pftt
SnbjoneiiTt Mood.
Pros, (lue je mette, that I may put
Pret. (lue je misse, that I might p^tl
Puiieiplot.
Pwi. mettant, putting
PmI mis, put
en ordre, in order a part, apart, aside
le pantalon, the trowsers la m^moire, the memory
Je linge, t?ie linen la gloirc, Uu^^ glory
86 mettre a table, to sit doum commettre, to commit
to table rAm^ricain (m,)j the American
Mettez cette chaisr a >ii place. Je mets mes livres en ordre.
Je les mets en ordre. Je mettrai aujourd'hui un autre habit.
Oil avcz-vous mis mon chapeau ? Si je mettais d'autres bas, je
mettrais aussi d'autres souliers, Je mis hier mon livre sur la
table. J*ai mis ce matin mon habit dans le coflfre; il faut que
j*y mette aussi mon pantalon. Ou voulez-vous que je mette
votre linge ? Croyez-vous que je Taie mis sur le lit ? Mettons-
nous a table. Tout est mis en ordre. Je mettrai ceci a part.
La m^moire de Washington sera toujonrs ch^re aux Am^ri-
cains, parce qu'il mettait sa gloire a les rendre heureux. Voua
avez commis en cela une grande faute.
— 15 —
24, permettre, to permit remettre, to remit, hand over
prornettre, to promise Foccasion f/J, the opportunity
Where have you put my books ? Put this letter on my
father's table. I will put your coat in this room. Which coat
will you put on to-day? If the weather be (is) fine^ I will put
on my white coat. I put your money yesterday on this table;
have you found it-? My cousin seldom puts on these stockings.
Permit me to (of) come in. Is it permitted to go away ? You
have promised to come (and) see me. The weather did not
permit me to leave my room yesterday. I promised you to
hand him over your letter. Why have you not yet handed it
over to him ? I have not yet had the opportunity to remit it to
him; I will remit it to him to-morrow.
2S* prendre, to take, catch
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je prends, / take nous prenons, we take
tu prendSj thou takest vous prenez, you take
il prend, he takes ils prennent, they take
Imp. je prenais^ / luas taking
Pret. je pris, I took
Put. je prendrai, I shall take
Cond. je prendrais, I should take
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je prenne, that I may take
Pret. que je prisse, that I might take
Participles.
Pres. prenant, taking
Past, pris, taken
la moitie, the half danser, to dance
le reste, the remainder comprendre, to comprehend,
encore un, ane, another understand
remercier, to thank Thieve, (m. & f.) the pupil
le bras, the arm la r^gle, the rule
apprendre, to learn, hear le sot^, la sotte, the fool
— 16 -
Prenez un morceau de pain; je prends ceci pour moi. Com-
bien en prenez- vous? Nous en prenons la inoiti^. Mes IV^reH
prenneut le reste. Voulez-vous prendre ma place? Je pri.s
hier cet oiseau dans notre jardin. Prenez encore une tasse dr
caf(^. Je vous remercie; j'en ai d^ja pris deux lasses. Je n'ai
encore rien pris. Je prendrai une tasse de chocolat. Que
voulez-vous que je prcnnc? Prenez cet enfant par la main.
La servante le prendra sur son bras. Apprenez-vous a danser?
Mes fr^res apprennent le fhtnqais. J'ai appris que monsieur
Horton est arrivd. Comprenez-vous cela? Je ne vous c(mii-
prends pas. J'esp^re que tons mes ^l^ves ont compris c«ite
r^gle. Pour qui me prenez-vous? Vous me prenez pour un sot
26» la lecjon, the lesson expllquer, to explain
Have you learnt to sing? Do you learn to sing? We are
learning to danfte. Your brother is always taking my pen.
Why do you not also take his ? We never take the pens of our
friends. Do you take a cup of tea ? I thank you, I will take
a cup of milk. Have you learnt your lesson ? I have not yet
leirnt it; I will learn it this evening. Have you h^ard that
your brother has departed for Philadelphia? I understand very
well what you are explaining to me. Where did you catch
(have you caught) that bird?
jgy, faire, to niake^ do^ cause
Indioatiya Mo«d.
Prei. je fais, / viakCj I am making
tu fais, thou mxikest
11 fait, he makes
nous faisons, toe make
vous faites, you make
ils font, th£y make
Imp. je faisais, / was making
Pret. je fis, I m^de
Put. je ferai, / shall make
Oond. je ferais, I should make
11
* Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je fasse^ that I may make
Pret. que je fisse, that I might make
- Participles.
Pres. faisant, making
Past, fait, made
ne falre que, to do nothing but faire le tour, to walk round
faire voir, to show, let see non plus, either
faire batir, to get built allumer, to light
faire venir, to send for le paysage, the landscape
Tin et un font deux. Que faites-vous ? Je fais ce que vous
m'avez ordonnd. Nous faisons notre devoir. Ces gardens
ne font rien. Pourquoi ne font-ils rien? Faroe que vous ne
faites rien non plus. Et ces filles, n'ont-elles rien a faire?
Ma soeur ne sait que faire. Que faisiez-vous lorsque je suis
entre ? J'allumais le feu. Je fis hier le tour de la ville. La
servante fera le lit tout a I'heure. Que ferez-vous ce soir ? Je
ferai ce soir ce que vous lites liier. Faisons toujours notre de-
voir. Ne faites de mal a personne. Si j'etais aussi riche que
vous, je ferais batir une belle maison. ^otre frere ne fait que
pleurer. 'Ces enfants ne font que jouer et manger. Faites-moi
voir ce paysage. Je suis malade, je ferai venir le medecin.
28. le compliment, tJie compliment frapper, to strike, beat
What has ttie child done ? Why do you strike him? Have
you done what I (have) ordered you ? I think that my unclp
will do it. po what you have been ordered (what o»€ has
ordered to ybu). We do everything that our teacher orders
us (of) to do. We will take (make) a walk this aftern6on. Do
you wish me to do (that I may do) my exercise? Give (make)
my compUments to your father. What was your brother doing
when that (is) happened? Do your duty, in order that you
may not be punished. My tailor has,, ipade nie a very pretty
coat. This shoemaker does not mak6 good shoes.
— 18 —
29. connaltre, to know *
Indioaiiye Mood.
Proi. je connais, / know
tu connais, thou knowest
il connait, lie knows
nous connaissons, we know
vous connaissez, you know
-^Is connaissent, Oiey know
lap. je connaissais, / was knowing
Pwi je connus, / knew
Fiii jc connaitrai, / shall know
Oond. je connait rais, / should know
SnbjanoUye Mood.
Pwi. que je connaisse, that I may know
Prot. que je connusse, that I might know
P&riioiplo.
Pnt. connaissant, knowing
Piii connu, knoton
beaucoup de monde, many people le piano, ihr pifuin
on voudrait, one (they) would wish Thonneur fw J, the Itonor
la connaissance, tfie acquaintance la voix, the voice
recdhnaitre, to recognize
Connaissez-vous cette dame-ci, ou celle-la? A present je
vous connais. . Me connaissez-vous aussi ? Je ne connais per-
sonne ici. vofre fr^re me connait trds-bien. Nous connaissons
beaucoup de monde ici. J'ai reconnu votre cousin a la voix.
J'ai bien connu votre oncle. Si je connaissais votre m^re, je
lui parlerais. Mon fr^re ne vous reconnaitra plus. Demandez-
lui s'il me connait encore. On voudrait que je fisse la connais-
sance de mademoiselle Armand, parce qu'elle joue bien du
piano. II faut faire sa connaissance. Je vous ai vu avec une
de vos connaissances que je n'ai pas I'honneur de connaitre.
30. ne . . aucun, aucune, not any plus de monde, morepe/)ple
la moiti^ de la ville, half tlie toion sortir, to go out
These children know everybody. I know this man, I hav^
often seen him at my uncle's. Do you know these ladif.^^ gjgo?
— 19 —
I do not know any of them. We have known you for (we know
you since) a long tinve. ]\fy friend does not recognize me.
Does he lio longer know ySu? He will know you very well.
We should know more people, if we went out oftener; in Brigh-
ton we knew half the town, here we know only one family. I
should not know him if he were (was) not with his father.
31. croire, to believe, think, he of opinion
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je crois, / believe nous croyons, we believe
tu crois, thou believest vous croyez, you believe
11 croit, he believes ils croient, they believe
Imp. je croyais, I was believing
Pret. je crus, / believed
Fut. je croirai, / shall believe
Cond. je croirais, I should believe
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je croie, that I may believe
Pret. que je crusse, that I might believe
Participles.
Pres. croyant, believing
Past, cru, believed
la chose, the thing le contraire, the contrary
incroyable, incredible credule, credulous
justement, exactly le menteur, the liar
Je crois qu'il est d^ja tard. Nous ne le croyons pas. Le
croyez-vous? Je ne le crois pas. Mon fr^re ne le croit pas
non plus. Si je le croyais, je me tromperais. Je n'ai jamais
cru cela. Qui aurait cru cela ? Je le croirais, si vous me le
disiez. C'est une chose incroyable. Ne croyez pas cela. II ne
faut pas tout croire. Nous croyons justement le contraire.
Ces messieurs ne le croient pas. Comment voulez-vous que je
croie cela? Yotre fr^re croyait tout ce qu'on lui disait; il etait
trop crddule. Ne le croyez pas; c'est un menteur. II ne le
croirait. pas, s'il vous connaissait.
— 20 —
32, pas du tout, not at all impossible, impomible
Do you think (that) my father is right? No, I think (that)
he is wrong. Do you think that he has done it ? I do not
believe it at all. Your sister is very credulous, she believes
all she is told (that which one tclKs her). I will believe you
no more. We do not think that he will arrive to-day. I have
said so (it) to these children, but they do not Ixjlievc it. They
would think so, if their father hail told them. You are writing
it to your uncle, but he will not believe it. It is impossible that
he should (may) believe it. We shall not believe it either.
Believe me, 1 always tell the truth.
•?•?. bo! re, to dritik
Indio&iiTe Mood.
Prei. je bois, / di'ink nous buvons, we driuh
tu bois, thou drinkesf vous buvez, i/cni dt-ink
il boit, he drinks ils bolvent, they drink
Imp. je buvais, / was drinking
Pifl. je bus, / drank
Fnt. je boirai, I shall drink
Oond. je Ivoirais, f should 'h'i'>k
SabjuAotive Mood.
Pros, que je boive, that I may drink
Pret. que jo husse. that I might drink
P&rticiples.
Pwi. buvant, drinking
Past, bu, drunk
gater, to spoil chacun, uue, ('<irh r. ,n ,,,^r
ne que, only^ but, nothinrj b''
N'avez-vous rien a lx)ire ici? Buvez, s'il vous plait. Je ne
bois pas de vin. Nous ne buvons que de Teau, et mon frdre
boit de la bi^re. V6us ne buvez pas? . J'ai I'honneur de boire
a votre sant^. .Si je buvais avant midi, je gaterais mon app^ti^.
Je bus hier un grand verre de bi^e; mais aujourd'hui j'ai bu
du vin. Quand j'aurai bu. vous boirez aussi. Mais n'en buvez
pas trop. Nous boirons ensemble. II a nn peu trop tu. Qui
..^^-:.. — 21 —
a bu dans (out of) mon verre ? Nous avons assez bu. Le vin
que nous biiraes hier, etait si bon que chacun de nous en but une
bouteille. II ne faut pas que nous buvions trop.
34, trop peu, too little la goutte, the drop
indisposd, -ee, indisposed ou..ou, either.. or
aine, ainde, eldest . elle devient, she becomes
I think (that) he has drunk too much; he has drunk a bottle
of wine. If I had some wine, I would not drink this beer. You
drink too little. Why do you not drink? I would drink more
if I were not indisposed. Will you not drink another glass of
wine? I will drink no more to-day. How do you like (find)
this wine? This wine is excellent; I have often drunk (of) it.
Do your brother and sister also drink wine? My eldest brother
drinks nothing but water, and my sister has never drunk a drop
of beer. If she drinks either wine or beer, she becomes ill.
S5, venir, to come
Indicative Mood.
PreB. je viens, I come jam coming nous venons, tve come
tu viens, thou comest vous venez, you come
il vient, he comes lis viennent, they come
Imp. je yeneiis J I was coming
Pret. je vins, / came
Put. je viendrai, / shall come /\
Cond. je viendrais, I should come
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je vienne, that I may come
Pret que je vinsse, that I might come
Participles.
Pres. venant, coming
Past, venu, come
'V,
d'ou? whence? pourtant, however ^ yet
le logis, the house^ dwelling revenir, to return^ come hack
huit jours, a week se souvenir de, to remember
fort a propos, quite opportunely
je viens de chez mon oncle, / come from my uncle's
il vient de sortir, he is Just gone out (he comes from going out)
— 22 —
D'od venez-vous si tard ? Je viens d^une longue promenade.
Nous venona de Tdglise. D^oii veniez-vous ce matin, lorsque
je vous ai rencontrd? Jc venais de chez mon onclo qui est
arrivd il y a liuit jours. Je vins hier trop tard; mais ce matin
je suis venu plus tot. Si j'dtais venu un pcu plus tard, jc serais
arrive avec vos soeurs. Je viendrais plus tot, si j'en avais le
temps. Je voudrais pourtant que vous vinssiez a huit heures.
Monsieur votre ptire cst-il au lo^s ? Non, il vient de sortir.
Ou sont mesdcmoiscllcs vos soeurs? Elles vienncnt d'arriver de
Newport. Vous vcnez fort a propos, j'ai un mot a vous dire.
Quand i>tes-vous revenu? Reviendra-t-il bient6t? Je m*en
souviendrai toute raa vie. Vous ne vous ^tes pas souvenu de moi.
36, avare, avariciotis devenir, to become
dans pcu de temps, in a short time
You are (come) very late, my dear CImrles. I come from
Mr. Horton*8, who is ill. Is my brother come ? Your father
will come also. When will your sister come to Lexington?
Will you come to our house to-morrow ? If I have time I will
come; you used to come (Imp.) almost every day to see us.
At what o'clock will ^our brother come? My father wishes you
to come (that you may come) also. My aunt will not return
'vmorrow. This merchant has '>me very rich in a
/ rt time. This girl will l)o (^bt< .ry beautiful. Your
ther no longer remembers me. We always remember our
aiends. Your friends have (are) become very avaricious. Wo
liave just seen your uncle. Is your brother at home? No, lie
is just gone out.
•^y. teuir, to hold, keep
Indio&tiye Mood.
Prei. je tiens, I hold, am holding nous tenons, we hold
tu tiens, thou holdest vous tenez, yon hold
il tient, he holds ils tiennent, they hold
Imp. je tenais, / Wds holding
Pret. je tins, I held
Put. je tiendrai, I shall hold
Oond. je tiendrais, / should hold
~ 23 —
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je tienne, that I may Jiold
Pret. que je tinsse, that I might hold
Participles.
Pres. tenant, holding
Past, tenu, held
tenez, here le soutien, the support
retenir, to keep^ keep hack presse -ee, in a hurry
appartenir, to belong peut-^tre, perhaps
soutenir, to sustain, affirm seul, seule, only , alone
Que tenez-vous dans votre main ? Je tiens un livre. Que
croyez-vous que je tienne? Je crois que yous tenez le canif
que mon frere a perdu. Tenez, voila un ecu pour le pauvre
homme qui est a la porte. Yous retenez le bien d'autrui.
Retenez bien ce que vous apprenez par coeur. A qui appar-
tient cette maison? Toutes ces maisons et tons ces jardins
appartiennent au voisin de notre oncle. Mon frere soutient
qu'on I'a trompe. Yous soutenez toujours le contraire de ce
que les autres disent. Mon ami a obtenu une bonne place; il
est le seul soutien de sa famille. Yous ^tes presse; je vous
retiens peut-6tre. Je reviendrai dans une lieure. II vient de
parler a son fr^re. Nous venons de trouver le chien.
38. savant, savante, learned la permission, ^TiepermzmoTi,
temv\)f^vo\Q,to keep one' sword leave
M.J cousin will return to-morrow; he has (is) become very
learned. He (holds) has a good place. You have not kept
(your) A^brd. You did nof return (are not returned). I held
your letter in my hand when my father came yesterday. My
uncle affirms that Mr. Somerville will not return. To whom
do these beautiful meadows belong? These meadows formerly
belonged to my uncle; but now they belong to the town. This
book belongs to one of my friends who has lent it to me. He
does not remember (of) to have lent it to me. You will not
obtain your father's permission. I shall obtain everything from
my father, if I am industrious.
— 24 —
39. servir, to ^erve^ wait an
IndioAtive Moo4.
Pwi. je sers, / serve nous servons, we serve
tu sers, thou servest vous servez, you serve
il scrt, he serves Us sen'ent, they serve
Imp. je scrvais, / was serving
Pret. je servis, / served
Put. je servirai, / shall serve
Oond. je servirais, / should serve
Snbjoiiotiye Mood.
Pwi. que jo serve, that I may serve
PM. quo jo servisso, that f utinhf serve
PaiiioiplM.
Prtf. servant, serving
Pwi sorvi. srrrrd
servir ii, to serve for^ to he of use to
scrvir do, to serve for, or instead of
80 scrvir do, to make use of to use
on a servi, they have served up
* a quoi sort cela ? what is the use of that ?
cela no sort do rion, that is quite useless
r^compenser, to reward le pouvoir, the power
le procluun, the neighbor le bouchon, the cork
Jo sers volontiers mes amis. Nous servons tout le raonde.
Votre ami no sort personue. Servez vos parents, ot vous serez
r^ompenst^s. J'ai toujours servi mon prochain. Je vous ser-
virais volontiers, si cela etait en mon ponv.iir a ^pioi cela
8ertr41? Cela sort a plusieurs choses. Cela oiJchon.
Cela ne vous servira de rien. Je me servirai de vos livres.
Jo ne m'en sers plus. Servez-vous des miens. Combien de
temps avez-vous servi? Je n'ai seni que trois ans. Je vou-
drais avoir servi plus longtemps. Cette action servira a votre
gloire. On a servi; mettons-nous a table. Voulez- vous que je
vous serve de cela ?
~ 26 —
40. le regiment, the regiment le plus, the most
la voiture, the carriage iQ^ioMoxmdiiYe^ the dictionary
This young man has served in my uncle's regi'ment. We
must always serve ou],\ friends, willingly. Your cousin has served
me the most. Use this penknife; it is better than that. I shall
make use of your book. My servant has waited on me for
seven years (waits on aae since seven years). We often make
use of this carriage. I wish you to serve (that you may serve)
mt> in this affair. I shall be very grateful to you. for (of) it.
When I write in French I seldom use the dictipnary.
4:1. sortir, to go out
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je sors, I go out nous sortons, ive go out
tu sors, thou goest out vous sortez, you go out
il sort, he goes out ils sortent, they go out
Imp. je sortais, I was going out
Pret. je sortis, / went out
Fut. je sortirai, / shall go out
Cond. je sortirais, / should go out
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je sorte, that I may go out
Pret. que je sortisse, that I might go out
Participles.
Pres. gortant, going out
Past, sorti, gone out
de boniie heure, early tous les matins, every raorning
^" Mes fr&es sortfent souvent. Je sors tous les matins a sept
heures. Et toi, a quelle heure sors-tu ? Je ne sors pas de si
bonne heure. Nous sortons toutes les apres-midi, mais vous
ne sortez presque jamais. Si je sortais apres vous, j'arriverais
trop tard. Sortons ensemble; mais ne sortons pas avant midi.
Je sortis hier a six heures: demain, je sortirai de tres-bonne
heure. Et vous, a quelle heure sortites-vous ? Je suis sorti un
peu plus tard aujourd'hui. Yous ^tes sorti sans me le dire. Si
j'etais sorti, je vous I'aurais dit. Demain je sortirai de bonne
— 26 —
heure. Pourquoi n'^tes-vous pas sorti avoo moi ? Tl fjint. que
je sorte k sept heures et demi<\
42. Why do you not go out ? Arc you ill ? I shall go out
later. I shall have two letters to write. TTt» your brother
gone out? No, he has not gone out; but he will go out soon.
I would go out now if I had finished my letters. Wait a little;
we will go out together.jn;^ You very seldom go out. Have
you 80 much to do? Wc must go out now; come with us.
Every one l£& gone out. I should like to go out also. If I
had not so much business, I would come tormorrow morning.
Our uncle rises at seven o'clock, and goee out at nine. My
friends rise every moming at five, and go out at eight.
43* partir, to qo fiiray, depart, net out, start
iDdicaiive Mood.
Pwi. j»* [nii7<j J (JO mmy nous pai i»mi.-, u t ij'j ^umy
tu pars, thou goest away vous partez, you go away
il part, he goes away ils partent, they go away
Imp. je partais, / ivas going away
Pret. je partis, / went away
Fnt. je partirai, / shall go away
Oond. je partirais, / should go axcay
Sabjanotive Mood.
Pr«8. que je parte, that 1 may go away
Pwi que je partisse^ tJiat I might go away
P&rtioiplM.
Pres. part ant, going away
Paat. parti, gone away
dormiry to sleep
Indieatiye Mood.
Pwe. je dors, / sleep, am sleeping nous dormons, %ce sleep
tu dors, tJiou sleepest vous dormez, you sleep
il dort, he sleeps ils dorment, they sleep
Imp. je dormais, / was sleeping
Pret. je dormis, / slept
, Put. je dormirai, / sliaU sleep
Oond. je dormirais, I should sleep
-~ 27 —
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je dorme, that I may sleep
Pret. que je dormisse, that I might sleep
Participles.
Pres. dormant, sleeping
Past, dormi, slept
apres-demain, the day after to-morrow comment I ivhat !
avant-hier, the day before yesterday laisser, to let, leave
s'endormir, to fall asleep le sommeil, {the) sleep
endormi, -ie, asleep
Je pars demain pour Wilmington. Nous partons apres-
demain pour Savannah. Si vous partez, mon frere ain^ par-
tira avec vous. IS'ous partirons done ensemble. II faut que
je parte bientot. Croyez-vous que mon oncle soit deja parti?
Comment ! vous ^tes encore au lit ! Laissez-moi dormir. Yous
dormez beaucoup trop. Avez-vous bien dormi ? Je voudrais
dormir encore une heure. J'ai sommeil; je m'endormirai
bientot. Je m'endormis {or, je me suis endormi) avant-hier
a table. Si j'etais seul, je m'endormirais aussi. Je voudrai^
que cet enfant fut endormi.
44» I'Angleterre (f), England ^veiller; O
la Suisse, Switzerland rdveiller' ' j ^^ ^^^^ ^^
se rendormir, to fall asleep again
When shall you set out for England? I shall start to-
morrow, or the day after to-morrow. When did (is) your
father set out for Switzerland ? He (is) set out the day before
yesterday. I would set out for Washington this evening if I
had a good horse. At what hour shall you set out? My chil-
dren are still asleep; wake them. I awoke (have aw^ed) them
two hours ago; but they have fallen asleep againJ^When I
(shall) have slept six hours you will wake me up. Where is
your brother? Is he' still in bed? He is still sleeping, but I
have not (moi, je n'ai pas) slept at all. I should be sleeping
now if you had not awaked me. Is your sister at home ? No,
she went out (is gone out) an hour ago. Where is your father ?
He (is) set out for Switzerland.
— 28 —
4S» Hentir, to feel^ smell
Indioatiye Mood.
Pw«. jc sens, 1 feel nous scntons, we feel
tu Hens, thou feelesi vous sentez, you feel
il sent, he feela ils sentent, ilx/ey feel
Imp. je sontuis, I was feeling
Pwi jc sentis, / felt
Put. je seutirai, / shall feel
Cond. je sentirais, / nho^M feel
SnbjnnoiiTe Mood.
Prti. que je sente, Uuii I may feel
Piit que je sentisse, that I might fn '
Puiieiples.
Ptm. sentant, feeling
Put senti, felt
Conjngaie in the sAine mannor:
mentirt to lie; 80 rei>eiitir9 to repent
sentir bon, to smell nice y^ sentir mauvais, to smell bad
sentir le brdl^, to smell burnt ne. ;Vt^lus jamais, 7i€ver again
Todeur (/.;, tfie odor, smell la douleur, the pain
de loin, from afar parf'um^, ~^e, scented
que, howl
Cela sent bon. Qu'est-ce qui sent si mauvais? Que ces
fleurs sentent bon I C'est une odeur agrdable; je I'ai sentie
de loin. Toute la chambre en est encore parfuin^e. Youlez-
vous sentir quelque chose de bon ? Je ne sens ricn. La viande
sent le brti\6, Pourquoi mentez-vous ? Je ne mens pas. Je
n'ai pas menti depuis longtemps. Si j'avais menti, je le dirais.
Je ne nientirai plus jamais. Pourquoi mentirais-je ? Voulez-
vous que je mente ? II croit que j'ai menti. Je voudraie
n'avoir pas menti. Je sens que j'ai tort. Mon p^re sent de
grandes douleurs. Je me repens de ma faute. Je m'en repen-
tirai toute ma vie. Mon fr^re se repent aussi d'avoir menti.
Vous avez fait une grande faute, vous vous en repentirez un
jour. Je m'en suis d^ja repenti.
— 29 ~
4:6* offenses, to offend une fois, once
K A parclonnei?^ ,to forgive deux ,fois, twice
We must never lie/ I should lie, if I said that I have had
much business. My brother never lies; he loves the truth.
These flowers smell nice; but, thpse smell bad. You have
offended me much. '' t am sorry Mr it.^ Forgive me. If you feel
that you'are wrong, I will forgive you. I have once lied; but
I will never lie again.* My brother also has repented of his
fault. I smell something nice. How nice these apples smell !
Does the meat smell burnt? k. r
4:7. couvrir, to cover
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je couvre, I cover nous couvrons, we cover
tu couvres, thou coverst vous couvrez, you cover
11 couvre, he covers ils couvrent, they cover
Imp. je couvrais, I was covering
Pret. je couvris, I covered
Put. je cdlivrirai, I shall cover
Cond. je couvrir ais, I should cover
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je couvre, that I may cover
Pret. que je couvrisse, that I might cover
Participles.
Pres. couvrant, covering
^^^* couvert jt^Qt^erecZ
Conjugate in the same manner:
souflfrir, to suffer; offrir, to offer; ouvrir, to open
la fen^tre, the window il veut, he wishes
I'impertinence (f.)^ (the) impertinence le vase, the vessel, vase
le tableau, the picture crever, to hurst
toucher, to touch I'assiette (f.)^ the plate
Ouvrez la porte. La porte est ouverte. N'ouvrez pas la
fen^tre. Qui a ouvert toutes les fenetres? Mon frere ouvre
toujours la porte et les fenetres. J'ai rec^u une lettre de ton
ami; mais je ne Touvrirai pas. Le domestique qui m'ouvrit
— 30 —
hier la porte, m*a dit que tu n'^tais pas au logis. Faut-il que
je sourt're ccla? J'ai as8ez souflcrt. Jc ne souffrirai plus ces
impertinences. Couvrez ce tableau. Je I'ai de^ja couvert. Ne
c'ouvrez pas ces fleurs. Le jardinicr ne veut pas qu*on les
couvre. Si j'avais couvert ce vase» il aurait crev^. Quoique
jaie couvert ces fruits dune assiette, on y a ix>urtant touchd
48, aussitdt, immediately U y a quelqu'jun, tliere is somebody
il fait froid, it is cold se couvrir, to putpn one*s hat
Who is there: Open the dooi \ , there is some
one there. Has the servant opene»l un- nuor : No, he has not
opened it. Who has led it open ? These soldiers have sulfcred
much. Do not cover the vase. We have already covered it.
My master does not wish 4t-to^be_xovered (that one may cover
it). There is a bad «mell (it smells bad) in this room. Do you
wish me to open (that I may open) all the windows? Yes, Sir,
open them if you please. Put on your hat; it is cold.
40, pouvoir, to be able
Indio&tive Mood.
Prei. je puis, je peux, / can nous pouvons, we can
tu peux, thou canst vous pouvez, you can
il peut, he can ils peuvent, they can
Imp. je pouvais, / could
Prei je pus, / could
Put. je pourrai, / shall be able
Cond. jc pourrais, / should be able
Subjunotiye Mood.
Pres. que je puisse, that I may be able
Pret. que je pusse, that I might be able
Participles.
Pres. pouvant, being able
Past, pu, been able
aller, to go puis-je ? may I ?
j usque, as far as, up to loin, far
le marche, the market de retour, returned, on returning
— 31
Pouvez-vous faire cela? Oui, je le puis; mais mon fr^re ne
le peut pas. Nous ne le pouvons pas ^on plus; mais nos soeurs
le peuvent bien. Si je pouvais aller jlsqu'au marche, j'ache-
terais de la viande. Je n'ai pu sortir hier du logis (de chez
moi). Je pourrai peut-^tre sortir demain. Si j'avais pu lui
derire, je I'aurais fait avee plaisir. Croyez-vous que je puisse
porter cela? II ne croyait pas que je pusse jeter si loin. Je
voudrais que nous pussions sortir, et que vous pussiez aller avee
nous. Yotre pere n'est-il pas encore de i-etoiir? Non, jgaais il
peut revenir aujourd'hui. Je^ ne pus repondrc a votr|Pettrej
parce que mon pere n'etait pas encore revenu.
50. Your brother can carry this letter to the post-Mce. Can
you tell me what o'clock it is? L^nnot ^^yoii (it'f^If I had
a watch I should be J^e to teliplii (it). I.shSll not be able
to go out to-day, beSHfe my father is ill. My brother will not
be able to come. I do not think that he can come (|iiay be-
able to come) now. When shall^ you be Jlle to fihfeh your
exercises ? We shall be able to finish them this afternoon, I
have not yet been able to tell him that you have come. These
children cannot go out, because they are ill. I should be' able
to lend you this book if it belonged^ (Imp.) to me.
'^^•- ' : -.^^ ( ':''' y ?- ..-^ ■■"'''
51, savoir, to knotr, know hotv^ be able
Indicative Mood.
Pros, je sais, / know nous savons, we know
tu sais, thou knoiuest vous savez, you knotv
il sait, he knoivs ils savent, they knotv
Imp. je savais, I knew
Pret. je sus, I knew
Put. je saurai, / sJiall knoio
Cond. je saurais, I should knoiu
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je sache, that I may know
Pret. que je susse, that I might know
Participles.
Pres. sachant, knoiving
Past, su, known
— 32 —
il sait ^criro, he knows Jioia to write^ he can write
je ne saurais le t'aire, / should not know how to do ity J cannot do it
que je sache, that J may knoWy as far as I know
le grec, Greek savoir bon gr^, to take kindly
mourir, to die douter fort, to doubt very much
le nom, the name la languc, the language
Savez-vous quand mon p^re revieudra ? Je ne le sais pas.
Votre soeui- le sait-elle? Elle ne le sait pas non plus. Savez-
vous danscr ? Je 1^ su autrefois, mais je ne le sais plus k pre-
sent. Votre IVt^re sait-il legrec? Qui, il le sait. Nous savons tous
qu'il faut mourir. Yotrc cousin savait plusieurs langues. Je ne
saurais rien refuser a mes amis. II ne croit pas que je sache
le latin. On doutait fort qu'il le sAt. On voudrait que je Teusse
Ru plus tot. II no sait passes regies. Je n*en ai rien su. II n'est
pas ici, que jo sache. Je ne saurais vous le dire. Je ne sais
que faire, que dire. Je ne vous en sais pas bon gr^. . C^sar,
dit-on, savait par coeur les noms de tous ses soldats. Savez-vous
pourquoi je Tai fait? II sait Tallemand et le frani;ais/
62. I do not know who has taken your knife. Do you know
(it) ? My brothers knew that my uncle would come here. I
shall soon know who has done that. We do not know yet
when we shall set out. Ton will know it to-morrow. Can you
draw? I could draw (knew how to draw) very well formerly,
but now I draw very badly. Do you know whore he lives?
Do you know Latin? I do not know it, but I know French.
Do those children know how to road ? They can (know how to)
read and write very well.
53. valoiry to be worth
Indioative Mood.
Pk«. je vaux, / am worth nous valons, lae are worth
tu vaux, thou art worth vous valez, you are ivorth
il vaut, he is worth ils valent, they are worth
Imp. je valais, / loas worth
Pret. je valus, / was worth
Put. je vaudrai, / shall be ivorth
Cond. je vaudrais, / should be tvorth
— 33 —
Subjunctive Mood.
PreB. que je vaille, that I may he worth
Pret. que je valusse, that I might he worth
Participles.
Pres. valant, being worth
Past, valu, been worth
pas grand'chose, not much se sau^er^ to make one's escape
s'oecuper, to occupy one's self se rendre, tayieldj surrender
serieux, -euse, serious s'exposer, to expose one's self
la maniere, the manner se taire, to be silent
il vaut mieux, it is better le danger, the danger
chez sol, at home
Son livre vaut plus que son cahier. Combien vaut cela? or^
Combien cela vaut-il? Cela ne vaut rien. Que pent valoir cette
maison ? Cette maison ne vaut pas grand'chose. Ce gargon
ne vaudra jamais rien. Cet homme n'a jamais rien valu. S'il
valait quelque chose, il s'occuperait d'une mani^re serieuse.
Que croyez-vous que cela vaille? II ne croyait pas que ma
montre valut tant d'argent. II vaut mieux se taire que de mal
parler. II vaut mieux aller seul que dletre mal accompagne.
'Ne valait-il pas mieux se sauver que de se rendre ? II vaut
mieux rester chez soi que de s'exposer au danger. Ne vaudrait-
11 pas mieux boire un verre de vin que deux verres d'eau?
Yaut mieux tard que jamais.
54» injustement, unjustly
How much is this cloth worth ? It is worth four francs an
(the) ell. Last year is was worth only two francs and a half
an (the) ell. In a little time it will be worth'more. This coat is
worth nothing. I do not think that this is (may be) worth
more. Of these two things, the one is worth as much as the
other, it is better to suffer than (of) to act unjustly. It will
be better to do that now than (of) to wait any longer. It is
better to set out to-day than to-morrow. That man is good for
nothing (is worth nothing). Would it not be better to work
than (of) to take a walk ?
— 34 —
55. voir, to see
Indic&tiye Mood.
Pwi. je vols, 1 ser ikkis voyons, we see
tu vois, thou sttsf VOU3 voyez, you see
il voit, ?ie sees ils voient, Uiey see
Imp. je voyais, / was seeing
Prei je vis, / saw
Fni je verrai, / s?iall see
Ooni je verrais, / should see
Subjanotiva Mood.
Prei. que je vuie, (hut J may see
Prei que je visse, that I might sec
Pariioipltt.
Pwi. voyant, seeing
Pui vu, seen
la peine, the pain^ trouble la lumit^re, the light
valoir la peine, to be worth while ia chandelle, the candle
estrce que vous y voyez encore? can you still see?
Que vois-je? Ne le voyez- vous pas ? Je ne vois rien. Mais
voyez done un peu. II vaut bien la peine de le voir. Yoyons
ce que c'est. Si je voyais seulement une de mes connaissanees!
J'ai vu votre cousin; mais vous ne I'avez pas vu. Je le verrai
bient6t, et vous le verrez aussi. Je le vis hier se promener.
Ne nie voyez-vous pas? Jean, voyez qui c'est. Nous avons vu
aujourd'hui ce que vous vites hier. Nous verrons demain cc
que vous avez vu ce matin. Mcs soeurs le verront ausfii. Je
vois bien qu'il ne lepeut pas. Voyez-vous quej'avais raison?
Ce garc^on gatera tout, vous verrez. Mon cousin est venu me
voir. Voulez-vous que j'apporte de la lumi^re, ou est-ce que
vous y voyez encore ? Mettez la chandelle sur la table.
56. je n'y vois plus, / can see no longer
j'ai la vue basse, / am short-sighted
j'ai la vue bonne, / have good sight
j'ai mal aux yeux, / have sore eyes
entendre, to hear I'oeil, les yeux (m,)^ the eye
— 35 —
Have you seen it? You see well that I cannot do this. I
saw him go away. I saw his mother die. We can see (we
there see) no longer; give us a candle. We see with (of) the
eyes, and we hear with (of) the ears. We saw yesterday what
you have not seen. I shall see many people to-day at the
promenade. Do you see (Sing.) how I do this? T do not see
your sister; is she ill? Do you think that I see her? I thought
that you had seen her. Do your brothers not see you every
day? Are you short-sighted? No, I am not short-sighted; but
my eyes are sore. Your brother has good sight; he sees
everything.
^7» vouloir, to wish, he willing, Tiave a mind
Indicative Mood.
Pros, je veux, / wisJi nous voulons, toe wish
tu veux, thou wishest vous voulez, you ivish
il veut, he ivishes • ils veulent, they wisJi
Imp. je voulais, I was ivishing
Pret. }Q yovXm^j I wished
Fut. ]q \0Vi&r2Ji, I shall wish
Cond. je voudrais, I should tcish
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je veuille, that I may wish
Pret. que je voulusse, that I might ivish
Participles.
Pres. voulant, wishing
Past, voulu, ivished
la France, France de mauvaise humeur, in a had temper
envoyer, to send le voyage, the journey
je veux bien, I am perfectly willing , most willingly ^ with
veuillez, he so Mnd, have the kindness [pleasure
je voudrais bien, / should like very much
voudriez-vous ? would you have the kindness ?
Que voulez-vous faire ? Je veux me promener. Si vous le
voulez, je le veux bien aussi. L'un le veut, et I'autre ne le veut
pas. Mes soeurs le veulent encore moins. On voulait m'en-
— 36 —
Toyer en France; mais je ne Tai pas vonliu Si je Tavais voulu,
je serais deja parti. Voulez-vous fairt*. une promenade aveo
moi? Jo le veux bien; mais attendez un moment; je deman*
derai a mon fr^re s'il veut venir avec nous. Je crois qu'il ne le
voudra pas, car il est de mauvaise liumcur. Bien ! s'il ne le
veut pas, nous nous promc^nerons seuls. Je voudrais bien lairo
un petit voyage. Mon oncle ne croit pas que je veuille partir.
Je n'aurais jamais voulu faire cela. Voudriez-vous bien mo
lairc un plaisir ? Vous Ic pouvcz, si vous le voulez. Veuillez
mo rendre ce service.
S8. tl^tenir, to detain persuade, -^, convinced
My brothers will not wait any longer. Will you accompany
me? Most willingly (I will it well); but I have business frfe^
affaires) whioli will d(,»tain me. We wish you to become (that
you nmy l)ecomo) more industrious, and to do (that you may
do) your exercises. My sisters do not wish it. Do you think
that my father will permit (may l)e willing to permit) it? He
will not wish it, I (of it) am convinced. Arc you willing to
render me a service ? I will do it with pleasure if I (it) can.
These children are not willing to learn their lessons.
SO. devoir, to owe, muM^ ought
Indie&tiye Mood.
Prea. jo dois, J oive n<ms devons, we owe
n dois, thou owest vous devez, you owe
il doit, he owes ils doivent, they otae
Imp. je devais, lowed
Pret. je dus, / oived
Pnt. je devrai, / shall owe
Oond. je devrais, I should owe
Snbjunotiye Mood.
Pres. que je doive, that I may owe
Pret. que je dusse, that I might owe
Participles.
Pres. (levant, owing
Pa«t. dii, owed
— - 37 —
je dois partir, / ara to set outj I have to set out
tu dois partir, thou art to set out, thou hast to set out
il doit partir, he is to set out, he has to set out
il devait partir, he tvas to set out
il devrait partir, he ought to set outj he should set out
il aurait du partir, he should have, he ought to have set out
embarrass^,-ee, troubled le sou, the sou, cent
inquiet, inquiete, anxious Fhote, the landlord
au lieu de, instead of le pays, tJie country
Je dois aller au marche. Nous devons partir demain. Je
devais venir a deux heures. Yous deviez venir plus tot. Si je
devais faire cela, je serais bien embarrasse. Je devrais ecrire
a ma soeur, car elle doit (must) etre inquiete. Yous devriez
m'attendre, c'est votre devoir. Je devais partir aujourd'hui.
Si j'avais du attendre plus longtemps, je n'aurais pas et6 con-
tent. Croyez-vous que je doive souffrir cela ? Yous auriez dti
venir ici, au lieu d'aller dans ce pays-la. Combien voas dois-je?
Yous me devez beaucoup. Yous ne me devez plus rien. « Je
ne vous dois rien. Si je vous devais quelque chose, je vous
paierais. Je devais beaucoup autrefois; mais je ne dois plus
rien a present. Combien devez-vous au tailleur ? Je ne lui dois
pas un sou. J'ai du jusqu'a cent francs a mon bote; mais je
ne lui dois plus rien. Ce monsieur doit beaucoup. Tons les
hommes doivent mourir.
6*0. se m^ler de, to meddle with a temps, in time
We ought always to do our duty. I ought to tell you that
I do not love you. You should not go out without telling (it)
me. These children have (are) to set out to-day. A young
man should not (ought not to) meddle with everything. I
must go very fast if I wish to arrive in time. Here is the
landlord; do you not owe him something? No, I owe him
nothing; but my brothers owe him ten dollars. These scholars
ought to write their exercises better. Those children ought to
obey their parents. You ought to pay (for) the coat which
you bought yesterday.
— 38 —
SI. falloir, to be necessary
IndioatiTe Mood.
Pros, ii taut, // is iwctssart/
Imp. il fallait, it wan necessary
Pwt. il lallut, it was necessary
Fiii il faudra, it will be necessary
Cond. il faudrait, it would he necessary r
SnbjimeiiTe.
Prw. qu'il faille, that it inay be necessary
Pret. qn'il falliit, that it might be necessary
Partioiplet.
Pw8. fallu, been necessary
il faut .^orlir, ire, j/o?/, or one must go out
il nc taut pas mcutir, loe^ you or one must iiot lie
il faut que je sortc, ) ,
11 me faut sortir, j" ^ ««»« (/<> «'"
il faut que nous parlions, )
il nous faut parlcr, ) «"= "'"'^^ "'""''
•il mc faut un livre, / want (must have) a book v
il lui faut un livre, he wants (must have) a book
avoucr, to admit tout de suite, cU once
par consequent, there/ore emp^chcr, to prevent^ hinder
la bouche, t?ie mouth tel, telle, such; bien, certainly
Nous avons deux yeux et deux oreilles; mai8 nous n'avons
qu'une Ixjuche: il faut par consequent beaucoup voir, beaucoup
entendre, raais |>eu parler. II faut avouer que cela est tr^j*-
beau. Que faut-il faire pour enip^cher un tel inalheur ? Com-
ment faut-il dire? II faut toujours travailler; il ne faut pas
^tre paresseux. II faudra avoir patience. Que faites-vous?
II faut que j'^crive. Que fait votre cousin ? II faut qu'il ai>
prenne sa legon. II fallut que je fisse tout cela. II faudra que
je sorte un moment . II faut que tu restes ici. II faut que nous
ecrivions. II faut que mes fr^res travaillent. II faut que je
lui derive de venir vous voir. II faut toujours faire son devoir.
II ne faut point faire le mal. II ne fallait pas faire cela. II
faudrait bien le lui dire. II me faut de Tencre. II leur faut
des plumes. II me faut tout de suite du feu.
— 39 —
62, We must do our exercises. You must come back this week.
You must say it. You must not do that. What must 1 write?
You will be obliged to eat this. You must remain here; you
must not go out. Your brother must not write so fast. Your
sisters must return soon. My child, you must be more indus-
trious. We must set out to-morrow. I must write to my father
to-day. Your sister must learn her lesson. If you wish to take
a walk, you must go out before two o'clock. We want {or
must have) a knife. They want {or must have) pencils.
63» aller, to go
Indicative Mood.
PrM. je vais, I go nous aliens, tve go
tu vas, thou goest vous allez, you go
il va, he goes ils vont, they go
Imp. j'allais, I teas going
Pret. j'allai, I went
Fut. yireiij I shall go
Cond. yirsils, I should go
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. quej'aille, that I may go
Pret. que j'allasse, that I might go
Participles.
Pres. allant, going
Past, alle, gone
s'en aller, to go away
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je m'en vais, I go away nous nous en aliens, we go &c.
tu t'en vas, thou goest away vous vous en allez, you go &c.
il s'en va, he goes aivay ils s'en vont, they go &c.
Imp. je m'en allais, / was going aicay
Pret. je m'en allai, I went aivay
Fut. je m'en irai, I shall go away
Oond. je m'en irais, I should go aivay
Subjunctive Mood.
Pjres. que je m'en aille, that I may go away
Pret. que je m'en allasse, that I might go away
— 40 —
Ta-t*-en, go away (thou) allez-vous-en, go away (you)
le college, Vie college le beau-fr^re, the brotJiei'-in-lato
aller au-devant de quelqu'un, to go to vieet some one
Od allez-vous ? Je vais chcz moi, et mon fr^re va au college.
Oil alliez-vous ce matin, lorsque je vous ai rencontr^? J'allais
k notre jardin. Y allez-vous tous lea matins? J'irais volon-
tiers m'j proniener si mon frdre dtait ici. Si tous le voulez,
j'irai avec vous. Nous irons ensemble. N'allez pas si vite;
allez plus lentement. Oil vont ecs jeunes gens? Ne vont-ils
pas le m^me chemin que nous? Od est votre soeur? Elle est
alldc voir son onclc. Elle doit revenir domain. Nous irons
au-devant d'elle.XN'irez-vous pas demain a Albany ? Mon fr^re
ne veut pas que j'y allle. Je m'en vais. Vous en allez-vous
ddja ? Je no m*en vais pas encore. Mais je m*en irai bient6t.
Attendez un moment, nous nous en irons ensemble. Votre
soeur ne s'en va pas encore. Pardonncz-moi, ma sopur s'cn est
deja all^, et mes fr^res s'en iront tout a Iheure. II faut que
je m'en aille. Allons-nous-en, messieiurs. Va-t'en; allez-vous-en.
lis ne veulent pas s'en aller. II est all^ a Danville. J'irai
bient6t a Londres voir mou beau-l'rdre.
64. presque, lUmofft le pare, the park
Where are your sisters going to ? They are going to my
cousin's. Where is thy brother going to? He is going to Mr.
Charlton's. We are going to Louisville. These gentlemen are
going this evening to the concert. Why are you not going
with your brother? He does not wish me to go (that I may go)
Willi him. Shall we go to-morrow into the country? We shall
not go; my father does not wish it.!- I should go to my uncle's
if the weather were (was) fine. I wished him to go (that he
might go) with me. My father would have gone to the theater
if he had had time. Is it late? Thy brother is going away.
I shall remain a short time. My brother will soon go away.
We shall also go away. My friends, I am going away. Wait
a little ; we will go away together. Are they gone to Lima ? I
go almost every day to the park.
-- 41 —
65. mourir, to die
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je meurs, I die
tu meurs, thou diest
11 meurt, he dies
nous mourons, ive die
vous mourez, you die
lis meurent, they die
Imp. je mourals, / was dying
Pret. je mourus, I died
Put. je mourrai; / shall die
Cond. je mourrais, I should die
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je meure, that I may die
Pret. que je mourusse, that I might die
Participles.
Pres. mourant, dying
Past, mort, dead
courir, to run
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je cours, I run
tu cours, thou runnest
11 court, he runs
nous courons, we run
vous courez, you run
lis courent, they run
Imp. je courais, / was running
Pret. je courus, I ran
Put. je courral, / shall run
Cond. je courral s, / should run
Subjunctive Mood.
-Pres. que je coure, that I may run
Pret. que je courusse, that I might rur..
Participles.
Pres. courant, running
Past, couru, run
\
— 42 —
Tenvie (f,), the desire la pbarniacie, tJie drug-store
revoir, to see again a perte d'haleine, out of breath
le chagrin, (the) grief fatigu^, fatigu^e, tired
lafaim, hunger parcourir, to run through
secourir, to help se mourir, to be dying
Je meurs d'envie de vous revoir. Nous mourons de chagrin.
Ces pauvres enfants meurent de faini. Mon p^re mourut hier
dans mes bras. Votre oncle est-il mort? Ma tante mourut la
m^mc anode. Ma mdre mourra bicnt6t. Je souhaite que vous
no raouriez pas avant moi. Crojez-vous que notrc voisin soit
ddja mort? II scrait mort, si on ne I'avait sccouru. Oil courcz-
vous si \\^e1 Je cours chercher un mddecin. Mon fn^re se
meurt. Oil voulez-vous que je coure? Courons k la pharmacie.
J'ai couru a perte d'haleine. Jfe ne courrai plus; je suis trop
fatigud. Jc courus hier trop loin. J'ai parcouru la moitie^ de
la ville. Mon pt^re ne voulait pas qno jf» rotinis^o oiicf»ro.
CC Do you know, that mv laUur i> tHaU: Mj» auni ai><»
died last night. This child will not die. (The) man olten (iies
in the flower of his (of the) age. This poor woman died of grief.
My brother died in my arms. I wish that all my frieuds
may die after me. Where are you running? 1 am running
to the post-office, it is already late. Do not run so fast, you
will still arrive in time. The soldiers are running through the
town. Charles runs as fast as Louis. Do you wish me to run
faster (that I may run faster) ? I will run to your uncle's at
once, but tell me where he lives.
C7. hair, to hate
Indioative Mood.
Pm. je hais, I hate nous haissons, tee hate
tu hais, thou hatest vous haissez, yoxi hate
il halt, he hates ils haissent, they hate
Imp. je haissais, / teas hating
Prei je hais, / hated
Pnt. je hairai, I shall hate
Cond. je hairais, 1 should hate
Pres.
Pret.
Pres.
— 43 —
Subjunctive Mood.
Subjunctive Mood,
que je haisse, that I may hate
que je halsse, that I might hate
Participles,
haissant, hating
Past, hai, hated
fuir, to flee, run away
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je fuis, / flee nous fuyons, we flee
tu fuis, thou fleest vous fuyez, you flee
11 fuit, he flees lis fuient, they flee
Imp. je fuyais, I teas fleeing
Pret. je fuis, I fled
Put. je fuirai, I shall flee
Cond. je fuirais, I should flee
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je fuie, that I may flee
Pret. que je fuisse, that I might flee
Participles.
Pres. fuyant, fleeing
Past, fui, fled
le mensonge, the lie s'enfuir, to run away
sans cesse, incessantly tie devant, from before
a cause de, on account of la fuite, the flight
la conduite, the, conduct Farrn^e (f), the army
le vice, (the) vice s'approcher, to approach
Pourquoi me haissez-vous ? Je ne vous hais pas. II ne faut
hair personne. Je hais le mensonge. Pourquoi vous hairais-
je ? J'ai toujours hai les menteurs et je les hairai sans cesse.
Si j'ai hai cet homme, c'est a cause de sa mauvaise conduite.
Fuis le mal et fais le bien. Je fuis les mauvaises compagnies.
Fuyez les mechants. Fuyons tous le vice. J'ai toujours fui les
menteurs, et je les fuirai toujours. Je m'enfuis hier de devant
un cheval. Yous vous enfuites aussi. L'ennemi a pris la fuite.
Nous nous enfuirons, si I'armee s'approche. Restez, ne fuyez
pas. Tout le monde fuira.
— 44 -
adonn^, -^c, addicted le flatteur, the flatterer
juste, righteous se livrcr ^, (o give one's self up to
ni^priser, to despise mettrc a profit, to turn to account
partout, everywhere roisivetd, (f,), idleness
OS. I hato this man, he is a liar. Wc hate idleness. Hate a
lie, but do not hate your ncighlx>r. We shall always hate those
who are addicted to vice. Flee (^from) the naughty and seek tlie
company of the rigliteous. This man is everywhere despised;
everyone flees (from) him. Wc flee (from) all those who give
themselves up to idleness. My uncle has advised me to
flee the company of these young men. Let us flee (from)
flatterers? (The) time flees, we must turn it to account
69. oiieilHr, to gnth^
Indioative Mood.
Pwi. je cucillc, I gather nous ruoillons, we gather
tu cueilles, thou (juthrrfst vous cueillez, you gather
il cueille, he (/<i(h( r^ Is cueillent, they gatfter
Imp. je cueill:ii>, / : fhering
Pret. je cueillis, 1 >. I
Fut. je cueillerai, / 6hull gather
Cond. je cueillerais, / should gather
SnbjunotiTe Mood.
Pres. (jue je cueille, that T may gather
Pret. que je cueillisse. that I might gather
P&rticiplef.
Pres. cneillant, gathering
Part, cueilli. gathei^ed
acqiiorir, to acquire
Indioative Mood.
Pres. j'acquiers, I acquire nous acqu^rons, we acquire
tu acquiers, thou acquirest vous acqudrez, you acquire
il acquiert, he acquires ils acquierent, they acquire
Imp. j'acqu^rais, I wa^ acquiring
Pret j'acquis, I acquired
Put. j'acquerrai, 7 sAaZ/ ocg wire
Ooni j'acquerrais, I should acquire
~ 46 —
Subjunctive Mood.
PwB. que j'acquiere, that I may acquire
Pret. que j'aequisse, that I might acquire
Participles.
Pres. acqudrant, acquiring
Past, acquis, acquired
la fraise, the strawberry puisque, since^ as
la connaissance, the knowledge la sagesse, {the) wisdom
se contenter, to he contented le diner, (the) dinner
Que faites-vous dans ce jardin? Je cueille des fleurs.
Cueillez-en aussi pour moi. Je vous cueillerai un joli bouquet
de roses. Le jardinier ne veut pas que j'en cueille beaucoup,
puisqu'on en a ddja assez cueilli. Hier je cueillis des fraises
pour ma soeur; elle les aime tant. Yotre frere est tres-instruit;
il aquiert tons les jours de nouvelles connaissances. Yotre
voisin a acquis beaucoup de bien. Nous n'en acquerrons pas
autant. Je ne veux point de bien mal acquis. Acquiers de la
sagesse et de I'honneur, et contente-toi de ce que tu possedes.
Cueillez quelques poires pour le diner.
70* craindre, to fear, to he afraid
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je crains, / fear nous craignons, we fear
tu crains, thou fearest vous craignez, yoxi fear
11 craint, he fears ils craignent, they fear
Imp. je craignais, / was fearing
Pret. je craignis, I feared
Put. je craindrai, / shall fear
Cond. je craindrais, / should fear
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je craigne, that I may fear
Pret. que je craignisse, that I might fear
Participles.
Pres. craignant, fearing
Past, craint, feared
Conjugate in the same manner:
plaindre, to pity, se plaindre, to co^nplaMi
— 46 —
vainore, to t^atiquishf defeat
IndioAtiye Mood.
Vm, je vaincs, / vanquish nous vainquons, we vanquUfh
tu values, tliou vanquishest vous vainquez, yotc vanquish
il vaiiK*, lie vanquufieH ils vainquent, they vanquish
Imp. je vainquais, / was vanquishing
Pwt je vainquis, / vanquished
Put. je vaiiicrai, / shall vanquish
Oond. je vaiucrais, / should VfiJtqvish
Subjunotiye Mood
Pws. que je vaiuque, that J /,.<../ ^'
Prti quo je vaiuquisse, that 1 in <
PartieiflM.
Pm. vainquant, vanquishing
Pui vaincu, vanquished
la menace, the threat tuer, ^o kill
Tombre (/". j, <Ac shadow attacher, to tie
le h^ros, the hero avoir pour, ^o be afraid
prendre garde, to take care craintif, craintive, timid
m^me, even
Que craignez-vous ? Ne craignez rien. Si vous 6tes avec moi,
je ne craindrai pas ses menaces. II ne faut pas 6tre craintif;
ma soeur est trt^s-craintive; elle craint m6me son oiubre. J.'ai
toujours craint les tlatteurs. II faut vaincre ses passions. Ce
h^ros a vaincu tous les ennemis. Nous vaincrons aussi les
notres. Ce chien mord. Prenez garde qu'il ne vous morde.
A-t-il deja mordu quelquun? II mordit hier notre servante.
S'il me mordait, je le tuerais. S'il (^tait attache?, il ne mordrait
personne. N'ayez pas peur, il ne vous mordra pas.
71. ^tre a plaindre, to be to be pitied
la prononciation, the prontcnciation
Where have you gathered these beautiful flowers? I gather
flowers every day for my mother. I shall also gather some to-
morrow for my aunt. I would gather you a bouquet if the
garden were open. We do not acquire anything without trouble.
Thou wouldst acquire a better pronunciation if thou wert some
— 47 —
time in France. What are you afraid of? I am afraid of
nothing. This soldier does not fear (the) death. The general
has defeated the enemy. You pity me, and I really am to be
pitied. Mr. Montgomery always complains. Our neighbor's
dog has bitten me. My dogs do not bite.
7^. bouillir, to boil
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je bous, / boil nous bouillons, we boil
tu bous, thou holiest vous bouillez, you boil
il bout, he boils ils bouillent, they boil
Imp. je bouillais, I was boiling
Pret. je boullis, I boiled
Put. je bouillirai, / shall boil
Oond. je bouillirais, I should boil
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je bouille, that I may boil
Pret. que je bouillisse, that I might boil
Participles.
Pres. bouillant, boiling
Past, bouilh, boiled
cuire, to cook, bake
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je cuis, I cook nous cuisons, we cook
tu cuis, thou cookest vous cuisez, you cook
il cuit, he cooks- ils cuisent, they cook
Imp. je cms£iis, I was cooking
Pret. je cuisis, I cooked
Put. je cuirai, I shall cook
Cond. je cuirais, I should cook
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je cuise, that I may cook
Pret. que je cuisisse, that J might cook
Participles.
Pres. cuisant, cooking
Past, cuit, cooked
— 48 —
rire, to laugh
Indioftiiye Mood.
Pm. je ris, / laugh nous rions, we laugh
tu ris, thou laughest vous riez, you laugh
il rit, }ie laughs ihs rient, they laugh
Imp. je riais, I was laughing
Pret. je ris, / laugfied
Put. je rirai, / shall laugh
Otnd. je rirais, I should laugh
Snbjnnotiye Mood.
Proi. que je rie, that I may laugh
Fret, quo je risse, that I might laugh
Partittflw.
Ptm. riant, laughing
Piii ri, UxugHed
laire cuirc, to cooky get cooked la cuisine, (/<*• J^if'/irn
rotir, to broil^ roast, faire la cuisine, (" <>,>,/:
ni. .ni, neither, .nor bien, very, very much
Keau bout-elle? Elle a bouilli, mais elle ne bout plus. Elle
bouillait tout ;i I'heure. Cette cau bouillira bient6L Elle bouil-
lirait ddja, s'il y avait plus de feu. Ce poisson n'est bon ni a
rotir ni a bouillir. Que laites-vous cuire aujourd'hui ? Savez-vous
faire la cuisine? Ce boulanger cuit bcaucoup de pain tons les
jours. Pourquoi riez vous? Je ne ris pas. Je n'ai pas envie de
rire. Cos enfants rient toujours. Je rirai bien si cela arrive,
et ma soeur rira encore plus. II vaut mieux rire que de pleurer.
Vous ne faites que rire. Avez-vous bieht6t fini de rire? Nous
avons beaucoup ri. L*un riait, Tautre pleurait.
75. tandis que, whilst par jour, dailyj a day
a table, at table il va, it will directly
You are always laughing, one must not laugh at everything.
Thy brother never laughs. When I wish to laugh, I go away.
Your friend always laughs whilst you cry. You would also
laugh, if you knew why he laughed. Our friend has made us
laugh. My uncle will not allow us to laugh at table. The
water does not yet boil. How does it happen that it does not
— 4:9 —
yet boil ? It would have boiled, if the fire were not so low.
It will boil directly. This baker bakes (the) bread twice a day.
The meat was not done (cooked). Do not laugh at other
people's misfortune. If you play with the dog, he will bite
your (you the) hand.
74. vivre, to live
Indicative Mood.
Pros, je vis, 1 live nous vivons, we live
tu vis, thou livest vous vivez, you live
il vit, he lives ils vivent, they live
Imp. je vivais, I was living
Prei je vecus, / lived
Put. je vivrai, I shall live
Cond. je vivrais, / should live ' •
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je vive, that I may live
Pret. que je vecusse, that I might live
Participles.
Pres. vivant, living
Past, v^cu, lived
paraitre, to appear*
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je parais, I appear nous paraissons, we appear
tu parais, thou appearest vous paraissez, you appear
il parait, he appears ils paMssent, they appear
Imp. je paraissais, /i^as appear m^
Pret. je parus, / appeared
Put. je paraitrai, / shall appear
Cond. je paraitrais, I should appear
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je paraisse, that I may appear
Pret. que je parusse, that I might appear
Participles.
Pres. paraissant, appearing
Past, paru, appeared
— 60 -
le rcpo8, t?ie peace, repose survivre a, to survive
vivre de, to live on oser, to dare
les revenus fmj, tlie income devant, before
rn vie, liviwj
>ous vivunj< rii rcpos. Notre voism vii do ses revenus.
Vous vivez heureux et conU?nt. J'ai vecu longtemps dans la
inis(^rc. Ce garc-oii iie vivra pas longtemps. II faut que je vive
commc je puis. Je ne serais plus en vie, si javais vecu comme
lui. II est p<^nil)Ie de survivre a ses enfants. II ne faut pas
vivre pour manger, mais il faut manger pour vivre. II faut
bien vivn* ix)ur bien mourir. Vous me paraissez un pen triste.
Qu'avez-vous fait ? 11 paralt que vous n*^tes pas content. Je n'ose
j)araitre devant mon pi^rc. Quoique je vous aie paru fachd, je
no ratals pas. Je paraitrais moins triste, si je pouvais sortir.
Mon flrdre n'est plus fach^; ii paraitra demain tout change.
7S. suivre, to follow
Indioatiye Mood.
Profl. je suis, I follow nous suivons, tve follow
tu suis, thou foUoweM vous suivez, you follotc
il suit, hv follows ils suiveut, they follow
Imp. je suivais, / was following
Pret. je suivis, / foUowed'
Fut. je suivrai, / shall follow
Cond. je suivrais, / should follow
SubjuDotive Mood.
Pres. que je suive, that I may follow
Pret. que je suivisse, that I might follow
Participles.
Prea. suivant, following ^
Pwi suivi, followed
coudre, to sew
Indieative Mood.
Proi. je couds, / seiv nous cousons, we sew
tu couds, thou sewest vous cousez, you sew
il coud, he setvs ils cou^ient, thty new •
— 51 —
Imp. je cousais, I was sewing
Pret. je cousis, I sewed
Put. je coudrai, I shall sew
Oond. je coudrais, / should sew
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je couse, that I may sew
Pret. que je cousisse, that I might sew
Participles.
Pres. cousant, sewing
Past, cousu, seioed
le conseil, the advice le rempart, the rampart
poursuivre, to pursue dependre, to depend
le rat, the rat sous, under
Pourquoi me suivez-vous ? Je ne vous suis pas. Yous ne
voulez pas que je yous suive. Yous m'avez defendu de vous
suivre. Je ne vous suivrai plus. Ce chieu me suivait autrefois,
il me suivrait encore, si je voulais. Suivons les bons conseils
qu'on nous donne. Get homme me poursuit; il m'a poursuivi
toute la journee. Je voudrais qu'il ne me poursuivit plus. Les
chats poursuivent les rats. Nous poursuivimes Tennemi jusque
sous les remparts. Que cousez-vous la, mesdemoiselles ? Nous
cousons des habits pour les pauvres. Nous avons cousa toute
la journee. Coudrez-vous encore domain ? Nous coudrions toute
la semaine, si cela dependait de nous.
76. sobrement, soberly gai, gaie, lively
avoir de quoi vivre, to have I'exemple fm. j, the example
means to live on le cr^ancier, the creditor
le sein, the bosom tranquillement, quietly
VdiGGident (m.)jthe accident probablement, probably
Those who wish to live long, must live soberly. Has your
friend means to live on ? He lives on his income. I live quietly
in the (au) bosom of my family. You will still live long. My
uncle would probably still be living, if he had not met with
(had) that accident. I wish that he was still living. This child
was still living this morning. It has not lived long. His sister
~ 52 —
will not live long either. You appear to be sad. How do you
do, my fViend? It seems that you are not always well. Your
brothers seem to be very lively. Follow me. I will follow you.
Your brother was the first, and the others followed him. We
will follow your example. Who pui*sues thee ? We are pursued
by (de) our creditors. j
77, nuitre, to be bom
Indio&Uve Mood.
Pwf. j<* iKus, y fnn u'l- nous naissons, we are bom
tu nais, thou or' vou< ii;ii«oz, yon are bom
il nait, he isbor , they are bom
Imp. j^ iiai--.ii-, /
Pwt. jc naqiiis. / /
Fut. J'* naitrai. /
Cond. jr iiailraU, /
Subjanotive Mood.
Pwi. que je uaisse, Uiat I U' born
Prti que je naquisse, that I were bom
Partioiplat.
Pres. iiaissant, being bom
Put. lie, born
croltr©, to grow
IndioatiTO Mood.
Ptm. je crois, I grow nous eroissons, ive grow
tu crois, thou growest vous croissez, you grow
il croit, he grows ils croissent, they grow
Imp. je croissais, I was qrowinq
Pwt. je crAs, I grew
Fnt. je croitrai, / shall yrow
Cond. je croitrais, T should grow
Subjanotive Mood.
Prw. que je croissc, that I may grow
Pret. que je crusse, that I might grow
Paiiieiplofl.
Pros, croissant, growing
Past, crti, grown
— 53 —
mil, thousand le doigt, the finger
feu, late^ deceased ksuQ d'oeil, visibly
grandir, to grow tall mauvaise herbe, ill weed
Quand 6tes-vous n^? Je suis ne I'an mil huit cent dix. Si
j'etais lie un an plus tot, je serais ne la m^me amiee que vous.
Feu mon pere naquit avant ma tante. Mon oncle est ne apr^s
la mort de son pere. Nous naissons tons pour mourir. Je suis
ne pour etre malheureux. Ma petite soeur est nee au mois
d'Aoiit. Elle ne grandit pas. Yous avez bien grandi depuis
que je ne vous ai vu. Je ne sais si je grandirai encore. Si je
grandissais encore d^un doigt, je serais aussi grand que vous.
Get arbre croit bien. Les jours commencent a croitre. Yous
^tes bien petit; vous ne grandirez plus. Yotre frere grandit a
vue d'oeil. Mauvaise herbe croit toujours.
Pres.
7Sm se taire, to he silent
Indicative Mood,
je me tais, / am silent
tu te tais, thou art silent
il se tait, he is silent
nous nous taisons, we are silent
vous vous taisez, you are silent
ils se taisent, they are silent
je me taisais, / ivas silent
je me tus, / was silent
je me tairai, / shall he silent
Cond. je me tairais, I should he silent
Subjunctive Mood,
que je me taise, that I he silent
que je me tusse, that I were silent
Participles,
sq taisant, heing' silent
tu, heen silent
Conjugate in the same manner:
plaire, to please ; se plaire, to take pleasure^
to enjoy one^s self
Imp.
Pret.
Put.
Pres.
Pret.
Pres.
Past.
- 54 —
aimer inieux, to prefer j like better ravcnir Cm.), (Jie future
Ce jardin me plait bcaucoup, mais ces prairies ne me plai-
sent pas. Je ne me plais pas a la campagne. Je iiie plai.sais
mieux a la ville. Vous plaisez-vous ici? Nous nous plaisons
ici mieux que chez nous. Cela vous plait k dire. Venez ici,
s'il vous plait. Faites-le quand il vous plaira. Quo vous plait-
il? Cela ne m'a pas plu. Taisez-vous. Ma sceur ne pent se
taire. J'aime mieux me taire que de parler mal. Nous nous
taisons quand tout le moude parle. On veut que je me taise.
Pourquoi me tairais-je? Je ne me tairai plus a Tavenir.
79. la Kussie, Russia deplaire, to displease
le grain, the corn davantage, more
je suis nd, I'(liaue been) UHis bom
Do you know when you (have been) were bom? 1 (have
been) was born in winter. This girl (has been) was born in
Russia. Every Ixxly is born to die. This boy (has been) was
born after the death of his father. I wish (that) we were (Pwi
Salg.) born in this country. This tree will not grow any more.
The corn grows visibly. This book pleases me. This garden
would please me better, if it were larger. My bonnet will pro-
bably not please you. I always enjoy myself better in the
country than in town. Why are you not silent? I cannot be
silent, when I see something which displeases me.
SOm pleuvoir, to rain
Indicative Mood.
Pres. il pleut, it rains
Imp. il pleuvait, it toas raining
Prei il plut, it rained
Fut. il pleuvra, it ivill rain
Oond. il pleuvrait, it would rain
Sabjunctive Mood.
Pws. qu'il pleuve, that it may rain
Pwt. qu'il plut, that it might rain
Purticiples.
Pros, pleuvant, raining
Past, plu, rained
— 55 —
neiger, tx> snow tonner, to thunder
geler, to freeze le vent, the wind
greler, to hail I'^clair fm.j, the lightning
faire des dclairs, to lighten
II va pleuvoir. II pleut ddja. Pleut-il? Non, il ne pleut
pas. II pleuvait lorsque je suis venu. II a plu toute la nuit.
II pleuvra surement. II pleuvrait, s'il ne faisait pas tant de
vent. Je voudrais qu'il plut. Je crois qu'il neige. Neige-t-il ?
Non^ il ne neige pas. N'a-t-il pas neige ? Oui, il a neige toute
la nuit. S'il neigeait, 11 ne pleuvrait pas. II neigerait, s'il ne
faisait pas si froid. Je voudrais qu'il neigeat. II commence
ddja a geler. II a gele cette nuit. Yoyez comme il gr^le.
II commence a tonner. Oui, il tonne, je I'entends. II ne
tonne plus, il fait seulement des eclairs. II tonnerait, s'il
faisait plus chaud.
SI, recevoir, to receive; apercevoir, s'apercevoir, to
perceive^ notice, see; to he aware of
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je reqois, / receive nous recevons, lue receive
tu regois, thou receivest vous recevez, yoio 7'eceive
il regoit, he receives ils regoivent, they receive
Imp. je recevais, / tvas receiving
Pret. je rectus, I received
Put. ]e receyrsii, I shall receive
Cond. je recevrais, / should receive
Subjunctive Mood.
Pres. que je reqoive, that I may receive
Pret. que je regusse, that I might receive
Participles.
Pres. recevant, receiving
Past, rec^u, received
Indicative Mood.
Pres. je m'apercois, I perceive
tu t'apergois, thoio perceivesi
il s'aperqoit, he perceives
nous nous apercevons, we perceive
vous vous apercevez, you perceive
ils s'aper^oivent, they perceive
— o6 —
Imp. j'apercevais, / was perceiving
Pret, j'aperi^us, I perceived
Put. j'ai)crcevrai, / 8?iall perceive
Oond. j'apercevrais, I should perceive
Snbjonoiiye Mood.
Pres. que j'apei^oive, that I may perceive
Pwi que j'a|)cr(;usse, that I might perceive
PartlotplM.
Pwi. apcrccvant, perceiving
Put aper(;u, perceived
Gbi\jugate in the fvune niAimer:
d^cevoir, to deceive, cGucevoir» to conceive, devoir, to o¥}e
la com^te, the comet la ruse, (the) cunning, trick
tranquille, quiet rofflcier (m.)j the officer
avertiis to warn le remade, the remedy
apportor remMe^ to remedy
•rai>or(joi8 un homnie dc loin. Nous raporcovons aussL
J'apor^us liior une coin^tc. Nous Tavons aix»r(;ue avant voua.
Je m'apcnjois bieu do la ruse, niais vous ne vou8 en apercevez
pas. Si mon fi'^i'c 8'apercevait du danger, il Berait nioins tran-
quille. Je m'en suis ft|)er(ju aujourd'hui. Si je nfen ^tais
aperqu plus tot, j y aurais apiM)rtd reniMe. Quand je m'en
aperce^Tai, je vous le diraL Ne vous en apercevez- vous pas?
Mon cousin s'en apercevra bien. On ne pent s'en apercevoir;
je ne m'en suis jamais apert^u. Je m'en serais peut-^tre aper(;u,
si Ton m'en avail averti. J'ai re(;u une lettre d'un ofRcier qui
etait en France Tannde demi^re avec mon fr^re.
82. ne — gu^re, scarcely, hardly
Do you perceive that tree there? I do not perceive it.
These children perceive it. If you i>erceive anything, you must
tell (it). We will tell you when we perceive it. I (have)
soon perceived this. My mother will not j)erceive it. Has
thy brother not perceived it? No, he scarcely perceives such
things. If I should perceive, that you deceive me, I would tell (it)
to your father. Thy cousin is very idle; his master has also per-
ceived it. I do not think that he perceives (may perceive) it.
61 -
83.
Pres.
Imp.
Pret.
Fut.
Oond.
Pres.
Pret.
Pres.
Past.
s'asseoir, to sit down
Indicative Mood.
je m'assieds, I sit down
tu t'assieds, thou sitst down
il s'assied, he sits down
nous nous asseyons, we sit doion
vous vous asseyez, you sit down
lis s'asseyent, they sit down
je m'asseyais, I ivas sitting doion
je m'assis, / sat down
jem'assidrai \ i shall sit down
je m'asseyerai )
je m'assierais \ j ^nould M down
je m'asseyerais )
Subjunctive Mood,
que je m'asseye, that I may sit doion
que je m'assisse, that I might sit doion
Participles,
s'asseyant, sitting doion
assis, sat down
faire place^ to malm room
le canape, the sofa
(de) si tot, so soon
Je suis deja assis. Je m-as-
Ne Yous plait-il pas de vous
la place, (the) place^ room
le fauteuil, the arm-chair
aupres de, near
Asseyez-vous, s'il vous plait,
sieds la ou je trouve une place,
asseoir? Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir. Je m'assierai pour
vous obeir. Dites-lui qu'elle s'asseye; dites-lui de s'asseoir. Je
m'asseyais souvent a terre, quand j'etais dans mon jardin. Je
m'assis hier dans un fauteuil, et ma soeur s'assit sur un canape.
Ou voulez-vous que je m'asseye? Je m'assierai aupres de vous.
Je me suis assis ou j'ai trouve une place. Mes soeurs ne se sont
pas encore assises. Si je m'etais assis, je ne me serais pas leve
de sit6t. Pourquoi ne vous asseyez-vous pas ? II n'y a plus
de place pour s'asseoir. Faites place, pour que ce monsieur
puisse s'asseoir.
i
— 58 -^
84. las, lasse, tired casser, to break
la pierre, t?ie stone fi c6t<^ de, by (he side of^ beside
tiiWndrej to expecty uiiti n^r derri^re, l>ehind
Sit down, my child. I am not tired. I seldom sit down.
Sit down, I shall sit down too. I sat down on a stone to
wait for my brother. Do not sit dov^Ti on that chair, it is broken.
We will .sit down on that sofa. Do you wish me to (that I may)
sit down beside you ? I sat down under the tree, thy brother sat
down behind me. Your sisters do not generally sit do\Mi. I
will not sit do^Ti, I am not tired. My uncle wished me to sit
down (that I might sit down) by the side of my sister.
85. 6tre asais, to be seated ^tre delx3ut, to be standing
roster assis, to remain seated entire, between
Je suis assis ici, mais Je ne snis pas bien assis. Ne suis-je
pas assis a ma place? Yous n*^tes pas bien assise, mademoi-
selle. Je n't5tais pas bien assis la. Si j'avais €i6 assis un quart
d'heure, je ne serais plus las. D^s que je ftis assis un moment,
je me levai. J'ai ^td assis entre vos deux soeurs. Restez assis
encore un pen. Je voudrais que je ne fosse pas assis ici. Je ne
veux pas ^tre assis la. Je voudrais ^tre assis aupr^s de ma
m^re. Oii dtiez-vous assise a Tc^glise, madame? J'etais assise
aupr^s de nm tante. Je n'y ai ^i6 assise que deux fois.
Pourquoi ^tes-vous dcbout, messieurs?
86. le berceau, the artxyr autour de, round
Why do you not sit down ? I have been seated too long.
I cannot sit down, any more. It is impossible for me to remain
seated the whole day. Where is your brother? He is sitting
before the door. My sisters sat yesterday in the garden. The
whole family was sitting round the table. I have been seated
(I have already been sitting) more than three hours. My father
wishes me always to be (that I be) seated. I do not like sitting.
If I had been sitting as long as you, I should no longer be tired.
To-morrow wc will sit in our arbor. Yesterday we sat there
the whole afternoon. These ladies are always standing, they
will not sit down. I cannot stand a long time, I am tired at once.
59
87. ^tre aim^, to he loved
Indicative Mood.
Present. je suis aime, / am loved
' Imperfect. j'etais aime, I was loved
Preterit. je fus aime, / loas loved
Perfect. j'ai ete aime, I have been loved
Pret. anterior, j'eus ete aimey I had been loved
Pluperfect. j 'avals ete aimey I had been loved
Future. je serai aime, / shall be loved
Second Put. j'aurai ete aime, I shall have been loved
Pros. Cond. je serais aime, I should be loved
Past Oond. j'aurais ete aime, I should have been loved
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. que je sois aime, that I may be loved
Imperfect. que je fusse aime, that I might be loved
Perfect. que j'aie ete aime, that I may have been loved
Pluperfect. que j'eusse ete aioie, that I might have been loved
Imperative Mood,
sois aime, be (thou) loved
soyons aimes, let us be loved
soyez aimes, be (you) loved
Infinitive Mood.
Pros, ^tre aime, to be loved
Pret. avoir ete aime, to have been loved
Participles.
Pres. etant aime, being loved
Past, ayant ete aime, having been loved
Conjugate in the same manner:
je ne suis pas aime; suis-je aime ? ne suis-je pas aime ?
abandonner, to abandon babiller, to chatter
par, by; de, by relier, to bind
chatier, to chastise de tout raon coeur, with all my heart
Tu es aime de tes amis. Le pauvre est abandonne de tout
le monde. Honore ton pere et ta mdre, et tu seras honore.
Un enfant sage ne sera jamais hai. Les mechants seront punis.
Tu as ete chatie par ton maitre pour avoir babille. Quand mon
— GO —
liTre sera reli^, je vous le pr^terai de tout mon coenr. Ta soeur
est aiinde de ses maitres, parce quVlle est toujours appliqu^ et
attentive. Cliarles a dte puui ix)ur n'avoir pas lait son tht^ine.
Faites votre devoir, pour que vous ne soyez pas punis. Si vous
remplissez vos devoirs, vous serez aimds et louds. Ces oiifantr^
seraient aimers de leurs amis, s'ils dtaient plus modeste.-^.
S8. lid^lement, faithfully achever, to finish
Thy brother is loved and praise<i by his masters, because he
is industrious and attentive; but thou art blamed, because thou
dost not like (to) work. Charles has been punished, Iwcause he
had not finished his exercises. Finish yours that you too may not
be punished. Always Ikj honest antl <liligent ; (the) honest and
diligent men arc never despised. We were always loved by our
masters, because we were diligent and liked (to) work. If you
raithlully fulfil your duties, you will be loved and praised. I
hope that you will be well received by your uncle. You have
not followed my advice, you will eertaiuly be punished for it
My books have been bound.
80. il y a, i^ is, there is, there are
le mille, the mile la cave, the cellar
ii > a iiii an que je ne Tai vu. II y a une heure que je suis
de retour. II y a trois jours que je suis malade. II y a quatre
semaines que je n'y ai ^16. II y a longtemps qu'on me la dit.
II y a deux milles d'ici a Harlem. II y a ici un hommc qui vous
cherche. II y a assez de vin dans la cave. II y a une voiture
a la porte. II y a d(5ja des cerises. Dites-moi ce qu'il y a a
faire. II y a beaucoup de personnes qui disent cela. II n'y a
personne au logis. J'ai ^te chez vous, il n'y a qu'un moment.
II n'y a qu'un quart d'heure qu'il est parti. Y a-t-il de la viamle
au marchd? II y en a beaucoup.
90. la fabrique, the manufax^tory
les Etats-Unis (m,), the United States
Were there many people at the concert yesterday ? There
were a great many there. There are a great number of manu-
factories in the United States. There will be much fruit this
— 61 —
year. Is there somebody (there) ? I see no one. Have you been
learning this language long? Only six months. How long
have you been here? Only a fortnight. Is there any more
(still some) wine in the bottle? There is only one glass. What
is there to fear? Is it far from here to Mount Yernon? It is
only twenty miles.
91. il est, c'est, cela est, it is, that is
c'est is used when followed by a Noun, a Pronoun, or a single Adjective:
il est is used when followed by an Adjective with a Verb, and in all
denominations of time, as: temps, midi, etc.
c'est mon frere, it is my brother c'est bon, it is good
c'est moi, it is I il est facile de plaire, it is easy to please
certain, -aine, certain douteux, -euse, doubtful
Men, very; fort, very a son gre, to his (her) satisfaction
II est vrai que vous me I'avez promis. Yous me I'avez
promis, c'est tres-certain. II est triste qu'il ait perdu son pere.
Oui, c'est bien triste. II est necessaire que je le lui disc. Oui,
c'est tres-necessaire. Ma soeur nous apportera peut-^tre de
bonnes nouvelles; cela serait bien agreable, mais c'est fort dou-
teux. II est difficile de faire quelque chose a son grd. II est
temps de partir. II n'est pas encore neuf heures et trois
quarts. Qu'est ce que c'est? C'est du vinaigre; ce n'est pas
du vin. C'est la vdrite. Ce n'est qu'un mensonge.
92. causer, to cause, give d'ou vient? how is it?
mal a la tete, the head-ache maigre, thin, meagre
c'est dommage, it is a pity faire du bien, to do good
I have been for a little walk, that has done me good. Do
not stay in the sun, that would give you a head-ache. It is a
pity you have lost your penknife. It is the first time I have
lost anything. It would be desirable for it to (that it might) rain
soon. Yes, certainly, it would be very desirable. What o'clock
is it ? It is still early: it is noon, it is not late. What o'clock
is it striking? I believe it is one .o'clock. How is it that you
are so thin ? Because I have been ill. Who told me that? It
is I who told it to you.
— 62 —
93. il ftiit, U h; il vaut mieux, it is better
la rue, the street rester chez soi, to stay at home
sale, dirty dtouffant, -ante, sultry
^pais, -aisscy thicks heavy rentrer chez soi, to return home
le pas, the step continucr, to continue
dcvant soi, before one' 8 self se niettrc a couvert, to get
Mger, Idg^rc, light under sMter
le brouillard, the fog V6t6 (jn.)f the summer
il fait (111 brouillard, it is foggy
il fait un brouillard tres-<»pai8, it is very foggy
il fait bien froid, it is very cold
il fait asscz beau temps, it is pretty fine weather
Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui? II fait assez beau temps;
mais les rues sont tr^s-salcs. Le brouillard ^tait si dpais qu'on
ne voyait pas a dix ])a8 devant soi. II a fait bien froid Thiver
dernier, et oct dtt^ il fait un chaud dtouffant. Le vent se l^ve.
Quel brouillard ! Cc nest qu'un l<^ger brouillard. II vaut mieux
rester chez soi quo do sortir par (in) co mauvais temps. II vau-
dra mieux rentrer chez nous que de continuer notre promenade.
Fait-il trop ftoid |K)ur vous dans cctte chambre ? II n y fait ni
trop froid, ni trop ehuud. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieux nous mettre
a coiivfMt dans cette maison-la? Vous avez raison, entrons!
94, il fait du vent, it is windy
il fait beaucoup de vent, it is very windy
il fait de la poussi^re, it is dusty (la poussi^re, the dust)
point du tout, not at all, rien du tout, nothing at all
Is it warm? Is it cold? Is it fine weather? Is it not
^oggy? Are you going out to-day? No, Sir, I am obliged to
stay at home to-ila}*. That is a pity: for it is pretty fine
weather. But, is it not dusty ? Not at all. Will there be much
wine this year? There will be very little (of it), because it has
been too cold this summer: but there will be much fruit. It is
better to work than to play. It is better to arrive too early
than too late. Last night it was very windy; but now the
weather is fine. It is better to play than to do nothing at all.
-~ 63 —
95. je suis bien aise, I am very glad
je suis charm^, / am delighted
je suis fache, / am sorry
je me repens, I repent
je m'etonne, I ivonder
je me trouve bien, mal, I feel well, ill
je me plais ici, Hike being here
se baigner, to bathe consulter, to consult
habile, skillful faire tous ses efforts, to do one's
guerir, to cure utmost
le mal, the complaint I'emploi, (m,) the office
jusqu' aujourd'hui, till to-day
Je suis bien aise de vous trouver ici. Nous sommes charmes
d'apprendre que vous ne nous quitterez pas. II parait que vous
vous plaisez chez nous. Yotre frere sera fache de n'avoir pu
vous accompagner. Je ne m'etonne plus de vous voir de si
bonne humeur. Mon oncle m'a dit que vous vous baignez tous
les jours; comment vous en trouvez-vous ? Je m'en trouve tres-
bien; je m'en suis fort bien trouve jusqu' aujourd'hui. Le me-
decin a reussi a guerir mon mal. C'est un homme fort habile;
il reussit en tout. Je ne me repens pas de I'avoir consulte.
Suivez son conseil, vous vous en trouverez bien. Mon ami ne
se plait plus a la campagne; il fait tous ses efforts pour obtenir
un emploi; mais je crains qu'il ne reussisse pas.
96. simple, simple la maladie, (the) illness
beaucoup de bien, a great deal of good
How do you like being here ? I like being here very much;
but I should like it still better, if I had a little more work. I
(have) always liked to be in the country. Your brother takes a
walk every day; it does him a great deal of good; he repents (of)
not having followed your advice sooner. If he continue (s) to
lead a simple and active life, he will feel (find himself) very
well. The physician will not succeed in curing him of this
illness. I am delighted to see you again. We are delighted
to be able to do you this service.
— 64 — .
97, flu jardin, from the garden
au jardin, to the garden^ into the garden
le cocher, the coachman le tiroir, tJie dratver
Tc^curie (/J, tJie stable le cabaret, t/t^ inn
le spectacle, t/ie theater la bourse, </«€ Exchange
la serviette, t/ie napkin rh6tel de ville CmJ, City-Hall
Ou avez-vous et(^, mes enfants ? Nous avons ^t^ a I'i^cole et
a rdglise. Le cocher est-il k T^urie? La servaute est^lle dans
la cave ? Ma m^rc a 6l6 au raarchd, et mou pi^re a la poste.
Nous irons ce soir au concert. Mes fr^res iront au 8i>ectaclc.
Mes cousins sont a la campagne depuis six mois; ils y rcsteront
encore huit ou quinze jonrs. Od avez-vous mis les serviettes,
Marie? Je me souviens de les avoir mises au tiroir. Cet homme
va tons les jours nu calmret. Nous avons 6i6 aujourd'hui a la
l)ourse. DVnl venoz-vous k present? Nous venons de la pro-
menade. Ma tante vient de T^glise, et i^on oncle vient de
ThAtel de ville. Est-ce votre Mrc qui sort <Im jnnliny Par-
donnez-moi, c*est le flls de notre voisin.
OS. de la, thence j from there avant d'aller, be/ore going
la for^t, the forest le maire, the Mayor
Where is thy brother? I think that he is in the garden or
in the kitchen. Have you been to school tonlay? My sister
has been (is) in the country since the day before yesterday; she
is not well. Where are you going now? I am going to church
with my brother, and from there I will go to the Exchange.
Take (carry) this letter to the post-oflBce before going to the
theater. Where have 3'ou put my penknife? I have put it
in the drawer. Whence do these boys come ? I think (that)
they come from the forest. When Charles comes from school,
send him to City-Hall; the Mayor will give him a book for me.
90^ duchagTln, (jruj] annoyance dcs connaissances, learning
de Tesprit, witj intelligence de vrais amis, true friends
arrogant, -ante, haughty des amis riches, ric7i/rie7i(Z«
persecuter, to persecute de la modestie, modesty
11 se peut, it may he
— 65 —
Si nous avions de Fargent, nous aurions aussi des amis. Si
vous aviez du chagrin, vous ne seriez pas si gai. Nous aurions
eu du plaisir a la campagne, si vous aviez 6t6 avec nous. Si
vous aviez de I'esprit, vous ne seriez pas si arrogant. II se pent
que vous ayez des connaissanceSj mais vous n'etes pas modeste.
Si cet homme avait eu du bonheur, il ne serait pas si pauvre.
II est triste d'avoir des ennemis, qui nous persecutent. Yous
avez de I'argent et du bien, mais je voudrais que vous eussiez
aussi de la modestie et des connaissances.
100. le credit, the credit le sapin, theflr
pourtant, nevertheless la mine, the mine
avoir I'air triste, to look sad fournir, to furnish (with)
le chene, the oak le cuivre, copper
le hetre, the beech le plomb, lead
Have you had pleasure in the country? Have you any rela-
tives in New Haven? My neighbor has money and credit, but
nevertheless he is not satisfied. This young man has intelli-
gence and learning; he is very modest. I have had mis-
fortunes. Has your brother had some annoyance ? he looks so
sad. Bring me salt, pepper, mustard, and oil. In the forests
there are oaks, beeches, and firs. (The) mines furnish us
(with) gold, silver, copper, lead, and iron. Has the gardener
still flowers and fruit? If I had good bread, fresh water, and
a piece of cheese, I should be satisfied.
101. avoir faim, to be hungry avoirfroid,fo be cold
avoir soif, to be thirsty avoir sommeil, to be sleepy
avoir raison, to be right avoir besoin de, to be in need
former, to close, shut of, loant
a I'heure qu'il est, at this hour profondement, soundly, deeply
je vous demande pardon, I beg your pardon
J'ai faim. J'ai grand' faim. J'ai de Tappetit. Donnez-moi
a manger, s'il vous plait. Que desirez-TOus? Youlez-vous du
jambon ou du fromage? Je vous demanderai un peu de soupe
et de viande. N'avez-vous pas soif? J'ai bien soif. Yoici du via
— 66 —
et de la bi^re, prenez ce que vous vondrcz. Je vais me coucher.
Oomment, vous voulez-vous coucher a Theurc qu'il est? J'ai
BorameiL Je n'ai pas dormi la nuit pass^e; j'ai besoin dc
repos. Vous avez dormi prolbnd^ment. Je vous deinande par-
don, je n'ai pas fcrmd Toeil ^de) toute la nuit. J'ai eu hieu
froid; il n'y avait pas de feu dans ma chain l)i^. Vous vous
trompez; il j avait un bon feu.
102, £LyoirhoTite,tobeas?iam€d avoir coutumc, to 6^ aocw^tomed
avoir peur, to be afraid avoir patience, to be patient
avoir piti^, to have pity avoir envic, to have a mind
dur, dure, hard Y\\d\nl\x\l(t(f,\thc habit ^cnatom
dormir lagrasse matinde, to sleep late in the morning
{the fat morning)
Comment, vous (^tes encore au lit? N'avez-vous paa honte
de dormir la grasse matinee ? J'aurais honte de me lever si
tard. Je ne puis me lever aujourd'hui, j'ai mal a la t^te. Vous
6tes un petit paresseux, Quand il faut aller a I'dcole, vous
avez toujours quelque mal. Vous avez coutume de vous cou-
cher de bonne heure et de vous lever tard. C'est uue mauvaisc
habitude. Je vous prie d'avoir patience un moment; je mo
l^verai aussitot. Je n*ai pas envie d'attendre plus longtemps.
J'ai peur d'arriver trop tard a Tdgliso. Vous avez le coeur
bien dur; vous n'avez pas piti<5 d'un pauvrc maladc. Vous
n'^tes pas mahide, vous n'avcz pas envic d'aller a lecole; vous
n'aimez pas Tdtude.
103, luire, to shine merci, th/ink you
How do you do, Henry? will you not take a walk with me?
Thank you, I have no mind to go out now. I am sleepy. Are
you not ashamed to be so idle ? Come, we will go to our uncle's
garden. What o'clock is it? It is only six o'clock; the sun is
still shining. You are right, it is still early; I will go with you.
I am accustomed to take a walk every day before going to bed.
That is a good habit. But we are walking too fast (quickly).
Let us rest a little. I am very tired. You must have patience,
I am very thirsty, I should like to drink some water.
~ 67 —
104. commode, comfortable occupy, -ee, busy
laporcelaine,^^eporc6^am ^U^Mr^i^-iQ^thoughtlesHj giddy
le marbre, the marble le chatiment, the chastisement
si, aussi, as, quite as tant, autant, as much, as many
Je suis aussi grand que toi, I am as tall as you
Tu n'es pas si grand que moi, ) ^^^^ ^,,^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^
Tu n es pas aussi grand que moi, )
Je travaille autant que vous, / work quite as much as you.
Yous ne travaillez pas tant que moi, ] you do not work as
Yous ne travaillez pas autant que moi, J much as L
Yotre frere est-il aussi grand que moi? II n'est pas si
grand que vous. A-t-il autant de livres que moi ? II n'a pas
tant de livres que vous. La maison de votre oncle est aussi
commode que la notre. Ce jardin est tres-grand, mais il n'est
pas si beau que le notre. Yous ne m'aimez pas tant que je
vous aime. La porcelaine est aussi blanche que le marbre.
Yotre cousin etait si occupe, quil ne me vit point. II n'est pas
si heureux qu'il le parait. Yotre soeur est si etourdie qu'elle a
deja oublie le chatiment. Mon fils ne travaille pas autant que
vous. Yous n'avez pas travaille aussi longtemps que moi.
lOS* plus, more; le plus,^/ie most moms,less; le moins,^/ie least
plus de, more than moins de, less than
plus de, moins de are used for more tltari^ less tJian^
before a Number.
Yous etes plus grand que mon frere, mais vous ^tes moins
sage que lui. Yotre medecin est moins habile que le notre.
Ce monsieur est tres-riche; il a plus de trente maisons. Yotre
fils est tres-applique; il a fait aujourd'hui plus de six themes.
Notre jardinier a beaucoup d'enfants; je crois qu'il en a plus
de douze. Tu as beaucoup d'affaires; mon fr^re en a plus que
toi; mais mon cousin en a le plus. Get ouvrier ne demande
pas moins de cmq ecus par jour. L'armee ne faisait pas plus
de quinze milles par jour. L'enfant a dormi plus de deux heures.
Yos ireres out ete tr^s-appliques aujourd'hui; lis ont fait trois
themes de plus.
106. la carte, the card, map ddpoiiser, to spend
la recompense, tlie reward copier, to copy
Thou art taller than I; but thy brother is not so tall as I.
My uncle is quite as rich as thy father. We have quite as
many l)ooks as you; but we have not so many maps. My son,
thou hast been so lilligent, that thou deservest a reward. I
liave not spent so much as you think. 1 am quite us much
delighted at it as you. My sons do not work so much as yours.
Mr. Belmont has more children than his brother. We have
been more diligent to-^lay than yesterday; we have done two
exercises {de) more. I have much patience, but you have still
more (of it). Henry has copied more than te?) I'^ttir^ ti».ilay.
You cannot give him less than two francs.
107, tant, aOy so much d aiiiant. so much
plus plus, tfie mo7'e tht nmn
moins moins, the less — t?ie less
enrou^, -<^, hoarse encourager, to encourage
distinguer, to distinguish la gaitd, cheerfulness
faible, weak s'attrister, to grieve
^onome, saving observer, to observe
qu'avez-vous ? what is tlie matter with you ?
Cet enfant est tout enroud, tant il a cri^. Je ne puis
distinguer ces lettres, tant mes yeux sont faibles. Plus on a
d'argent, plus on a d'amis. Plus il boit, plus il a soif. Plus le
drap est fin, i)lus il est lx)n. Plus on le prie, moins il le fait.
Moins il a d'argent, plus il est ^conome. Plus on est instruit,
plus il faut ^tre modeste. Je ne sais ce que vous pouvez avoir,
ma ch^re Julie, plus on rit ici, plus vous pleurez; plus on vous
encourage a vous livrer a la gaite, j)lus vous vous attristez.
Plus je vous observe, moins je comprends ce qui vous fait
tant plcurer. 0, mon cher oncle, vous ne savez pas tout
ce que je souflfre. Plus nous poss^dons, moins nous sommes
contents. Plus le jour est long, plus la nuit est courte. Moins
Ton ddsire, plus on est content. Plus on est ag^, plus on de-
vrait 6tre sens^.
— 69 —
108. The Adjectives meilleur, better; pire, worse; autre,
oth^r^ different; and the Adverbs plus, more; moins, less;
mieux, better ; pis, worse ; autrement, otherwise require ne
before the verb following, unless the preceding verb be used negatively or
interrogatively:
il est plus heureux qu'on ne croit, he is happier than one thinks J
il n'est pas plus heureux qu'on croit, he is not happier than one thinks \^
dejeuner, to breakfast s'imaginer, to imagine
so r^tablir, to get better souper, to sup
Ma soeur chante mieux qu'elle ne joue. Yous ^tes plus heu-
reux que vous ne le meritez. A la campagne j'ai eu plus de
plaisir que je n'en avals a la ville. Les dames parlent ordinai-
rement mieux qu'elles n'ecrivent. Le riche n'est pas si heu-
reux que le pauvre se I'imagine. Yous etes venu plus tot
que je ne croyais. Le menteur parle autrement qu'il ne pense.
Nous avons eu tant de plaisir a la campagne que nous y som-
mes restes plus longtemps qu'on ne nous I'avait permis. Nous
souperons mieux que nous n'avons dejeun^. Ma soeur s'est
retablie beaucoup plus tot qu'on ne I'avait espere. Un jeune
homme modeste parle moins qu'il n'ecoute.
109. rhomme le plus aimable^ the most amiable man
de I'homme le plus aim able, of the most amiable man
a I'homme le plus aim able, to the most amiable man
les hommes les plus aimables, the most amiable men
s'adresser, to address one's self important, ^ante, important
corrompu, -ue, corrupted positif, -ive, positive
la circonstance, the circumstance remarquable, remarkable
C'est le medecin le plus habile que je connaisse. Nous par-
Ions du medecin le plus habile de la ville. Yous vous etes
adresse a I'homme le plus corrompu de tons. Londres est la
plus grande ville du monde. Je me souviens encore des circon-
stances les plus importantes. II m'a promis de la mani^re la
plus positive de m'ecrire, mais il n'a pas tenu parole. J'ai 6t6
hier a Philadelphie; c'est une des villes les plus remarquables
des Etats-Unis. Nous prendrons le chemin le plus court
pour aller a Hastings. C'est la plus belle maison de la ville,
L'homme le plus riche n'est pas toujours le plus heureux.
— TO -
no. rinprratitude (/J, ingraiiiude m^irc, to speak ill
quelquerois, sometimes affligcr, to grieve
par cxcmple, for instance prdsumer, to suppose
You complain of the ingratitude of (the) men; one some-
times rewards badly the most important services, and it hap-
pens pretty often, that those to whom one has done a great
deal of good, an* the most ungrateful. Your nelghljt)r Clark,
for instance, is the most ungrateful man in the world, lie
si>eaks ill of everylKxly,evcn of iiis benefactors. That grieves me
more than you think. Mr. Clark 8i)eak8 dilTerently from what
he thinks. He is not so bad as you supjxwe. The honest
man never speaks otherwise than he thinks. This is the most
learned man (that) I know. I have written more than ten letters.
Ill* qui ? qui est-oe qui ? who f
dc qui? de qui est-cc que? of tvhovi f
a qui? a qui e.'^t-ce que ? to whom?
qui ? qui est-ce que ? wliom ?
que 't quo! ? qu'est-<'e qui ? what ?
de quoi ? of what ?
i\ quoi t to what ?
que? qu'est-ce que? tvluit?
la modiste, the milliner il est question, the question is
Te^tudiant (m.j, the student tourmenter, to vex
Qui est cet homme-la ? C'est un homme tr^instruit. C^est
un officier franqais. Qui est cette femme-la? C'est une
modiste. Qui sont ces messieurs? Ce sont des dtudiants.
Qui sont ces dames ? Ce sont les soeurs de madame Tournon.
De qui parlez-vous? A qui avez-vous dcrit? Qui est-ce qui a
fait cela? Qui est-ce que vous cherchez? Qui cherchcz-vous ?
De quoi avez-vous besoin ? A qui est-ce que vous avez donn^
ma canne ? De qui estK^e qu'il est question ? Pour qui est-ce
que vous travaillez? Quoi, vous ^tes encore ici ? Dc quoi vous
occupez-vous done? A quoi pensez-vous? Que dites-vous?
Que sommes-nous? Que vous a-t-il r^pondu? Qu'avez-
vous pris? Qu'est-ce que vous ecrivez? Qu'est-ce qui vous
tourmente ?
11
112.
Singnlar.
Plural
m.
f.
m.
f.
quel
quelle?
quels
quelles ? wliich ? what ?
lequel
laquelle?
lesq'uels
lesquelles? which?
duquel
de laquelle?
desquels
desquelles? of which?
auquel
a laquelle?
auxquels
auxquelles? to ivhich?
lequel
laquelle ?
lesquels
lesquelles? which?
quel homme ? what, ivhich man ?
quelles sont ses intentions? what are his intentions?
lequel de ces hommes? which (one) of these men?
lesquelles de ces femmes ? which of these women?
la preference^ the preference la condition, the condition
la saison, the season accepter, to accept
Quel livre lisez-vous ? Quels fruits aimez-YOus le plus? De
quelles fleurs prendrez-vous ? A quels tableaux donnez-vous
la preference ? De quelles maisons parlez-vous ? Quels sont
les noms des saisons? Sous quelles conditions I'accepterez-
Yous ? Quel age a-t-elle ? Quel temps fait-il ? Quelle heure
est-il? Lequel de ces jardins yous plait le plus? Laquelle de
ces dames est Yotre soeur? Lesquels de ces messieurs parlent
frangais? Lesquelles de yos soeurs sont malades? Mon frere
est-il parti? Lequel? L'alnd. Ma soeur est-elle arriY^e?
Laquelle ? J^ai donne Yotre liYre a une de yos filles. A laquelle ?
J'ai regu ce cadeau d'un de mes amis. Duquel? Auxquels de
ces messieurs aYcz-Yous parle ?
113. blesser, to ivound la piece d'argent,if7ie piece o/mone]/
iQ^e^'^m^the drawing le combat, the combat^ fight
le maltre de dessin, the drawing-master
Ya Ycnir, is going to come, is coming
What are you doing there ? We are drawing. What are
you drawing then ? Flowers. Which is your drawing, Charles ?
This is it. That is not badly done. Where is Louisa? She
is in the garden. What is she doing there? I do not know
(it). Does she not know that the drawing-master is coming?
What would he say, if she were not here ! What do you wish
to do with (of) this piece of money? I will giYC it to one of
these poor men. Who has been in my room ? To whom haYe
— 72 —
you toUl it? From whom have yon heard (learned) it? In
which combat has your brother been wounded y Ol' which com-
bat did you speak? Of whom are you thinking? Which of
your brothers has arrived? Which of your sisters is ill? To
which of these girls did you give the letter ?
114.
8. k PI- Singnl&r. PlnrtL
qui lequel laquelle Icsquels lesquelles / - . ..*/.
,^^" jduquel de laquelle dcsquels desquelles ichosc^ of which
k qui auquel alaquelle auxquels auxquelles to whom^to which
que lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles tohom, which
qui, aH ihi* complement of a prepoHition, can only be oaed for peraoDS,
or for UiingH iH>rHonifie<l; for animalM and things not penonified we
uKc lequel, laquelle^ leHqiieLs, lesquelleH.
la facilitd, tase^ fluency la probite, honcMy
s'entretenir, to talk, converse voyager, to travel
Yoila un jeune hommc qui (5crit tr^s-bien. C'est une jeune
dame qui parlc avec beaucoup de facility. J'aime m'entrctenir
avec des hommes qui ont beaucoup voyag^. C'est le mddecin
que j'ai vu, la demoiselle que vous connaissez. Ce sont les
livres que vous cherchez, les tleurs que vous aimez. Oil est la
lettre dont vous parlez? Avez-vous vu les personnes dont on
dit tant de bien? C'est un horame dont je connais la probity,
Elle ne sait ce qu'elle dit; ils ne savent ce qu'ils font. Monsieur
Geri^on m'dcrivit un billet, auquel je n'ai pas r^pondu. C'est
de quoi jc me plains. C'est a quoi je pense souvent.
llo. sauver, to save passer, to spend (time)
lii-bas, yonder la feuille, the leaf
habiter, to inhabit tomber, to fall
convenir, to suit la valeur, tJie value
Here is the young man who has saved the child of our
neighbor. The house wiiich you see yonder, is that which my
aunt has bought. The rooms which you inhabit, are very com-
fortable. Do you know the lady of whom we are talking?
Where is the poor man to whom you have given a glass of
— T3 —
water? Have you seen the child whose father is so ill? The
ribbons you have sent me, suit me. The days which I have
spent with you, have been very agreeable to me. There is the
tree under which we have rested so often, and whose leaves are
already falling. These are things whose value I do not know.
The young man of whom you are speaking, has departed.
116. eviter, to avoid les habillements (m. j, the clothing
nuisible, hurtful renvoyer, to put off
ce qui, ce que are employed for that which, or its equivalent what,
Trouvez-vous ce que vous cherchez ? Ce que vous apprenez
est utile. Comprenez-vous ce que je vous dis? Nous parlous
de ce dont vous parlez. Nous faisons ce que nous pouvons. Ce
que vous nous dites, est-il vrai? Ce que je vous dis est vrai.
Que mettez-vous dans votre cotfre? Nous-y mettons ce que
nous avons, nos habillements et nos livres. Ce jeune homme
sait41 ce qu'il fait ? II salt ce qn'il fait et ce qu'il dit. Faites-
vous ce que le maitre vous ordonne ? Nous faisons ce qu'il
nous dit. Yoila ce que vous desirez. Prenez ce qui vous plait.
Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours utile. Pensez toujours a ce
que vous dites, mais ne dites pas toujours ce que vous pensez.
Ne renvoyez pas a demain ce que vous pouvez faire aujourd'hui.
Evitez ce qui est nuisible a la sant^.
117. quelque, some, amj quelqu'un, -une, ) some one
chaque, every ^ each quelques-uns, -unes, ) some
interesser, to interest chacun, -une, every one, each one
r^tat, the position remettre, to put hack
Avez-vous vu quelqu'un dans le jardin? Mon oncle m'a
donne de I'argent. Pretez-moi quelques plumes. Quelqu'un
viendra diner avec nous. J'ai vu quelques etudiants. Je parle
de quelqu'un que vous connaissez. Quelques-uns de nos amis
viendront ce soir. Je me servirai de quelques-uns de vos livres.
Voila quelque chose de beau. Nous parlous de quelque chose
qui vous interesse. Chaque etat a ses plaisirs. Chacun vit a sa
maniere. Chacun doit remplir ses devoirs. Le maitre a parld a
chacun de ses ecoliers. Kemettez ces livres chacun a sa place.
Donnez-moi quelques-unes de ces fleurs.
— 74 —
118. personuCy no anejnoboily rien, noViing
aucun, -une, no, no one nul, nulle, nOj no <me
The pronouDH persoiiue, rien, nn<*iiii, mil, ore generally ac-
oompouied by the motive ue.
m" lacher, to get anyry uu litMi, a trifle
(^pargner, to spare rimpression (f,),the impression
lereprochCy the reproacJi rcxccption (/J, the exception
Jc n'ai rien k faire. Hien ne me fait plaisir. Je ne oais rien
de tout ccla. La iiiort irt^pargno p^Tsoniu*. Xiil ne ronnaft
Ic sort qui ratt(*ncl. Ceganjon .«e tacho pour un rien. Personne
ne le sait. Je ne connais i^rsonne ici. N*en ditcs rien k
pcrsonno. Je ne lo dirai i\ personne. Pcrsonne ne me I'a
donumdr. Nu! dc vou.s ne sait dossinor. Nul ne sait s'il sera
en vie dcmain. I^os repnK'hes ne font nulle impression sur lui.
Je n'ai pris aucun de ees livres. Aucun de mes amis ne viendra.
Nulle r^gle sans exception. Avez-vous vu quelques-unes de ces
dames ? Je if en ai vu aueune. Je n'ai parle a aucun de ces
messieurs. Je ne conn a is porsonne si savant tpie vous. Vous
ne plaisez a personnr. ^ m1 quelquim ici? Personne.
110. le bruit, the noiae le doUar, the dollar
rare, rare le nitrite, the merit
8'aiT^ter, to stop (one's self) veritable, trut
Every age has its pleasures. Everybody has fulfilled his duty.
Every noise frightens him. He stops before every mn. Each
of these houses costs six thousand dollars. He has made a
present to every one. Every one has his faults. Every book
has its merits. One must employ each day well. Do you know
any of these ladies ? I know some of these gentlemen, but I
know none of these ladies. Eat some pears. There are fine
apples, give me some. Some one has told me that you would
depart to-morrow. We are speaking nf s(>nielx)dy whom you
know. No one of my friends has (isj arrived. I have lost none
of my books. Nobody knows that you are here. Nothing is
more rai-e than a true friend. Some of these young ladies have
not yet linished their work.
— 75 —
120. tout, everything tout, toute, every ^ whole, all
le tout, the whole tout (adv.), quite
m6me, same, self, even tel, telle, many a one, such
moi-meme, myself nous-m^mes, ourselves
toi-meme, thyself vous-m^ines, yourselves
lui-m^me, himself eux-m6mes, )
elle-meme, herself elles-m^mes, j ^^^^^^^^^^
soi-m^me, one's self vous-meme, yourself
tout homme, every man le m^me homme, the same man
toute femme, every ivoman le roi m6me, the king himself
toute la ville, the whole city tel rit, many a one laughs
tous les hommes, all men de tels amis, such friends
Tout est perdu. Tous les hommes sont mortels. Je vous
servirai en toute occasion. Je vous vols tous les jours. Je Tai
vu moi-m6me. Le roi m^me en a parld. C'est tout le meme
homme que vous avez connu. Ce sont les m^mes enfants.
Yous ^tes toujours le m6me. J^ai achete du meme drap, de la
meme toile. Mes soeurs viendront elles-m^mes. Nous I'avons
vu nous-memes. Monsieur Charlier a ecrit cette lettre lui-m^me.
Yotre pere vous I'a dit (a) vous-m^me. Je te le donnerai moi-
m^me. II ne faut pas parler toujours de soi-m6me. Tel en
parle qui n'en salt rien. Le tout est plus grand que la partie.
Je n'aime pas de tels livres, de telles plumes.
121. les meubles (m.), the furniture la reponse, the answer
arranger, to arrange I'idee (f), the idea
communiquer, to communicate la raison, the reason
All this furniture is very beautiful. All the ladies have
danced. All the children have taken a walk. The whole garden
is well arranged. We have worked the whole day. We have
communicated it to all our friends. Our neighbor has bought
the whole. All those who were here, have heard it. It is the
same gentleman whom we saw (have seen) yesterday. It is always
the same answer. These are the same reasons which he has
already explained. I had the same idea. Give me some of
the same wine. We have sent it to the same merchant. I have
been there myself. Thou hast done it thyself.
— 7(5 —
122. Tun, the one certain, -amo.rertain^sorm
Tautre, the other plusieurg, several
Tuu Tautre ) each other^ autre chose, something else
lesunslesautres) one ano^Aer autrui, others {after pre-
Tun ct Tautre, both 2^8itions (ndy)
Fun et Tautre Tont dit ) , ,, ,
il8 I'ont .lit run et r.u.tro S ^"' '*"'''' '""^ "
ni I'uu ni I'autre no lout dit, neither the one nor the
otlier has said it
Tentr^e (/.), the entrance^ admission cnvier, to envy
II n'y a rien dc plus certain. Un certain monsieur, une cer-
taine dame me Ta racont<5. J'ai donne votre livre a un certain
^colier. Certains ^ar^ons, certaines fillcs sent ici. Vous parlez
d'un certain negotiant que je connais trt>s-l)ien. II me Ta promis
sous certaines conditions. La clioso n'est pas encore certaine.
Plusieui^ dc mes amis le savent. J'ai recju aujourd'hui plu-
sieurs lettres. On a refttsd Tentrde a plusieurs personnes. Par-
lez-moi d 'autre chose. Donnez-moi un autre habit. Kun dit
ceci, I'autre dit cela. N'avez-vous pas d'autrc encre, d'autres
plumes? Ces deux fr^res s'aiment I'un Tautre. lis sont ai>
pliquds Tun et Tautre. J'ai pris Tun pour I'autre. Les homraes
doivcnt s'aimer les uns les autres. N'enviez pas le bonheur
d*autriil. Ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous nc voudriez pas
qu'ou vous fit. Ni I'un ni I'autre n'en ont parle.
123, quiconque, whoever^ every body who
quelconqiie, whatever
quelque, however^ as
quelque, wTiatever
quel que, quelle que Ac, 7vhatever
qui que ce soit, tvhoever he may be
quoi que ce soit, whatever it may be
queloonqiie, whateve^\ alu-ays stands after its Notin.
quelque, however^ with an Adjective is indeclinable.
quelque, whatever^ followed by a Nonn with any other Verb than
Otre, to be 9 takes an 8 before a Noun Plural.
quel que, whnterer, followed by the Verb ^tre, o he with a Nonn,
must be written in two words: quel que, quelle que, quels que,
quelles que, according to the Oender and Number of the Noun.
— 77 —
bienfaisant, -ante, liberal aider, to help
ropinion f/J, the opinion s'y prendre, to manage
en imposer, to deceive inutile, useless
Quiconque est riche, doit 6tre bienfaisant. Je donnerai ce
livre a quiconque le voudra. On n'a pas bonne opinion de qui-
conque parle mal de ses amis. Pr^tez-moi un livre quelconque.
Qui que vous soyez, yous n'obtiendrez rien. Quoi que vous
disiez, on ne vous ecoutera pas. Qui que ce soit qui vous ait
dit cela, on vous en a impose. Je n'ai pas parle a qui que ce
soit. Quel que soit cet emploi, il veut I'accepter. Quelle que
soit son intention, je ne I'aiderai pas. Quelque riche que vous
soyez, il y en a encore de plus riches que vous. De quelque
maniere qu'on s'y prenne, tout sera inutile.
124. faire des reproches, to reproach attaquer, to attack
prendre conge, to take leave traduire, to translate
He gives to one what he takes from the other. Both are
vt^rong. He has reproached both; but neither the one nor the
other has deserved it. I have taken leave of both. These
brothers love each other very much; they always go out to-
gether. They seem to have been born for each other. Give
me another hat and another stick. Do not speak ill (badly)
of others. I have already heard the news from several persons.
We have spent several days in this town. I tell it to every one
who is wilUng to hear it. We shall defend ourselves against
everybody who will attack us. The law will punish everybody
who does not obey it. Give me any (an) exercise whatever
to translate. However learned you may be, there are still many
things which you do not know. Whatever he may say, I shall
not listen to him.
125. en, y.
songer, to think la hoix, the nut
Si vous allez au concert, j'y irai aussi. Yous allez peut-^tre
a Teglise, j'y vais aussi. Yous dites que mon livre est sur la
table; il y etait, mais il n'y est plus. Songez-y un pen. Qui,
j'y songerai. Yous venez de la ville; j'en viens aussi. Avez-
— 78 —
V0U8 du papier? J'en avals, mais je n'en ai plus. Qu'en pcnsez-
vous? Je n'en sais rien. Je vous en parlerai une autre fois.
Etes-vous content de nion tils ? Oui, j'en suis content. Voila
(lu gateau; en voulez-vousy Donnez m'en un niorceau. Voila
<le IVau; donnez nfen un verre. Je n'en veux plus. Voila des
poinnies; donnez-lui-en quelques-unes. Voila d'excellentes noix.
Je n'en mange point
126. verser, to pour planter, to plant
le banc, the bench la couple, the couple
My father has gone there this morning. I was not yet
there. My brother has gained nothing by it. I shall remain
1 hen* three days. Do not speak any more of it. 1 have
promised it to him, and I shall think of it. The ink was a little
too thick; 1 have jwured some water into it. Will you sit down
on this bench? Yes, I will sit down on it. Is your father in
(lie room? No, Sir, he is not there. What have you planted
by the side of your flowers? I have plantetl vegetables there.
Charles has made ten mistakes in his exercise, and I have made
nine (of them). Have you any money? No, I have none.
Have you any friends? I have still a bottle of wine, will you
have a glass? I thank you. I have already drunk some. I
have some apples, will you have any? Give me a couple
of I hem.
CONVERSATIONS.
±27 • Jacques et Chretien.
Jacques. Avez-vous vu le pauvre Antoine?
Chretien. Non.
J. Ah, il fallait voir comme il etait d^sol^ tout-a-l'heure !
Cli. Qu'est-ce qu'il lui est done arrive ?
J. II etait convert de boue depuis les pieds jusqu'a la tete.
Oh. Qui Favait mis dans cet etat-la ?
J. II etait dans la prairie avec Charles et Louis.
Oh. Eh bien ?
J. Yous savez qu'il y a un fosse d'un cote.
Oh. Oui.
J. lis voulaient jouer a qui sauterait le mieux par-dessus ce
foss^.
Oh. Et il est tombe au beau milieu ?
J. Precisement.
Oh. II ne s'est pas blesse, j'espere ?
J. II dit que non.
Oh. Est-ce lui qui a saute le premier?
J. Oui, et les autres n'ont plus ete tentes de faire preuve
de leur adresse.
Oh. Ou est-il a present ?
J. Le pauvre malheureux! II est dans sa chambre pour
toute la journee.
127. il faUait voir, you should have seen par-dessus, over
desole, -ee, distressed le beau milieu, the very middle
la boue, the mud precisement, exactly
depuis, from * blesser, to hurt
Tetat (mj, the state tenter, to tempt
le fosse, the ditch faire preuve, to make a trial
le cote, the side Tadresse (f.Jithe skill
sauter, to jump
— 80 —
"128. FK'cl^ric et Antoine.
Friderio. Savez-voua co que papa va nous achcter ?
Antoine. Non, qu'est-ec que c'cst ?
F. Je suis silr, que vous ne le deviucricz jamais.
A. Eh bien ! dites-lc-nioi.
P. II va nous achcter a chacun dc nous un petit cheval.
A. Un cheval, Frckidric ? vous badinez, vous voulez dire un
cheval de bois ?
F. Comnftent ! a notre ^ge un cheval de l)ois I
A. Je m'aniuso bien avec un choval ([(* Ixjis.
F. Mais n'ainieriez-vous ruis iiiitnix un vrai rhoval ?
A. Oh, assurdmei
F. Eh bien, je Voii> ni> qur umi.'* aunms uii siiii • I' vai.
A. Oh, (jue jo suis content I
F. Nous ponrrons faire une promenade a cheval avec papa.
A. Trotter, galo|)er, oli, (piel plaisir!
F. Vous verrez, que je serai bon cavalier.
A. Papa nous fora ajiprendro sans doute a montor a rhcval ?
F. Oui, il a <lit qu<» nous irions au printcmps au manege.
/;>,9, i:iuaut^ -i UeoflVol.
Etienne. II sera bient6t temps de nous coucher.
Geoffroi. I am not sorry for that, for I am very sleepy.
S. Je ne voudrais jamais me coucher avant dix heures.
G. And at what time would you like to get up ?
B. A huit heures.
d. I like to get up early.
B. Quand je suis a la campagne, j'aime a me lever d'assez
bonne heure.
G. Have you ever seen the sun rise?
12S, Biir, sure, sure trotter, to trot
deriner, to g\i£ss galoper, to gallop
badiner, to joke le cavalier, ihe horseman
le cheval de bois, the rocking-horse monter a cheval, to ride on hors^
vrai, vraie, real back
asBiirement, certainly le printemps, the spring
la promenade a cheval, the ride on le manege, the riding-school
horseback
— 81 —
B. Oui, quelquefois au bord de la mer.
G. It is very beautiful to see, is it not ?
B. Papa dit que c'est un spectacle magnifique.
G. I hope (that) I shall often see the sun rise next
summer.
B. Ou irez-vous ?
Gr. I do not know yet, but I think, we shall go to Saratoga.
130. Auguste et Nicolas.
Auguste. Nicolas I Nicolas !
Nicolas. What do you want ?
A. Yenez ici. Aurons-nous aujourd'hui une legon de
frangais ?
N. I do not think so. Our master cannot come. Some
strangers have come to see him.
A. Eh bien, nous nous amuserons cette apres-midi.
N. No, my dear. Papa wishes me to do (that I may do)
my exercise, and to learn my lesson.
A. Mais savez-vGus ce qu'il faut faire, si monsieur Yiard ne
vient pas ?
N. No matter. Papa does not wish me to lose (that I may
lose) my time.
A. Et moi, je ne veux pas etre toute la journee clou6 sur
mes livres.
N. You will do as you please. But if you do not apply
yourself better, you never will be (anything) but an ignorant
(boy). You have been taking French lessons three years, and
you know nothing.
A. Est-ce ma faute ?
N. Certainly. It is not enough to take a few lessons a
(the) week, you must also apply yourself, if you wish to make
(des) progress.
129, le bord de la mer, the sea-side n'importe, no matter
le spectacle, the sight clone, -ee sur, nailed to
magnifique, magnificent s'appliquer, to apply one's self
prochain,-aine, next leprogres, the progress
130, I'etranger (in.), the stranger
— 8L' --
131. Ad^le et Elvire.
Adele. Etes-vous pr^te, Elvire ?
Blrire. Pas encore; pourquoi cela?
A. Mainan nous attend; nous allons 80itir cette apr^s-midi.
1. Oh, tant inieux! J'aime a sortir avcc maman. Atten-
dez un monuMit. Ai\ cours cIh rclirr nion clmpeau: od sont
mes gants?
A. Ne sont-iis pas (ians votre iinur :
B. Non, je les ai 6t^ ce matin.
A. Et vous ne savez pas ou vomj les avez mis?
B. Non, vraiment.
A. Vous perdez toiyours vos gants.
B. Je les ai peut-^^trc l * * ilon.
A. Je vais voir, d(»iH'« ^ liabiller.
B. Les avez-vous trouves ?
A. Oui, lis dtaient sur la table.
B. Oh, nierci, Adi^le.
A. Maman nous appello.
B. Elle sera lach^e, que nous Tayons fait attendre si
longtemps.
132. Alphonse et Henri.
Alphonia. Will you come with me into the garden ?
Henri. Very willingly; but I do not trust the wr-itiu.r T)^o
sky is getting cloudy. There will be a storm.
A. I should like it, for the land has need of rain. iiuL 1 do
not think that the weather will change (changes).
H. You will see (are going to see), that it will rain. Do you
not see the storm which is forming (itself) yonder y The wind
is rismg. The thunder is pealing from afar.
A. I think you are right. Did you see that lightning ?
131, pret, prete, ready se couvrir, to get cloudy
oter, to take out I'orage (m.), tfie storm
laisser, to lexive les terres (f.), the Umd
le salon, the drawing-room la pluie, the rain
se depecher, to make ftaste se former, to form
139, 86 fier a, to trust le tonnerre, the thunder
le ciel, les cieux, the sky. Heaven gronder, to peal
H. Do you see those whirls of dust ?
A. There is the rain (which is) beginning. Heaven, what
a flood !
H. It is a cloud (which is) bursting.
A. The water will certainly do great damage.
±33, Guillaunie et Liouis.
Guillaume. Est-il vrai, Louis, que tu dois partir domain ?
Louis. Not to-morrow, but at this very moment.
G. Et pourquoi done si vite?
L. Because my father is dangerously ill, and he wishes to
see me.
6. Ah! quelmalheur! J'espere pourtant qu'il se retablira.
L. (May) God grant it! My mother is in (at the) despair.
I have done nothing but cry all (this) night.
G. Aliens, ne perds pas courage. Mon coeur me dit, que
ton pere en rechappera,et que je te reverrai bientot.
L. May it please Heaven! but there is not much (to) hope.
Good-bye, William!
G. Adieu, mon cher Louis ! Que le ciel te conserve ton pere !
L. I thank you with all my heart.
G. Bon voyage !
134:. Guillaunie et Ernest.
Guillaume. Sais-tu, Ernest, que le pere de Louis est a I'ex-
tremite ?
Ernest. I know it but too well (too much). He has been
struck with (fallen into) apoplexy, and there is nothing more
to hope. He has lost his speech (the use of the speech).
132. le tourbiUon, the whirl le courage, courage
I'ondee (f.), thejiood rechapper, to escape
le nuage, the cloud conserver, to preserve
les degats, (m.), damage [ment le voyage, the journey
133. a I'instant meme, at this very mo- 134. etre a Textremite, to be dying
dangereusement, dangerously I'apoplexie (f.), apoplexy
vouloir, to grant I'usage (m.), the use
le desespoir, despair la parole, the speech
— 84 — .
G. Cc pauvre Louis me fait bien de la peine. Nous ne le
reverrons plus, si son j)^re vient a niourir. On dit qu'il ne
lulssii point de Ibrtunc a sa lain i lie.
E. No, he only had his salary. His widow and his children
are much to Ix? pitied.
G. 11 faudra (^ue Louis apprennc un m(5tior.
E Yes, without doul»
G. C'est bien dommag« , ' .11 i i.-i uuc ca.miuh il a
beaucoup de disposition p<jur I'^tude.
E. And all that now becomes useless to him.
G. Nous soiiiniL'S heureux (rjivoir tiH^ore nos parents.
13S. Jules : 31atthicu.
Jules. Did you see (the) poor little Robert?
MatUuen. Was it ho who was here?
J. Yes.
M. He was going out as I came in, but I did not know him
again.
J. Hbw I pity him I
M. What has happened to him?
J. He is crippled for (the) life.
M I saw (that) he had crutches.
J. He will never be able to walk, nor to do any work.
M. J low did that happen?
J. He fell down in climbing up a tree.
M. Poor fellow! Did you give him something?
J. 1 had no money, but nianuna gave him half a dollar.
M. All that is in my purse shall be for him.
J. 1 know where he lives, w(» will go (and) take it to liim.
M. Where does he live ?
J. At the other end of the village.
M. We can go there this afternoon.
184, les appointements f / . . - s; .'•/ la bequiile, the crutch
la veuve, the icidoir ni, nor
le metier, the trade grimper snr, to dimb up
la disposition, the disposUion le gar^on, the fellow
135, reconnaitre, to know again le bout, the end
estropi^ -4e, crippled le ^'illi^e, the village
-- 85 —
X36^ I^G p^re, Martin, Robert, Elise,
Martin. Sais-tu, Kobert, que nous allons nous promener en
voiture ?
Robert. Oui, Elise vient de me le dire. Ou allons-nous ?
M. Je n'en sais rien. Je m'imagine que papa nous menera
a Fordham.
R. Ah, je voudrais bien y aller. J'aime tant les fraises
d^licieuses qu'on y mange.
M. Et moi, j'aime beaucoup a sortir avec papa; il a tou-
jours quelque histoire interessante a nous raconter.
R. A quelle heure partirons-nous ?
M. A trois heures. Ou est Elise ?
R. Elle fait sa toilette. Yoila papa, qui vient.
Pere. Eh bien, mes enfants, etes-vous prets ? La voiture est
a la porte.
M. Oui, papa; il n'y a qu'a prendre nos chapeaux. Est-il
vrai que nous irons a Fordham ?
P. Oui, puisque je sais que les fraises sont tant de votre
gout. Mais ou est votre soeur ?
M. Je ne I'ai pas vue, depuis que je suis rentre. Je vais
I'appeler.
137. Le pere, Martin, Robert, Elise,
Continuation.
Martin. Elise ! Elise I
Elise. Qu'est-ce que c'est ?
M. Papa te demande. Nous allons partir.
B. Attendez un petit moment. Je ne croyais pas qu'il fiit
ddja temps.
M. Tu te fais toujours attendre. Depeche-toi done. Si au
bout de cinq minutes tu n'es pas pr^te, nous partirons sans toi,
et tu resteras a la maison.
R Yoila enfin Elise. Montons vite en voiture.
136, se promener en voiture, to ride 137. enfin, at last
in a carriage monter en voiture, to get into the
delicieux, -euse, delicious carriage.
iaire sa toilette, to dress
-- 86 —
B. Jo V0U8 demandc pardon, pnpa; je regrretU bcaucoup de
vous avoir fait attendre.
Piw. Je sais que tu avai^ (luelque cluK-^e ii laire, ma fllle.
Desccndons vite, le cochcr nous attend.
B. Est<*e une voiture a quatre personncs, papa ?
P. Qui, ma fille.
E. Est-clle couverte ? Peut-on la fermer en caa d'orage ?
P. Je crois que oui. Martin, |)oux-tu ouvrir la ]X)rti6rc?
M. Non, papa, cela rnVst im|K)ssihle.
P. La voilii ouverto. Elise, tu te placeras dans le fond a
cotd do »n(>i Et vous, mes<i«'«n< v()U8 vous mettrez sur lo
devant.
K Mais piApa, vous savcz bieu que je ne peux pas aUer
en arrierc; je men trouvc mal.
P. Nous changerons de place hors de la ville. Fouette,
cocher !
138. Phillppo rt Jean.
Philippe. Veux-tu venir avec moi ?
Joan. Where do you ^jgint to go ?
Ph. A Harlem. Mes parcnU^ y sont, et ils m'attendent,
J. I certaiidy will, if Mamma allows it (me).
Ph. Va vit€ lui en demander la permission. Mes parents ont
une voiture: nous rcviendrons en voiture.
J. So much the better. But why did you not go with them ?
PL C'est que je n'avais pas encore achev^ ma tache.
J. Thus they have made you stay at home as a fin) penance.
Ph. Point du tout; jc ne me divertis jamais qu'aprt^s avoir
fait mon devoir.
J. Wait for me a moment; I am going to return imme-
diately.
137. descendre, to go doion en arriere, backtoards
le cas, Ihe case hore de, ottiside
la portiere, the (carriage^) door fouctter, to tchip (drive on)
ae placer, to take a seal 138, la tache, the task
le foud, ihe h(ick en peuiteuce, as a penance
le devant, ti^ front
— 87 —
PL Ehbien?
J. I knew that Mamma would allow it (me). She knows
that I am in good company.
PL Mais que ferons-nous a Harlem pour nous amuser?
. J. Do you know how to play (at) billiards?
Ph. I know (it) a little; but my father does not wish me to
play (at it) (that I may play).
J. Sais-tu ce que nous ferons ? Nous jouerons aux quilles.
PL It is a game which I like much.
J. II y a tant de plaisir a voir tomber les quilles a droite et
a gauche.
PL There are my parents (who are) coming.
13i). Catherine et Jeannette.
Catherine. Where are you going so fast, Jane ?
Jeannette. I am going to make some purchases. Mamma
wants (would like) to have a few (some) ells of fine pink ribbon.
Do you not know where one may find some ?
C. Nobody is better supplied with (in) ribbons than Mr.
Robert. He has (of them) splendid ones, at very moderate
prices.
J. Yery well, come (then) with me. You will help me to
choose and to bargain.
C. Certainly, provided (that) it does not take long.
J. Are you then in such a hurry ?
C. (It is that) I have an errand to do.
J. Well; we shall have done in a moment. Another time
I will accompany you, too.
138. se divertir, to play [Hards assorti, -ie, supplied
jouer au biUard, to play (at) Ml- superbe, splendid
les quiUes (/.), the skittles (ten' modere, -ee, moderate
pins) choisir, to choose
a droite, (to the) right marchander, to bargain
a gauche, (to the) left pourvii, provided
139. Templette (f.), the purchase ne soit pas, does not take
ruban rose, pink ribbon la commission, the errand
^ 88 —
140, Mile. Jeaimette et Mr. Robert.
Jeannette. Good day ! Mr. Robert. Can (could) one find at
jour hou^e fine pink riblxjns?
Robert. Oli. >t's. liHrns. TTcri' is a ctmiuN'tc* as80rtnicnt of
theui.
J. At how iiiucli uii {.tiic; eiLdo yuu :?ou ihc^sc i
R. Twenty-four cents.
J. You arc joking, Mr. Robert, I have bought wider ones
(of them) at eighteen cents.
R. I am sure, Miss, that is impossible. One can easily be
mistaken in (upon) tlie quality. I have some as wide at the
same price, (of) eighteen cents. But you will H(H)n find the
diflbrence between them (of them).
J. We are in a hurry, Mr. Robert, li ym i an Wi lue huvc
them (can give them to me) at twenty cents, I will take six ells.
R. Very well, Miss, take them.
140. riu»ortiment {m,\ (he assortment tMrnenU e€uUy
complet, -^ con^pUU ne tromper, to be mistaken
large, wide 1a difference, the difference
Second Part.
ELEMENTS OF FRENCH aRAMMAR.
THE ALPHABET.
i. The French Alphabet consists of the following twenty-five letters:
Names
enn
o
pay
s
err *
ess
tay
8
vay
ix
ee greek
zed
2. The letters are divided into two general classes: Vowels and Con-
sonants; the vowels are: a, e, i, O, U, y. All other letters are consonants.
3. For a full explanation of the Principles of French Pronunciation,
the learner is referred to the Short Guide to French Pronunciation, preceding
the First Course of this Method. For oral exercises .in French Eeading
and Spelling with pupils of a tender age, AHN'S French Primer and
Reading-Charts should be employed.
Names
a A
ah
n N
b B
bay
o O
c C
d I>
e E
say
day
eh
P P
q Q
r R
f F
eff
s S
h H
jay ^
ash *
t T
u U
i I
ee
V V
J J
k K
jee^
kah
X X
y Y
1 L.
ell
z Z
iiiM
emm
1 j to be pronounced like s in pleasure.
2 a to be pronounced as in fast.
3 The French name of this letter cannot be represented by English letters; it must
be learned from the. mouth of the teacher.
4 err to be pronounced as in ferry,
89
— 90 —
THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
4. The Parte of Speech in French are nine, namely: the Article, the
Noon, the Adjective, the I*ronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposition,
the Conjunction, and the Interjection. Articles, Nouuk, Adjectiven, and
Pronouns are declined; Verbs are conjugated; Adverbs, Prepositions, Con-
jnnotioiiB, and Intezjections are oninflected.
THE ARTICLE.
5. Articles are little words which we put before noons to limit their sig-
nification. In French, they are distmgaiahed as:
Singiitar. Plural.
mtuc. ftm, boikffendert,
the Definite Article: le, la les the
the Indefinite Article: on, line — a, an
the Partitive Article: du, de la des some, tmy
[L 1. 9. 7. «.r
THE NOUN.
6. A Norm is the name of a person, place, or thing, as: femme, tooman;
G^es,(?fnoa; maison, house. The noons are divided, as in Finglish, into
two general classes: lYoper and Conmion. Proper noons aie the names of
individual persons, or Uiings, as: Pierre, Peter; Londres, London; common
nouns are the names of a class of persons, or things, as: oiseao, bird; homme,
ftutn,
7. Nouns have modifications of three kinds, namely: Numbers, Genden,
and Cases.
Numbers.
8* Number is the distinction between one and more than one, usually
expressed by some difference in t^^rmination.
9. There are two numl>ers, the Singular and the Plural; the singular
denotes one object, as: un livre, a book; the plural denotes more than one
object, as: les enfants, the cfiUdren.
Formation of the Plural.
10. The Pluml is regularly formed by adding s to the singular, as: la
feuille, the leaf; les feuilks. the leaves.
11. Nouns which eud in the singular in Sy Xy or z, are alike in both
numbers, as: le fils,^ son; les fils, the sons; la voix, the voice; les voix, the
voices.
12. Nouns ending in au or eu add x for the plural, as: le chapeau, the
hat; les chapeaux, the hats; le jeu, tiie game, les jeux, the games.
13. Nouns ending in al change this termination into aux^ as: le
choval, the horse; les chevaux, the hones.
* These numbers cite the Exercises which refer directly to the Roles in question;
the BoQUUi figures indicate the Cowrtet, the Arabic figures the Excrdsa.
— 91 —
I4i Mark the following exceptions:
le bijou, the jewel les bijoux, the jewels
le caillou, the pebble les cailloux, the pebbles
le chou, the cabbage les choux, the cabbages
le genou, the knee les genoux, the knees
le hibou, the owl les hiboux, the ends
le joujou, the plaything les joujoux, the playthings
le bal, the ball les bals, the balls
le carnaval, the carnival les carnavals, the carnivals
le cal, the callosity les cals, the callosities
le chacal, the jackal les chacals, the jackals
le regal, the regale '' les regals, the regales ' -
le bail, the lease les baux, the leases
le corail, the coral les coraux, the corals
I'emaU (m.), the enamel les emaux, the enamels
le soupirail, the air-hole les soupiraux, the air-holes
le travail, the work * les travaux, the works
le vantail, ^/ie leaf (of folding-doors) les vantaux, ^/le leaves (of folding-doors)
I5i The following are still more irregular:
le ciel, the sky, Heaven les cieux, the heavens
I'oeil (m,), the eye les yeux, the eyes
raieul Cm ) //le arandfaiher \ ^^^ ''"'^''^^' ^^'' Orandfathers
1 aieul rm. ;, t/ie granajaJm j j^^ ^..^^^^ ^^^ ancestors
[I. 49. 50. 73. 74. 7S. 76.]
16. Compound nouns consisting of a noun and an adjective, or of a noun
and a pronoun, or of two nouns, vary both parts to form the plural, as:
la basse-cour, the poultry-yard; les basses-cours, the poultry-yards; madame,
'Madam; mesdames, ladies; un chou-fleur, a cauliflower; des choux-fleurs,
caulijiowers. [i. 9j. gg,]
17. When a compound noun is formed of two nouns, with a preposition
between them, the sign of the plural is added to the first noun only, as:
un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow; des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows.
18. In words compounded of a noun with a verb or a preposition, the
noun alone takes the mark of the plural, as: I'avant-coureur, the forerunner,
lesavant-coureurs, the forerunners.
19. Compound nouns consisting of two indeclinable parts of speech, are
alike in both numbers, as: le passe-partout, the pass-key; les passe-partout,
the pass-keys. To these a few others may be added, which follow the same
rule, although one or even both of the component parts are nouns, as:
le reveille-matin, the alarm-clock; des reveille-matin, alarm-clocks ; le tete-
a-tete, the private interview; des tete-a-tete, private interviews.
• I© travail, the trave, becomes les travails, the trave$.
— 92 —
20. Some noons (from the nature of things meant) hare no plural, as:
Tor, gold; le vif-argent, quicksiiver: la jeimease, ywih; others have uo
singular, as: les environs, the environs; les frais, esqMfises; lee moeurs, mo/t-
fiers; les gens, people; les yivres, victuals,
21. Several nouns have two different meanings for the singular, and for
the plural; in the plural, however, the greater part of them are frequently
used with either meaning.
le ciscau, the chisel IflS dseaux, the sducrs
la d^fense^ the defence les dtfenses, the tu^es
le fer, iron les fers, the chains, fetters
le gage, the pled^je les gages, the wages
la lettre, the letter les lettres, the literature
la lunette, the spy-glass les lunettes, the speetades
le neveu, the nephew les neveuz, the descendants
la petite maison, the little house les petitas-maisons, the lunaHe asytum
la tablette, the shelf les tablettes, the table-book
la troupe, the crowd les troupes, the droops, soldiers
Cendsrt.
22. There are only two Genders in French, the Mssouline and the
Feminine. The Bfasculine Gender is that which denotes perMUis or animals
of the male kind, au: le p^ the father, le lion« the lion; the Feminine
Gender is that which denotes persons or animals of tho feimilo kiiul. as:
la mere, the mother, la lionne, the lioness
23. The sexes are generally distinguisned ny the use oi (iittrniu ur-
minations. Many nouns become feminine by merely adding a mute e to the
masculine, as:
un commer9ant, a trader une commer9ante, a tradesiooman
un Fran9ais, a Frenchman une Fran9ai8e, a French woman
le berger, the shepherd la bergtee. the shepherdess
le cousin, the cousin (masc.) la oousine, the cousin (fern.)
un ours, a he4>ear une ourse, a sAe-6ear
24^ Nouns ending iu an, on, ien, become feminine by doubling the
final n, and adding e, as:
le baron, the baron la baronne, the baroness
le paysan, the peasant (masc) la paysanne, the peasant (fern.)
le musician, the musician (masc.) la musicienne, the musician (fern.)
25. Many nouns in e become feminine by adding 886, as:
le comte, the count la comtesse, the countess
le tigre, ^e tiger la tigresse, the tigress
26. Nouns ending in eur, if derived from French verbs, become
feminine by changing eur into euse, as:
le chanteur, the singer (masc.) la chanteuse, the singer (fern.)
le danseur, the dancer (masc.) la danseuse, the dancer (fern.)
93
27. Nouns ending in teur, and not derived from French verbs, be-
come feminine by changing teur into trice, as:
I'acteur, the actor I'actrice, the actress
I'instituteur, the teacher I'institutrice, the lady-teacher
28. To the foregoing rules there are many exceptions. The following
are worthy of notice:
le loup, the he-wolf
I'epoux, the husband
le juif, the Jew
le veuf, the widower
un abbe, an abbot
Dieu, God
un larron, a thief (masc.)
im due, a duke
le gouvemeur, the governor^ tutor
le roi, the king
I'empereur, the emperor
la louve, the she-wolf
I'epouse, the wife
la juive, the Jewess
la veuve, the widow
ime abbesse, an abbess
une deesse, a goddess
une larronnesse, a thief (fetn. )
une duchesse, a duchess
la gouvemante, the governess
la reine, the queen
rimperatrice, the empress [i. 39, 40.]
29 1 The noun gens, people ^ has the peculiarity that all adjectives
before it are used in the feminine, and all adjectives after it in the mas-
culine gender. To this there is only one exception, namely the adjective
tout, all^ which remains masculine before g'ens, if not accompanied
by another adjective which has a particular feminine termination; thus, we
say:
dangerous people
very dangerous people
all sensible people
all honest people
all this good people
all this bad people.
business-men, gens de lettres, literary meUf
de dangereuses gens
des gens fort dangereux
tous les gens senses
tons les honnetes gens
toutes ces bonnes gens
toutes ces mechantes gens
30. The nouns: gens d'affaires,
and the like, are always masculine.
31. The names of things without life have no particular gender in
French, but are said to be either masculine or feminine, according to rules
which do not here admit of explicit statement. In the main, therefore, the
gender of these nouns must be learned by experience, but the following
practical rules will be found of value.
Gender as determined by the meaning.
32. Masculine are the names of the seasons, months, and days of the
week, of metals, and trees, as: le printemps, spring; le dimanche, Sunday; le
chene, the oak; le fer, iron.
33. Feminine are most names of plants, fruits, and flowers, the names of
sciences, virtues, and vices, as: la poire, the pear; la prune, the plum; la
chimie, chemistry; la paresse, idleness.
— 94 —
Gender at determined by the ending.
94% IfMeoline are the greater number of words in al, et, ant, ent;
Also those in au. eu. OU, age, and 6ge; an: lo metal, the metal; le
secret, the secret; le chaut, the song; le btttiment, the buUding; le marteau,
Uie tiamttier; le feu, the fire; le cou, tU neck; le dommage, the damage; le
piege, the trap.
35. Feminine ure most iimius m eur. 6886, ance, and eilCC; abw
those in 6e, t^. tie, uml in son or ion; as: lerreur, the error; la vitesse,
the quicknesg; la patience, pat it nm^, the day; la bont^ the kitid-
ness; la maiaon, the hmue; la ^ creation; la paanon, passion.
36i A considerable number of nouns are of both gendeiB, with a diffe-
rent meaning for each gender, as:
Ma.
^aid^ ihs ei89iakmi Taide, ih$ aasialanm
Tanne, (he aider Taime, 1h$ eU
le liyre, (Ae 6oofe Hlim, (ktpoui^
lo manche, the handle la manche, the sleeve
le page, the patje (serving^bcy) la page, (he page (of a book)
le somme, the nap, sleep la aomme, the sum
le soiiris, the smile la sonris, (he mottse
le tour, the tour, turn la tour, (he tower
le voile, (he veil la Toile, (he sail
Cases.
37. Gasea denote the relation which a noun sustaina to other words in
the sentence.
38. There are four casee: the KominatiTe answering to the English No-
minative, the Genitive answering nearly to the English Possessive, or Ob-
jective with of; the Dative corresponding to the English Objective with to oi
for; the Accusative nearly the same with the English Objective. The
nominative and accusative of nouns are always alike.
The Declension of Nouns.
39. The declension of a noun is a regular arrangement of its nnmberF
and cases.
40 Nouns preceded by the Definite Article are declined as follows:
Singular. * Wurtl.
Norn, le pere, the father les peres, the fathers
Gen, du pere, of the father, thefather^s des peres, of the fathers, the faUiers*
Ott au pere, to the father aux p^res, to the fathers
Aoc le p^, the father les peres, the fathers.
— 95 —
Singular. Plural.
Nom. la mere, the mother les m^res, the mothers
Gen. de la mere, of the mother des meres, of the mothers
Dat. a la mere, to the mother aux meres, to the mothers
Ace. la mere, the mother les meres, the mothers
Nom. I'enfant, the child les enfants, the children
Gen. deVenfamtjOf the child des enianiE, of the children
Dat a I'enfant, to the child aux enfants, to the children
Ace. I'enfant, the child les enfants, the children
Nom. I'heure, the hour les heures, the hours
Gen. de I'heure, of the hour des heures, of the hours
Dat. a I'heure, to the hour aux heures, to the hours
Ace. I'heure, the hour les heures, the hours
p. 33. 34, 35. 36.]
41. All nouns that begin with a vowel, • or non-aspirated li take 1'
(with the apostrophe) instead of le or la; instead of le arbr^, we say
I'arbre, the tree; instead of la ecole, I'ecole, the school. [l- 37. 38.]
42. The characteristic of the French declension is that it forms the
genitive and dative cases by prefixing de and a to the nominative; at the
same time, the articles le and les, thus preceded by de and a, are
contracted as follows:
de le into du de les into des
a le *' au a les '* aux
The contractions du and au are never used with nouns beginning with
a vowel, or non-aspirated li. [I- ^1- ^^' ^3- ^^' ^3- ^^'1
43. Nouns with the Indefinite Article are declined as follows:
Worn, un jardin, a garden une ville, a town
Gen. d'un jar din, of a garden d'une ville, of a town
Dat. a un jardin, to a garden a une ville, to a town
Aec. un jardin, a garden une ville, a town
Mark the elision of the e in d'un, d'unc.
44. Nouns preceded by the Partitive Article are declined as follows:
Singular.
Nom. du pain, some bread de la viande, some meat
Gen. de pain, of some bread de viande, of some meat
Dat. a du pain, to some bread a de la viande, to some meat
Ace. du pain, some bread de la viande, some meat.
Plural.
Nom. des cerises, some cherries
Gen. de cerises, of some cherries
Dat a des cerises, to some cherries
Ace. des cerises, some cherries [i. 77. 78, II. 99. too.}
— 96 —
45. Partitive notms prcce<icfl by an adjectire, take in all casos the pre-
position do inHtead of du, de la, de V, des; with a following ad-
jective, however, a partitive noun retains its article.
Horn, de bon pain, good bread de belles flours, beautiful jlomers
Qoo. de bon pain, of good brmd de belles fleurs, of beautiful fiowera
Oat k de bon pain, to good bread k de belles fleors, to beavlifvdfiovDera
Ace de bon pain, good bread de belles flenrs, beauiiful floicera
Norn, du vin rouge, red voim de la bi^ f^che, fresh beer
Gen. de vin rouge, of red toiiM de bi^ firalohe, of fresh beer
Dat & du vin rouge, to rtd wbiM hde]^ hikre fralobe, to fresh be^r
Ace du vin rouge, red wine de la bi^ Iraiche, fresh beer
(I. 179, ISO. 181. 1S9.]
46. Proper nouns are declined by prefixing the prepositions de and &•
Norn. Paris, Paris Emilie, F
Gen. de Paris, of or from Paris d'Emilie,
Ott & Paris, to Paris k Emilie, iu EmiLy
^oc Paris, Paris Emilie, Emiiy
47* Proper nouns strictly used as sach, have no plural. When several
persons of Uie same name are spoken of, the noun takes the article IcSy
as: les deux Caton, the tiDo Oatos; but when such nouns are used to denote
character, they follow the rule of common nouns, as: La France a eu ses
G&MO^; F)rance has had her Oossara. [L <7. 4S,]
48. The French uses capital initial letters at the beginning of sentences,
of lines in |>oetry, and for all Proper Names; but adjectives derived from
proper names of persons or places should begin with small letters, as:
anglais, English.
Use of the Articles.
49. The Definite Article regularly stands in French before a noun when
taken without limitation, in its most universal sense, as: lliomme est mortel,
man is mortal. It should always be repeated before several nouns in the
same construction, as: les soldatset les oflaciers, the soldiers and officers.
50. It is also prefixed to the names of countries, continents, and of the
points of compass, as: la France, France; I'Angleterre, England; TEurope,
Europe; le nord, the North. After the preposition en, however, the article
is omitted: en France, in FYaJice.
51. In genen\l, the Indefinite Article is used in French nearly as in En-
glish, but there are a few differences of importance.
52. The Indefinite Article is used in English, and nO article in French,
before nouns which express titles, professions, nationalities, etc., as:
votre frere est medecin your brother is a physician
etes-vous Fran^ais ? are you a Erenchman ?
— 9t —
53. By a like usage no article is employed in French before a noun
used to explain a preceding noun or pronoun, and in the titles of books; as:
Paris, capitale de la France Paris, tJie capital of France
Grammaire de la langue fran^aise A. grammar of the French langiLage.
54. In place of the indefinite article a, an^ with a distributive sense,
before nouns of measure, weight, and number, the French employs the
definite article le, la, as:
les oeufs valent trente sous la douzaine; eggs are worth thirty cents a dozen
le beurre se vend vingt sous la livre; butter is sold for twenty cents a pound.
55. The Partitive Article du, de la, de 1', des, is used in French
when we want to express an indeterminate number, or a part of a thing; it
answers to the English some or any expressed, or understood; as:
donnez-moi du pain, de la viande give me some bread, some meat,
et des oeufs; and some eggs.
[I. 77. 75. II. 99. 100.]
56. If the substantive is preceded by an adjective, the preposition de
is used for both genders and numbers, instead of the partitive article du,
de la, de r, des; as:
donnez-moi de bon pain, de bonne give me some good bread, some good
viande et de bons oeufs; meat, and some good eggs.
[I. 179. ISO. 181. 182.]
57. In the same manner the preposition de is substituted for the par-
titive article after nouns signifying measure of extent, quantity, weight, or
number, and after the adverbs of quantity:
beaucoup, much, many trop, too much, too many
plus, more assez, enough
peu, little, few rien, nothing
moins, less pas, ) ,
, . « , ^ . \ >no, not any
combien ? how much ? how many ? point, j
tant, autant, as much, as many jamais, never.
Thus we say:
vous avez beaucoup d'esprit; you have much wit.
vous faites trop de bruit; you make too much noise.
une livre de beurre a pound of butter
une bouteille de bon vin a bottle of good wine.
[I. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.]
58. The words bien, rntich^ m^any, and la plupart, m^ost,
are always followed by the definite article; as:
bien du chagrin, mwc/i ^rowWe la plupart du monde, \,^ostmen
bien des livres, many books la plupart des hommes, J ^^^ ^^^'
59. When nouns are joined in a close connection with a verb or a
preposition, the partitive article is usually omitted. The commonest cases
of this omission are the following:
— 98 —
aToir ooaiame, to b< aomuhmtd faire mention, to mefdUm
avoir peur, to bt afraid ftiirc crtiiit, to trutt
avoir houU;, to ttt ashamed faire atteution* to pay aUeniUm
avoir fuiui, to 6e hungry faire pbicv, to iiuUce room
avoir »uif, to be thirsty faire ])laiAir, <o yiue pleasure
avoir Hommeil, (o 6e «/ffpj/ preocbre oong6, (o (aA» (eatw
avoir cnvie, to have a inittd prendre garde, to take cart
avoir riiiKon, to l*e r'ujht prendre courage, to take courage
avoir tort, to be xcrtnyj tenir |>iirole, to keep (o)ie*s) word
avoir patience, to have patience trouvcr nioyen, to find means
avoir besoiu, to he in need of reudre seniioe, to do a service
avoir inal, to feel pain rendre vifute, to pay a visit
avGo ploisir, with pleasure Hans la^on, toUhoui oemmony
aveo patience, wiih poiimm i^ar ordre, by command
BUT teire, by land nans peril, without danger
enr mer, by sea par amiti^ ikrwigh friendship.
[U. iOl. 109. 103.]
THE ADJECTIVE
60. A!i A<lj» itivf iH a word which qualifieB or ill: .'.,
bleu, the hlur r,7*'...;i; un grand arbre, a large tree; /
flower.
61. All a4)6otive8 are declinable in Frmoh, and agree in number aud
gender with the noun or pronoun which thej qualify.
The Plural of Adjectives.
62. In forming the plural, adjcctiveH are generally subject i. -
rule A as nouns. To this there are only a few exoeptiona, namely, M
which has bleus, and a few adjectives in at, which form their plural ■»,> »a-
diug 8, instead of changing al into aux. These are:
Sing.
Plur.
SI119.
Plur.
amical
amicals
frimdkf
initial
initials
initial
fatal
fatals
faUd
matinals
early
final
finals
anal
naval
navals
yuivdl
glacial
glacials
frigid
p<?nal
penals
penal
The Feminine of Adjectives.
63. As a general rule, Fronrh adjectives become feminine by adding e
mute to the masculine. Of course, adjectives ending in e mute in the mas-
culine, are alike in both genders. Thus we say:
le petit garcjon, the Utile hoy la petite fille, the Utile giri
un livre utile, a im^ul book mie chose utile, a xisefid iking
To this there are many exceptions. [I. 11, 19, 87, 88. 48. 44,]
— 99 —
64. Adjectives which end in x in the masculine, become feminine by
changing x into se; as:
un homme heureux, a happy man une mere heureuse, a happy mother,
65. Adjectives in f, change this letter into ve; as:
nn homme actif, an active man une vie active, an active life.
66. Most adjectives ending in el, eil, et, en, on, as, double their
final consonant and add e; as:
un maitre cruel, a cruel master une bete cruelle, a cruel heast
un bon pere, a good father xme bonne mere, a good mother
du vin net, pure wine une chambre nette, a clean room
un siege bas, a low seat une maison basse, a low house.
67. Adjectives in eur when derived from French verbs, change eur
into euse; those with the ending teur change it into trice# The prim-
itive adjectives in eur, however, as, meilleur, exterieur, etc., follow the
general rule. [woman
un valet trompeiir, a deceitful valet une fern me trompeuse, a deceitful
un muscle moteur, a motory muscle une force motrlce, a motive power
le meiUeur homme, the best man la meillem^e le9on, the hestlesson
68. The following adjectives form their feminine irregularly:
epais, epaisse, thick faux, fansse, false
gros, grosse, large doux, douce, sweet
sot, sotte, stupid roux, rousse, red
secret, secrete, secret frais, fraiclie, fresh
discret, discrete, discreet blanc, blanelie, white
inquiet, inqaiete,. uneasy franc, franclie, frank
complet, comj^l^te, complete sec, seclie, dry
long, longue, long caduc, caduque, decaying
benin, benig-ne, benign public, publique, public
malin, maligne, malign turc, turque, Turkish
favori, favorite, favorite grec, grecque, Greek
69. There are five adjectives which have two masculine terminations:
/ Masc.—^ . Fem. . Masc. > Fern.
beau bel belle beautiful fou fol foUe foolish
nouveau nouvel nouvelle new vieux vieil vieille old
mou mol moUe soft
The second masculine form is used in the singular only, and immediately
before masculine nouns beginning with a vowel, or non - aspirated h.
un beau palais, a beautiful palace un vieux soldat, an old soldier
un bel arbre, a fine tree un vieil habit, an old coat
de beaux arbres, fine trees cet habit est vieux, this coat is old
ime belle fleur, a beautiful flower \me vieille femme, an old woman.
[I. 105. 106. 107. 108.]
— 100 — ^^
Agreement
70. Adjectivei miut agree with tbi-ir nowns in f?onder and number, no
matter whether they are before them, or after then), or cousidembly remote.
ThuH we say:
le petit gar9on, the litiU boy nn verre oaas^ a broken glass
\a petite fille, the little tjirl nne canne caas^, a broken cane
lea petits gar9ons, the lUtle boys dee Terres caaads, broken glasses
lee petites filles, the ttttle girUt dea Cannes oeaa^s, broken canes
ce diamant est cher, mais il est bean; this diamond is dear, but it utjine,
oea tableaux sout chors, maia ila aont these pU3kHrts are dear, but they are
beaox; >bM>
oette maiaon eat oh^re, maia eUe eat this house is dear, but U is fine,
beUe;
oea maisons sent chores, mais ellea these houses are dear, bul they are fine,
aont belles ;
71. With the pronouns nous and vous, denoting only one penon»
the a4iective ia alwaya in the aingular; aa:
dtea-Yona content de mon fila? are you saHjffied wUk my son f
72. When an acfjectiTe belonga to aereral noona, CTen of different gen-
ders, it is alwaya pat in the maacoline plnral, onleaa all the noniiH bo femin-
ine; then, of course, it should be in the feminine plural; as:
mon pere et mon frfere aont aavanta; my father and brother are lenmed.
mon tihie et ma aoeur sont morta; my brotfier and sister are dead,
Yotre mdre et Totse aoBor aont aaTantea; your mother and sister are learned.
Comparison.
73. In French, the different degreea of quality are ezpreaaed by prefixing
to the adjective the adverbs plus, inore^ and le plus, the fnost as:
grand, great plus grand, greater le plus j^n^md, the greatest
petit, sjnaU plus petit, 5?naZ/fr le plus petit, the smallest
74. The following adjectives are compared irregularly:
bon, good meilleur, better le meilleur, the best
mauvais, bad pire, tcorse le pire, the worst
petit, little moindre, less le moindre, the least
75. The Comparatives and Superlatives must agree in gender and num-
ber with their nouns, the same as the simple adjectives.
[I. 41. 42. 81, 82, n. 109. IIO.]
76. All Comparatives are to be construed with the conjunction que,
thaUf introducing the latter term of comparison; before a numeral, how-
ever, plus de, moins de are used for more than, less than ; thus,
il est plus beureux que vous; he is more fortunate than you,
j'ai plus de quiuze aus; lam more than fifteen years of a/je.
[IL ids. 106.]
— 101 —
77. The degree of equality is expressed by the adverbs aiissi, si,
as, before fidjectives and adverbs, and autant, tant, as muchf as
Tnany^ before nouns and verbs. In negative sentences these adverbs are
applied indifferently; in affirmative sentences, however, only the full forms
aussi, autant, should be employed. Examples:
je travaille aussi bien que lui I work as well as he (does)
je souffre autant que lui lam suffering as much as he (does)
.'; ie ne suis pas si grand que vous ) ^
• . T y I am not so tall as vou
je ne suis pas aussi grand que vous [ ^
il n'a pas tant de bonte que vous ) he has not so much kindness as you
il n'a pas autant de bonte que vous j (have)
pi. 104, 106.}
78. All Comparatives, and the words autre, other; autrement,
othertvise^ require ne before the verb following, unless the preceding
verb be used negatively or interrogatively; thus,
il est plus heureux qu'on ne croit he is happier than one thinks
il n'est pas plus heureux qu'on croit he is not happier than one thinks
[II. 108.]
79. The Superlative commonly governs, in French, the noun following in
the genitive case, and the verb following in the subjunctive mood; thus we say:
Londres est la plus grande ville du monde London is the largest city in the world
c'est I'ami le plus fidele que j'aie this is the truest friend I have
The Place of Adjectives.
80. French adjectives are either placed before their nouns, or after
them, according to the following rules. *
81. Adjectives which generally precede the noun, are:
1. beau, fine^' bon, good; grand, great; gros, hig ; jeune, young;
joli, pretty; mauvais, 6ad; mechant, wicked; meilleur, heiier;
petit, small; vaste, vast; vieux, old; vilain, ugly;
2. the Ordinals, when used wdth the definite article;
3. those which denote a characteristic quality of the whole class.
Thus we say:
un bon livre, a good hook le premier livre, the first hook
une petite maison, a small house un riche proprietaire, a rich proprietor
quelle jolie maison ! what a nice house! le ruse renard, the cunning fox.
82. In the following instances, the adjective follows the noun to which
it belongs':
1. when such qualities are specified, as are perceptible by the senses;
thus,
un habit bleu, a hlue coat une table ronde, a round tahle
dvL lait chaiid, warm milk une table carree, a square table
* For the placing of Adjectives, only the leading principles are given. To illustrate
their application in detail, and explain the many modifications which they admit, can-
not be attempted here.
— 102 —
S. when the adjective is derived from the proper noon of a person,
nation, country, or town, as:
la laugue fran^aiae, the Eren^ kmgwig$
Tempire allemand, the Oerman Brngrin
8. when a participle ia need as an adjective; as:
un verre aiRfi^ a broken glass
une action briUante, a brUliant action
A. when other words depend on the adjective, and when several
adjectivcH belong to the same noun; as:
un ^crivain tite-oAMire, a very celebrated writer
un momirque fler et puissant, a proud and mighty monarch.
83. In certain cases, adjectives can cither follow or precede the noun, at
the option of the writer. Among these adjectives a few need some attention
as having a different meaning, when preceding, and when following the
aoun. Examples:
une certaine nouvelle, emiabi nsies nne nouvelle certaine, sure netos
un honnete homme, an honeti man on homme honndte, a polite man
un brave homme, a good mem un homme brave, o courageous man
nne fauasedef; afalse key une clef fauase, a wrong hey
The Government of Adjectivet.
84* Many a4jeetivefl, when used predicatively, have some noun or pro-
noun for their object, which is commonly introduced by de, of; &, fo, or
some other preposition. Among tlu-^ie adjectives mark the following of most
frequent occurrence:
85. Adjectives followed by de:
absent, absent from incapable, incapable of
aflligiS, qJfUeted with inconsolnble, incon-siAuhlt for
capable, capable of indigne, xmicorihy of
content, pleased wUh las. tceary of
different, different from libre, free from
digne, icorthy cf, to m^content, displeased voith
floigne, far from plein, full of
envieux, envious of rempli, JiUed tcilh
ftich^, sorry for sur, sure of
86. Adjectives followed by &:
accessible, accessible to exact, eaad in
agreable, agreeable to facile, easy to
assidu, assiduous in inutile, useless to
attentif, attentive to necessaire, necessary to
bon, g(pod for, fit for nuisible, hurtful to
cher, dear to semblable, similar to
conforme, cojformable, similar to sensible, sensible of
contraire, contrary to sujet, sttbject to
difficile, difficult to utile, useful to
— 103 —
87i Adjectives followed by other prepositions:
bon pour, kind towards ignorant en, not versed in
celebre par, pour, celebrated for insolent avec, insolent to
civil envers, polite to poll envers, polite to
88. The adjectives haut, hight long, long^ large, broad, require de aftei
them, as:
une maison haute de vingt pieds a house twenty feet high
une table longue de six pieds a table six feet long
89. In place of these adjectives, the corresponding nouns hauteur, hdght,
profondeur, depth, longueur, length, largeur, breadth, are more commonly
used in this way:
une maison de vingt pieds de hauteur a house twenty feet high
une table de six pieds de longueur a table six feet long.
NUMERALS.
90. Although the Numerals are not regarded in the proper sense as a
distinct part of speech, their peculiarities of form and use are such, that they
require to be treated as a class by themselves.
91.
Cardinals.
1.
un, une
27.
vingt-sept
53.
cinquante-trois
2.
deux
28.
vingt-huit
54.
c inquante-quatre
3.
trois
29.
vingt-neuf
55.
cinquante-cinq
4.
quatre
30.
trente
56.
cinquante-six
5.
cinq
31.
trente et un
57.
cinquante-sept
6.
six
32.
trente-deux
58.
cinquante-huit
7.
sept
33.
trente-trois
59.
cinquante-neuf
8.
huit*
34.
trente-quatre
60.
soixante
9.
neuf
35.
trente-cinq
61.
soixante et un
10.
dix
36.
trente-six
62.
soixante-deux
11.
onze*
37.
trente-sept
63.
soixante-trois
12.
douze
38.
trente-huit
64.
Boixante-quatre
13.
treize
39.
trente-neuf
65.
soixante-cinq
U.
quatorze
40.
quarante
QQ.
soixante-six
15.
quinze
41.
quarante et un
67.
soixante-sept
16.
seize
42.
qiiarante-deux
68.
soixante-huit
17.
dix-sept
43.
quarante-trois
69.
soixante-neuf
18.
dix-huit
44.
quarante-quatre
70.
soixante-dix
19.
dix-neuf
45.
quarante-cinq
71.
soixante et onze
20.
vingt
46.
qiiarknte-six
72.
soixant6-donze
21.
vingt et un
47.
quarante-sept
73.
soixante-ireize
22.
vingt- deux
48.
quarante-huit
74.
soixante-quatorze
23.
vingt-trois
49.
quarante-neuf
75.
soixante-quinzG
24.
vingt-quatre
50.
cinquante
76.
soixante-seizo
25.
vingt-cinq
51.
cinquante et un
77.
soixante-dix-sep b
26.
vingt-six
52.
cinquante-deux
78.
soixante-dix-huit
* Note that before huit, huitihne, and onze, onzilme, no apostroplae is used.
le Tiuit, le huitilme, du onae, etc.
We say
104 —
79.
80.
81.
82.
83l
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
Boixante-dix-nenf
quatre-yingts
quatre-Tingt-on
qmitre-vingt-deax
qiiatre-Tingt^trois
90. qiiatre-vingt-dix
91. quatre-vingt-onze
92. quatre-vingtrdouze
93. quatre-vingt-treize
94. qoatre-Tingt-quatorze
100.
cent
200.
deux ocntB
300.
trois cento
400.
quatre cents
500.
cinq cento
600.
81 X cento
700.
sept cento
800.
hiiit cento
9oa
neof cento
1000.
mille.
qoatre-yingtKjuatro 95. qoatre-Tingtrquinze
qiiatre-vingt-cinq 96. quatre-vingt^eize
quatre-viugt-8ix 97. qoatre-viuKt-dix-sept
quAtre-vingtr«ept 98. quatw-nngt-dix-buit
qnatre-yingt-hoit 99. quatre-yingUiiz-neaf
89. qoatre-yingt-neaf
92. Oardinal nomeialB hare no modifioationa, ezoept nn, which fonns
the feminine und» and Tingrt and cent, which take the pliirul termina-
tion 8, when seTeral acon-n or himdroda aie spoken of, and they are not
followed by another nnmber. Both remain nninfWwtiwl when followed by
another number, or nacd in plaoe of the ordinala. We mj:
nn espaoe de qnatre-yingta ana a period </ eighi^f yean
qnatre-yingts livrea
^iscenta soldate
qnatre-Tingt-diz liTres
trois cent vingt-eiz aoldala
page cent qnatre-Tingt
en mil huit cent
eighty pounds
three kiaidndm)ldkn
f dn t iy poumde
three hmdredandhoeniy six eoldien
page om hmdred and eighty
in ths year eighteen hundred
93. The word millet meaning a fhausandf nerer takes an 8;
we say deux mille, two ihousand; when meaning a tnilCf it takes an a; as:
nn mille, a mile; deux milles, /tro mUes. When used for the date of the year|
it is \iTitteu mil; as: Tan mil huit cent soizante^oatorze, in the year 1874
94. The French say simply cent, a hwulred: uiille, a thouttand,
[L 31. 59.]
Ordinals.
95.
ist.
premier, premi^
re 17th,
ilix-*»eptiteie
2na,
second, seoonde
(deuxiime) 18th,
dix-huiti^me
3d,
troisitae
19th,
dix-neuW^e
4th,
quatri^e
20th,
%'ingtifemo
5th,
cinqui^e
21st,
vingt et unifeme
6th,
sixieme
22nd,
\'ingt-deuxieme
7th,
septi^e
30th,
trentieme
8tli,
huiti^e
40th,
quarantieme
9th,
neuvi^e
50th,
cinqnantieme
10th,
dixieme
60th,
soixanti^me
11th,
onzieme
70th,
Boixante-dixieme
12th,
doiizieme
80th,
quatre-vingtifeme
13th,
treizieme
90th.
quatre-vingt-diiitoe
Uth,
quatorzieme
lOOth,
centieme
15th,
quinziemo
lOOOth,
millieme
leih,
seizi^me
last,
dernier, demi^ro
— 105 —
96. Except le premier and le second, the Ordinals are formed from the
Cardinals by the addition of ieme, subject to slight variations. Those in
e change e into ienie ; cinq takes u before ieme, cinquieme, and those
ending in 1* change this final letter into vieme; as: neuf, neuvieme.
Compound numbers add, as in English, the ordinal ending only to their
last number.
97. In place of our Ordinals the French employs the Cardinals:
1. to denote the day of the month, except the first, which is always
le premier;
2. after the Christian name of a sovereign. In this case, too, the first
is premier; the second may be second, or deux; but always
without any article.
Thus we say:
le premier Mai, the first of May Henri premier, Henry the First
le deux Mars, the second of March Charles second, I m i 4r. q ^
, i. T • 77 /• ,7 /. T- ^11-. r Charles me becona
le quatre Jmn, the fourth of June Charles deux, 3
lo onze Avril, the eleventh of April Charles dix, Charles the Tenth
98. Besides the Cardinals and Ordinals, the following classes of numerals
require to be especially noticed:
1. the Collectives; as: une huitaine, a number of eight; une douzaine,
a dozen; une vingtaine, a score, etc. ;
2. the Fractionals, as: la moitie, the half; demi, demie, half: un
tiers, a third; un quart, a quarter; un cinquieme, a fifth; from
here upwards, they are essentially the same as the Ordinals; as:
cinq sixiemes, five-sixths, etc. ;
3. the Multiplicatives; as: le double, double, twofold; le triple, tr-iple;
quadruple, fourfold^ etc. p. 87, 88.]
PRONOUNS.
99i A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun; as: notre maison est
belle, je ne la vendrai pas, je la garderai; our house is fine, I will not
sell it, I will keep it. Pronouns are divided into six classes: Personal, Pos-
sessive, Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, Indefinite.
Personal Pronouns.
100. A personal pronoun is a pronoun whose form shows of what person
it is. There are three persons, the first, the second, and the third. The
first person is that which denotes the speaker or writer; the second denotes
the hearer or person addressed; and the third the person or thing spoken of.
101. In French, personal pronouns are divided into two classes. Con-
junctive and Disjunctive.
102. Conjunctive personal pronouns are those indispensably joined to a
verb; as: je parle, I speak; a disjunctive personal pronoun is one used ab-
solutely, or after a preposition; as: c'est lui, it is he; venez avec moi,
come with me.
— 106 —
Declension of the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns*
103. FiBST PSBflOlf. fiaooND Pmbsom.
Sinouter. Ptvral. tkufutttr. PhirtL
Nom. je I nous toe to thou youb yon
Gen.
Oat
Ace.
me
tome
nouB
tout
te
tothoe
TOOS
lOJfOM
me
m$
nolle
us
te
thee
voas
you
Tribd PKBeoir.
MoKuHm,
Ikmmimt.
U
he
Ue
ih^
eUe she
eUes
th^
Dat loi to him leor to them lui to h$r leur (o them
Ace. 1i> Aim h'H them la A«r U>m (A<rfu
Of boa gmdert.
Singular. PtimL
Norn. —
Gen. —
Oet se looM^sse^ te loiKmnsdves
Aee. 08 ofie'e se^ we 1hem»tives
ICH. All GonjonctiTc PereonalB irant the genitive caee.
Declension of the Disjunctive Personal Pronouns.
105
FntBT Pkbson.
SrmM)
l^KlfflOW.
Singular.
PiMraL
Singular
Plural
Norn.
moi /
nous toe
toi /'.
s you
Gen.
do moi of me
de none of us
de toi of Uice
devous cfyou
DaL
k moi to me
h none to us
k toi to th^f<
a voua to you
Ace
moi me
none us
toi
im ' you
TatBD Pbbson.
MatnUine.
lui he eiix they
iine.
Norn.
cU»
elles /^
Gen.
de lui of him
d'enx of them
d'ellc uj Uer
d'ellee of them
Dat.
k lui ^ohim
k eux to them
k elle fo A«r
a ellee to (/lem
Ace.
lui him
eux them
OfbotJn
elle her
gendtrt.
ellee them
Singular. Plural
mom. — —
Gen. de soi of one^s self —
Dat a soi to one*s self —
Ace. Boi one*s se!f —
Pronouns used with reference to Animals and Things.
106.
V
;
Singular.
Plural
Norn.
11, elle, ce
it
lis, elles, ce
they
Gen.
en
ofU
en
of them
Dat
lui, y
ioU
leur, y
to them
Acc
le, la
U
les
them
— lOY —
Compound Personals.
107. The word m^me, self, added to the disjunctive personals, forms
the class of compound personal pronouns:
moi-meme, myself nous-memes, ourselves
toi-meme, thyself vous-memes, yourselves
lui-meme, himself eux-memes, /
elle-meme, herself elles-memes, \ ^'^emseZves
soi-meme, one's self . vous-meme, yourself
They take the preposition de in the genitive case, and a in the dative.
Use of the Personal Pronouns.
108. The personal pronouns, /, thou, he, she, loe, you, they, are always
expressed by the conjunctive pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils,
elles, when they are the subject of a verb, provided they are not con-
nected by a conjunction with another noun or pronoun; as: je lis, 1 read'
elle vient, she comes, etc. Of course, the pronoun of the third person always
takes the gender of the noun to which it relates; thus: they are rich, is in
French, ils sont riches, with reference to men, and elles sont riches, with
reference to women.
109. The same personal pronouns, I, thou, he, she, we, you, they, become
disjunctive in French, and are to be expressed by moi, toi, lui, elle,
nous, vous, eux, elles, under the following circumstances:
1. when they come before or after the words qui, que, seul;
2. when they are used as an answer to a question;
3. when they are joined to a noun or pronoun by a conjunction;
4. when they come before a noun or verb used in opposition to another
noun or pronoun; as:
je suis plus jeune que lui. lam younger than he.
qui a fait cela? c'est moi. who has done that ? It is I.
mon frere et moi, nous appre- my brother and I, we learn French.
nons le fran9ais.
vous reviendrez a la ville, et moi you will return to town, and I will go
j'irai a la campagne. into the country.
1 10. The genitive case of personal pronouns is always expressed by the
disjunctive pronouns de nioi, de toi, de lui, d'elle, de nous, de
vous, d'eux, d'elles, after the verb; as,
il se plaint de moi he complaiyis of me
je ne parle pas de lui / do not speak of him
111. The dative case of personal pronouns is most commonly expressed
by the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, lui, nous, VOUS, leur, before
the verb; thus:
il me plait, he pleases me il lui a dit, he has told him
je leur parlerai, J wiU speak to thm> il nous a dit, he has told U9
— 108 —
112. They become diBJanctive, and arc to be expressed by A moi,
A toi, a liii* & elle^ A iiouh, & voii8y 4 eux^ H elles after the
verb, iu thre« cnaea, viz:
1. ^^'heu tht'y come after a noon or pronoun to which they are joined
by a conjunction;
2. when they are goyemed by a reflective verb;
3. when they are goyemed by any of the following rerfos:
aller, to go bofre, to drink
courir, to run penser, songer, to think-
iiccourir, to run to venir, to cowi^
je vous ]»:irl. ausHi bien qn'A oiix ; I speak to you as wfU as to thein
il h'ikIk s. a iiioi; jc nic tiv i\ liii ; h$ applies to me; I trust him
il viint a nous; ullez li liti; he eomes to usf go to him
je pons(> i\ voiis et H elle; Ithinkqfyou and qf her.
113. Whrii the ]x^rH(inal pronouns are in the aocnsativc (i>bjcctiYe) case,
Ihcy aro ^vuiTally conjunctive, and expressed by me, tc, Ic, la, »»oii«,
VOUM, IcH Iwfore the verb; as:
je le connais; je la verrai; I know him; I tciU see her
je les estime; on uoiis voit; / esteem them; one sees us.
114^ PerHoiuil pronouns after a preposition are always disjunctive, and
expressed by inoi, toi, liii, eUe» nous, vous* euXy elles; m:
pour inoi, jo ptUHe niu.si as for me, J think so
vouH iMirlerez aprus eux, you triS speak c^ter them
115. For things without life, in French, only the conjunctive pronouns
are used, namely: il, elle» lis, elles* for t7. they, in the nominative
case, and le, la, les, for i7, them, in the objective case. For the
genitive case is substituted en, which may be rendered by of it, from U,
toith it, for it, of them, from them, some^ any ; and for the dative case y, which
means to ii, in it, to them, in them, y and eii nre also used as adverbs of
place; eii stands for hence, thence; and y for f A«?rc or thither. Examples:
voil^ notTt^ maison; elle est vieille, there is our house, it is old, IvdUI sell
je la vendrai; n'eii parlez plus; it; do not speak any more of it
c'est une entreprise difficile, vous ii is a difficult undertaking, you toiU
n'y reussirez pas; not succeed in it
avez-vous ete en France ? j'en viens; have you been to FVance ? I come tlietice
non, je n'y ai jamais ete no, I have never been there,
116. The pronoun le, it, is often a mere expletive, representing a word
already used. When it stands for an adjective, or a noun not referring to
some definite object, it always remains invariable. But when it stands for
a noun, or adjective, referring to a definite object, it is made to agree with
its antecedent; then it is le for the masculine of the singular, la for the
feminine, and les for both genders of the plural. When so used, these pro-
nouns are not expressed in English. Examples are:
— 109 —
vos freres sont-ils appliques? are your brothers diligeni?
non, ils ne le sont pas no, they are not
ces messieurs sont-ils freres? are these gentlemen brothers?
oui, monsieur, ils le sont yes, Sir, they are
etes-vous le frere de Guillaume? are you William's brother?
oui, je le suis yes, I am
etes-vous la malade ? oui, je la suis are you the patient ? yes, I am
sont-ce la vos livres ? oui, ce les sont are these your books? yes, they are,
1 1 7. The compound pronouns, himself, herself, themselves, one's self, are
expressed by se when reflective; by lui-m^nie, elle-m^llie, eux-
memes, elles-memes, to denote emphasis; by soi when referring
to persons in a general sense, or to the pronouns, on, one; chacun, every-
body^ quelqu'un, somebody; and by lui, elle, eux, elles, when referring
to some definite person or persons. The word itself, relating to things with-
out life, is generally expressed by soi, Mark that this pronoun is confined
to nouns in the singular.
il se soumet a vos ordres he submits himself to yovr orders
elle parle toujours d'elle-m^me she always speaks of herself
chacun agit pour soi every one acts for himself
men frere a de I'argent sur lui my brother has money about him(self)
I'aimant attire le fer a SOi the loadstone attracts iron to itself
[I. 155, 156. 157, 158. 159. 160. 161. 162. 175. 176. 177. 178. II. 125. 126.]
Place of the Personal Pronouns.
118. The personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle,nous, VOUS, ils, elles,
usually precede the verb; they may be separated from it by the particle
ne, or the conjunctive pronouns of the dative and the accusative case, but
never by an adverb; they follow the verb only in interrogative sentences, as:
j'apprends, il ecrit, nous lisons I learn, he lorites, we read
VOUS dites toujours la verite you ahoays speak the truth
parlez-vous fran9ais ? do you speak French ?
119. The personal pronoims of the dative and the accusative case, namely :
me, te^ se, nous, vous, le, la, les, lui, lour, y, and en, are
always put immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before its
auxiliary in a compound one. When two or more pronouns are governed by
the same verb, those of the first and the second person precede those of the
third; and if they are both of the third, the accusative goes before the da-
tive, y and en go last. The conjunctive pronouns are placed before the
verb in the following order:
me, te, se, nous, vous go before every other
le, la, les go before lui, leur, y, en
lui, leur go before y, en
y goes before en
— 110 —
Examples:
il me le do&ne, il vona I'a preu^ iit gh^s U to me, he has knt U to you
il uoiw lea a envoys he has sent them to us
il me lea enverra he will send them to me
je vons las porterai / shall bring them to you
il le lui doiine, il le leur pn tera he (jives it to him, he will lend it to them
il loB hu a euvoy^s he has setU them to him
je VOU8 y en porterai / iri// carry you some there
120. When the verb is used in the impemtive affirmfttive, all pronounH
are put nfU-r it, and connected by hyphenH; in this ca«e mo! in OHcd instead
of ine; toi instead of te, and le, la. Ie» come Ixifore nil othrr pronouns.
y and en, ah usually, go last Hut if the imiK-mdve be uegaUve. the pro-
nouns go before it, as in all other icntum. Examples:
p.irlez-leur; toiveB-lais voyes-les speak to them; tcrUe to him; see them
pretcz-le-moi; Tendes-le-leiir lend U to me; seU it to them
ne le leur Yeodespta donotseUit to them,
[I. i6S. 164, IBS, 166, 167. IBS. ie». 170,]
Posses&ive Pronouns.
121. A PttMOOoive Pkononn is a pronoun which denotes the relation of
property. In French, the possessiTe pronouns are distinguished as powcn
siTO acUectiTes, which are always joine<i to a noun; and absolute poflseadYet,
which are used alone, but always with reference to a preceding noun.
122. The following are the Po oooori ve Adjectives:
Singular. Plural. Slaguter. Plural.
m. / m, ^ f, «. tf /. M. <# /.
mon ma mes my notre noe our
ton ta U>s thy votre voe your
son sa ses, his, her, Ua leur leurs their
123. They are varied for number and gender, and agree in these parti-
culars with the noun they qualify, and not, as in Engl i sh, with their ante-
cedent, as:
ma tante a vendu SOU jardin my aunl htis sold her garden
ma soeur m'a prete ses gants my sister has lent me her gloves
124. For the sake of euphony, before feminine nouns beginning with
a vowel or uon-aspirated h, the masculine pronouns mon, ton, son, are
used instead of ma, ta, sa; as: mon ame, my soul; nion humeur,
my temper,
125. When nouns are joined in construction, the poasessive adjectives
must be repented before each of them; as:
mon i^re, ma mere et mes freres my father, mother, and brothers
126. The French avoids the use of the possessives in many situations,
where they are employed in English, either putting in their stead the defin-
ite article only, or using with the article the dative of the personal pronoun; as:
— Ill —
vons Ini avez rompn le bras you have broken his arm
j'ai mal au cote I have pain in my side
127. The following are the Absolute Possessive pronouns:
Singular. Plural,
le mien, la mienne les miens, les miennes, mine
le tien, la tienne les tiens, les tiennes, thine
le sien, la sienne les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its
le notre, la notre les notres, ours
le votre, la votre les votres, yours
le leur, la leur les leurs, theirs
1 28. These pronouns agree in gender and number with their antecedent,
and are declined like nouns with the definite article; as: ton couteau et le
mien, thy knife and mine.
[I. S, 6. 9, 10, 19. 20. SI, 32, 4.1. 42. 53. 54. 55. 56. 85. 86.]
Demonstrative Pronouns.
129. A Demonstrative Pronoun is a pronoun which points out the object
to which it relates. In French, there are two demonstrative pronouns, one
to be used adjectively before nouns only, and the other to be used absolutely.
The former is:
ce, cet, cette, this, ces, tJiese
ce before a masculine noun, cet before a masculine noun beginning with
a vowel or non-aspirated h; cette before a feminine noun; the plural ces
is for both genders. To determine more precisely the object spoken of,
add the particle ci or la to the noun preceded by a demonstrative; thus,
ce jar din, this garden cet homme-la, that man
cet oiseau, this bird ces plumes-ci, these pens
cet homme, this man ces femmes-la, those women
cette maison, this house ces hommes-ci, these men
[I. 27. 28. 57. 58.]
130. The Absolute Demonstrative is:
celui, celle, this ceux, celles, tliese
131. When followed by a relative pronoun, it relates to persons only, as:
celui qui est content, est heureux; he who is contented, is happy
ceux qui ont vecu avant nous • those who lived before us.
132. When followed by the preposition de, it refers to persons as well
as to things, and is used in such phrases, as: mon livre et celui de monfrere,
my book and that of my brother.
133. When compounded with the words ci and 1^, thus:
celui-ci, celle-ci, this celiii-la, celle-l^i, tJiat
ceux-ci, celles-ci, these ceux-1^, celles-la, tJiose
celui-ci refers to the nearest object, and celui-la to the more distant, and if
both are contrasted, celui-ci means the latter, and celui-la the former; as:
voici de bonslivres: lesquels voulez- here are good books, which do you
vous, ceux-ci ou ceux-la? wantj these or those?
— 112 —
134. The demoDflnitiTW ceci, this, and cela, that, which are ap-
plied to things only, have the force of mere pronouu^ iu like ummier ce
is used abeolately before the verb etre, to 6f , or a relative prouoim ; thus,
ceoi est bon, oela ne vaut hen this is good, that is worth nothing
ce n'est pas mon frhte this is not my brother
prenez ce qui vous plait take what you like.
[I. 4:f.46,83,34. IL 110.]
Relative Pronouns.
135. A Belative Pronoun is a pronoun that stands for a pnn^eding word
or phrase, and serves to connect propositions. The relative pronouns are:
Quiy who; qnoif what; Icquel, laquello, which.
They are declined as follows:
JfOJC. d /faR., JSit^, d PUw.
Horn, qui 10^ (quoi), ce (pii trhnt
Gen. de qui, or dont cf VDhom dc quoi.'oTnuui </ ichat
Dai h qui to vohom k qnoi to u^kot
Ace ( ^ uc iMom (qnoi), oe que iMol
M(uc. /tan. Mate
lequel laquelle lesqueU lesqaeUee uihich
Qm. duquel de laquelle desquels deaqnelles <f vohidi
Oat auquel jk hiquelle aozqnels anzqaeUes to which
Ace. lequel laquelle lesquels leeqnelles tofdch
136. The nominative qui and the aocoaative que are applied indiffer-
ently to persons and thiugH in the iiingnlar and plural, as:
lliomme qui parle the man toAo speafe*
les livres qui sont ear la table the books which are on the iahle
la femme que j*ai vue the woman whom I have seen
les plumes que vous oherohes the pens whidi you are looking for
137. The genitive de ffiii is confined to persona, but is usually replaced
by dont^ which may 1)6 applied indifferently to persons and th ings in the
singular and plim\l; as:
j'ai vu la porsonne dont vous parlez I have seen the person cf whom you speak
rhomme dont vous parlez, est mort the man of whom you speak, is dead
voici rhomme de qui vous avez parl^ there is the man cf tchom you hm-f ftnok-fm
Tofiaire dont je vous ai parle (he business of which I told yo
138. The dative case iV qui is applied to persons only; for uMimis
and things the dative of lequel, laquelle, is to be used, as:
rhomme a qui j'ai ouvert la porte the man to whom I opened the door
les amis a qui nous ecrivons the friends to whom toe write
c'est un mal auquel je suis sujet this is a complaint to which I am subject.
139. In gener:\l, after any preposition, qui is used for persons, and
lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, for animals and things; thus,
la dame avec qui je suis arrive ike lady with whom I arrived
voici Tarbre sur lequel il montA there is the tree an xohich he climbed
— 113 —
140. The English pronoun whose is usually to be rendered by dont;
but if preceded by any preposition, it is expressed by de qui, duquel^
de laquelle, etc., as:
rhomme dont le fils est malade the man whose son is sick
I'homme avec le fils duquel vous the man with whose son you have ar-
etes arrive rived
141. The relative quo! is used in the sense of what (thing), or that
(thing) which, but not otherwise than after a preposition; if a nominative or
an accusative is required, ce qui or ce que is used instead; as:
voila de quoi je me plains that is what I complain about
ce que j'ai mange etait excellent what I have eaten was very good.
142. The relative, often omitted in English, must always be expressed in
French; as: lelivre que vous lisez, estamoi, the hook you read, belongs to me.
[I. 23. 24. n. 114. 115. 116.]
Interrogative Pronouns.
143. An Interrogative Pronoun is a pronoun with which a question is
asked. The interrogative pronouns are:
qui, who? lequel, laquelle, which? que, wTiat?
quoi, tvhat? quel, quelle, which?
They are declined as follows:
Sing. & Plur. Singular. Plural.
M. & F. Masc. Ftm. Masc. Fern.
Norn, qui? who? lequel laquelle? lesquels lesquelles? which?
Gen. dequi? of whom? duquel de laquelle ? desquels desquelles ? o/ lo/iic/L^
Dat. a qui ? to whom? auquel a laquelle ? auxquels auxquelles ? to which?
Ace. qui? whom? lequel laquelle? lesquels lesquelles? which?
Nom. que,quoi? lo/ia/.^ quel quelle? quels quelles? what?
Gen. de quoi ? of what? de quel de quelle ? de quels de quelles ? of what?
Dat. a quoi ? to what? a quel a quelle ? a quels a quelles ? to what?
Ace. que? what? quel quelle? quels quelles? ichat?
144. qui, who? is applied to persons only. Instead of €[\ii, tvlw?
we may use: qui est-ce qui? and instead of qui, wTioni? qui
est-ce que?
qui est la ? qui est-ce qui est-la ? who is there?
quicherchez-voTis? I whom do you look for?
qui est-ce que vous cherchez ? 3
145. The pronoun lequel, laquelle ? is applied to both persons and
things, and always relates to a preceding or following noun, with which it
agrees in gender; it corresponds to the English interrogative whichy followed
^y of
lequel devosfreresapprendlefran^ais? which of your brothers learns French?
lequel de ces jardins est a vous ? which of these gardens belongs to you?
— 114 -•
146, The word qael^ quelle? 'is prefixed to nounfi an an interrogatiTd
adjective, the same as tehicK ^hat * in Euglifth. It iH applied to persons as
well as things, and agrees with itii noiin in gender and number; as:
& qnel jen jonepons-nons ? vthat game shall tte play at?
qnellee plumes cherchez-vous ? ichat prns art you looking for?
147. que ? and quoi ? answer precisely to the English pronoun
uihcU ? denoting things. The former oooon only in the nominative and
accusative, and the latter is nearly alwa3r8 governed by a pre|)08ition. In-
stead of que* we may also use qa*e8t*ce qui for the nominative, and
qu'e8t-ce <iue for the accusative; as:
que lisez-vous? qu'est-ce que vous Uses? what are ycu reading?
de quoi parlez-vous? tchal are ywi speaking of?
fl. «9. 90. lOO. IIO, n. 111. 119, 113,]
Indefinite Pronouns.
148* When a pronoun stands for some' person or thing indeterminate,
or unknown to the speaker, it is called an indefinite pronoun. In English,
such words are usually Haarified with pronominal adjeotives.
149. The following are always joined to a noun:
quelque, quelqoes, some quelconque, queloonques. whattver
chaque, eachy every certain, >aine, «ome, certain
150. quelque, and its plural quelques are employed for both gen-
ders, in the meaning of some, any, %Dhatever; as: prdtee-moi quelque livre,
lend me some book. [H. 117,]
151. ehaque is used for both genders, but in the singular only, as:
ohaque homme, each or every man; chaque femme, each or every woman,
m. 117,]
1 52. quelconque, plural quelconques, has the same form for both
genders, and always follows its noun, as: pretes-moi un livre quelconque,
lend me any book whaUver, pL 193. 194.]
153. certain before a noun means some, certain, and after it stire,
rn. 129.]
154% The following are employed with or without a noun :
nul, nulle ] ni Tun ni Tautre, neither
pas un, pas une > no one meme, same, self
aucun, aucune j tel, telle, such
autre, other plusieurs, several
Tun et Tftutre, both tout, everything
Tun on I'autre, either tout, toute, every, whole, all
155. mil, pas un, aucun, no one, nobody, a]wa3rB require ne before
the verb; as:
aucun ami ne me reste no friend remains to me
pas un ne I'a vu no one has seen it
nul n'est immortel nobody is immortal, [H. 118, 119,]
— 115 —
156. m^me, and iis plural monies are used for persons and things
of both genders; as: le meme homme, the same man; la meme chose, the
same thing. After a noun, or pronoun m^me answers to the English
compounds m2/.9eZf, himself, herself, &c., as:
la religion meme le defend religion itself forbids it
le roi meme s'y opposa the king himself opposed it
[II. 120. 121.]
157. tel, telle, as a pronoun, is applied to persons only, and has no
plural. As an adjective, it is translated by such, and may be used in the
singular and plural for persons and things; thus,
tel rit aujourd'hui qui pleurera m/xny a one laughs to-day, who will
demain; weep to-morrow.
une telle conduite me deplait; such a conduct displeases me.
[II. 120. 121.]
158. tout, everything, and le tout, the whole, are used without a noun
in the singular only; in the sense of every, tout is immediately joined to
a noun in the singular, and agrees with it in gender. When meaning whole,
all, it is used in the singular and plural number, with the article or some
pronoun between it and the substantive ; as an adverb it means quite.
tout est vanite en ce monde all is vanity in this world
je prendrai le tout I will take the whole
toute la maison est pleine de monde the whole house is full of people
tout homme est mortel every man is mortal
c'est tout le meme homme thxit is quite the same man
[I. 59. 60. n. 1»0. 121.]
159. The following are never joined to a noun:
on, one, people, they Tun I'autre, one another
quelqu'un, -une ) somebody autrui, others
quelques-uns,-unes f some personne, nobody
quiconque, whoever rien, nothing
chacun, every one la plupart, most
160. I'on is used instead of on after et, and; si, if; OU, where; OU,
or; que, that, provided the following word does not begin with an 1; as:
le temps oul'onvit, leslieux oul'on the time in which one lives, the places
est; where one is
le soir, on se promene, ou on lit; in the evenings one goes out for a walk,
or reads p. 101. 102.]
161. quelqu'un corresponds to the English somebody, anybody;
quelques-uns, quelques-unes are employed for some in such
phrases, as:
je me servirai de quelques-uns de vos TidHI make use of some of your books
I livres;
connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces do you know any of these ladies ?
dames? * * [H, I17.J
— 116 —
162. quioonque, loftoeMr, and chacun, every one, are oonfliied to
penu)ns in the Niugubir. The lattt^r, bowcver, when it relatm to a preceding
uouii, limy \)e applied to thiiigR as well an to perHons. In this case, it has
two terminations, chaciin for the masculine, chaciiue for the feminine.
Thus we aay:
je parie k qoioonqne vent m'entendre, / speak to whoever untt hear me
Chacon vit i aa manidre, every <me Uvea ofler hU own way
remettee cea liTrea chacon k aa pUoe, put these books each in Us place
[n. 1 17. 193.194.}
163. Tun Pantre, om anolher, endi other, admits of l)oth Renders
and numbers, and takes the mark of declension between Vun and Taut re;
thUA,
mon frhre et Totre soonr parlent ton- my brother and yoyr sisUr always
jours Tun de Tantrc; speak of each ether,
(IL l«t.]
164. aiitriil, others, is applied to persons only, and most always
depend on u pn^poHition, rb:
il ne laut pas d^iurer le bien d'autrui we rnusi not eovel other peopte^s prfmerty,
165. perHonne, nobody, and rlen, nothing, always require ne be-
fore the verb; as:
je n*ai rien yn de pins bean Ihave seen nofhtng finer
▼ons ne plaisei k penonne you please nobody.
In interrogative aeotenoea ancon, person no, rien are used without
ne; in this case they mean: any, anybody, anything; as:
est-il rien de plus bean ? Is there anything more beautiful ?
[L 113. 114. n. IIH, 119.]
166. If aiieiin, personne and rien are used without a verb, in
answer to a queHtion, they retain their negatiye meaning, eren without ne;
as:
qui m*appelle ? personne who oaUs met nobody
qu'apportez-vous ? rien what do you bring t nothing,
167. There are a few indefinite pronouns which are always followed by
que:
qui que, whoever quelque que, whatever
quoi que, whatever tel que, such as
quel que, whoever, whatever tant que, however
168. ^^^len the English words however, howsoever precede an adjective
or participle, they are expressed in French by quelque indeclinable; as:
quelque grande que soitsa faute, however great his fauU may he, luriU
je lui pardonnerai ; forgive him.
169. The English word whatever, followed by a noun and any other
verb than to be, is expressed by quelque before a noun singular, and by
quelques before a noun plural, as:
quelques fautes qu'il ait commises, whatever faults he has committed, I wiH
je lui p^donnerai; forgive him.
— in —
170. The English word whatever, followed by a noun and the verb to &e,
is expressed by quel que in two words, the first of which is an adjective,
and agrees with its noun in number and gender; thus:
quelle que soit sa faute, je lui whatever his fault may he, I will for-
pardonnerai; give him. [Ii. 123, 124,]
THE VERB.
171. A Verb is a word that signifies to he, to act, to he acted upon; as: je
suis, lam; j'aime, I love; je suis aime, lam loved.
Classes.
172. Verbs are divided with respect to their signification into five
classes: active, passive, neuter, reflective, impersonal.
1 73. An active verb expresses an action which has some person or thing
for its object: as: Charles etudie sa le^on, Charles studies his lesson.
174. A passive verb expresses an action received by its subject; as: les
mechants seront punis, the loicked will he punished.
175. A neuter verb expresses simply a state of being; as: je dors, I sleep.
176. A reflective verb is a verb that has for subject and object the same
person or thing; as: je m'habille, I dress myself,
177. An impersonal verb is a verb that is used only in the third person
singular of each tense, as: il neige, it snows.
Modifications.
178. Verbs have modifications of four kinds; namely: Moods, Tenses,
Persons, and Numbers.
179. There are five moods: the Indicative, the Conditional, the Impera-
tive, the Subjunctive, the Infinitive.
180. The Indicative simply declares a thing, as: j'ecris, I write.
181. The Conditional represents the being, action, or passion under a
condition, as: j'irais, si je n'etais pas malade, I should go, if I were not sick.
182. The Imperative expresses the will of the speaker, as: repondez-
moi, answer me.
183. The Subjunctive asserts with modifications, in a subordinate
manner, as: je desire que vous reussissiez, I wish you may succeed.
184. The Infinitive expresses the being, action, or passion in an inde-
finite manner, as: parler, to speak.
185. Tenses are those forms of the verb, which distinguish time; they
are divided into two classes, simple and compound tenses.
186. There are four simple tenses: the Present, the Imperfect, the Pret-
erit, the Future; and four compound tenses, namely: the Perfect, the Plu-
perfect, the Preterit Anterior, and the Second Future.
187. The Person and Number of a verb are those forms in which it
agrees with its subject. Verbs have three persons, first, second, and third,
and two numbers, the singular and the plural.
-~ 118 —
Conjugation.
188. Conjugation of % yerb in a rt)gular dUtribuiiou of its moods, tousefl,
nomberu, and peiBOiiB. There are four conjugatioDJH in French, luimely:
the First with the present Infinitive in er. sm aimer, to love
the Second with the pre^nt lulinitive in Ir, iis tiiJr, tojinish
the Third with the present Infinitive in oir, jw drvoir, to owe
the Fourth with the present Infinitive in re, as vendre, to seU.
189. With respect to their form, the verbs of the four conjugations are
divided into two cUisses, rfgnUir and irrtyitUir. But in regard to the Third
Conjugation, containing the verbs in oir. gmmmariiuis are gristly at
variance, and some sup|)osing these verlw to bo all irregular, tven deny the
existence of a Third liegular Conjugation altogether. On this point the
following remarks require special notice on the jxirt of the learner. Betddes
avoir, to have^ then? are in French twelve simple verbs in oir. which
are all mhnitted to be irregular, except devoir, to owe^ and rcfCVOlr,
to receive; and oven these two must be included in the irreguhir list,
if we adopt the common definition, a retjular verb is a verb ichich does iiot
chaiuje Us root According to this view, they should be classified as Irrtgular
verbs in oir; so much the more as there is neither p gopri e ^, noradTBOtage
for the learner in treating two Terbt as a aeparate oonjngation.
I9CX As the French oonjngation oonsists. partly of yariation, acoom-
pUshed by means of the two auxiliaries avoir, to have, and 6tre, to he,
they are to be learned in the first place.
•91. aTOir, to have
Sdcpiji Tknsbs. Coxpound Tmmm.
Indicative Mood.
Present Peffect
j'ai, Tha\'>e j*ai en, T have had
in as, than hast ta as en, thou hast had
il a, he has il a en, A« has had
nous avons, ire have nonaavons en, toe- have had
vons avez, you fuive vons avez en, you have had
Us out, they have ils <mi en, they have had
Imperfect Piuperfeet
j'avais, 7/}a</ y&YtAs en, I had had
tu avals, thou hadsi' tn avals eu, thou hadst had
11 a\'ait, he had il avait en, he had had
nous avions, we had nous avions eu, toe had had
vons aviez, you had vous aviez eu, you had had
ils avaient, they had ils avaient eu, they had had
— 119 -
Simple Tenses.
Preterit.
j'eus, I had
til eus, thou hadst
il eut, he had
nous eumes, we had
vous elites, you had
ils eurent, they had
Future.
j'aurai, I shall have
til auras, thou wilt have
il aura, he will have
nous aurons, we shall have
vous aurez, you will have
ils auront, they will have
Present.
j'aurais, I should have
tu aurais, thou wouldst have
il aurait, he would have
nous aurions, we should have
vous auriez, you would have
ils auraient, they would have
Compound Tenses.
Preterit Anterior.
j'eus eu, I had had
tu eus eu, thou hadst had
il eut eu, he had had
nous eumes eu, we had had
vous elites eu, you had had
ils eurent eu, they had liad
Second Future,
j'aurai eu, I shall have had
tu auras eu, thou wilt have had
il aura eu, he will have had
nous aurons eu, we shall have had
vous aurez eu, you will have had
ils auront eu, they will have had
Conditional.
Past.
j 'aurais eu, I should have had
tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had
il aurait eu, he loould have had
nous aurions eu, we should have had
vous auriez eu, you would have had
ils auraient eu, they would have had
aie, have (thou)
Present.
que j'aie, I may have
que tu aies, them mayest have
qu'il ait, he may have
que nous ayons, we may have
que vous ayez, you may have
qu'ils aient, they may have
Preterit.
que j'eusse, I might have
que tu eusses, thou mighiest have
qu'il eut, he might have
que nous eussions, we might have
que vous eussiez, you might have
qu'ils eussent, they might have
Imperative.
ayons, let us have
Subjunctive.
ayez, have (you)
Perfect.
que j'aie eu, I may have had
que tu aies eu, thou mayest have had
qu'il ait eu, he may have had
que nous ayons eu, we may have had
que vous ayez eu, you jnay have had
qu'ils aient eu, they may have had
Pluperfect.
que j'eusse eu, I might have had
que tu eusses eu, thou mightest have had
qu'il eiit eu, he might have had
que nous eussions eu, we might have had
que vous eussiez eu, you might have had
qu'ils eussent eu, they might have had
Perf. avoir eu, to have had
Infinitive.
Pres. avoir, to have
Participle.
Pres. ayant, having Perf. ayant eu, having had
Past, eu, had. [i. 13. 14. IS. 16. 17. 18. 97. 98. 103. 104. 111.
112. 117. 118. 119. 120. n. 1. 2. 5. 6. 9. 10. IS. 16.]
— 120 —
Sdcpuc Tsmbis.
192.
je Btiis, / am
ta e8» thou art
ileei, he is
noQs Bommee, we c
TOU8 etes, jfou are
il sont, they are
tu etais, thou ttast
il ^tait he ttax
I10U8 <!>tionH, tee
VOU8 etiez, you
ilK ^taieut, they
je ftis, / tros
tu fns, /Aou iMU<
il fat> A0 iMM
nous f&mes, toe were
vouB futes, yem were
iis furent, M^ iwre
fit re, to be
COMFOTTND TsNSBL
Indicative.
Pened
j'ai I'te, / have been
tu lus ete, thou had been
ilaete, hehasbeen
noos aTOHB M, we have been
YOOB Bvee ^t^ yott have been
ils ont ^ they have been
je serai, / shtiU be
tu sems, thtm tciii be
il sera, he \tiU be
noos serous, we shall be
vous seres, you wUl be
ils seront, they wiU be
j*anus M, I had been
tu avaia ^ thcu hadsl been
il avait M, he had been
nous aTions ^ we haul ^tem
▼ous aries M, you had been
lis avaient M, they had been
yeaa 6t6, I had been
to eos ^ thou hadal been
U eat M, he had been
nooa eAmes M, we had been
vooB efttes M, ycu had been
ils «arent 4i6^ they had been
j norai M/6, I shall have been
tu auras dt^ fKou witt have been
il aura M, he wUl have been
noos aorons M, we ehaU have been
Toos aurez et&, you wQl have been
ils aurout ^U>, they wiU have been
Present
je serais, / should be
tu serais, thou icouldst be
il serait, he xixntld be
nous serious, we should be
vous seriez, you would be
ils seraient, they xjdoxM be
Conditional.
Past
j'aurais ete, / should have been
tu aiurais ete, thou wouldst have been
il aiu*ait ete, he would have been
nous aurions ete, toe should have been
vous auriez ete, you would have been
ils auraient ete, they iDOuld have been
Bois, be (thou)
Imperative,
soyons, let us be
soyez, be (you)
^ 121 —
Simple Tenses.
Present
que je sois, I may he
que tu sois, thou mayest he
qu'il soit, he may he
que nous soyons, we may he
que vous soyez, you may he
qu'ils soient, they may he
Preterit.
que je fusse, I might he
que tu fusses, thou mightest he
qu'il fut, he might he
que nous fussions, we might he
que vous fussiez, you might he
qu'ils fussent, they might he
Compound Tenses.
Subjunctive. ^^^^^
que j'aie ete, I may have heen
que tu aies ete, thou mayest have heen
qu'il ait ete, he may have heen
que nous ayons ete, we m/iy have heen
que vous ayez ete, you m/xy have heen
qu'ils aient ete, they ma,y have heen
Pluperfect
que j'eusse ete, I might have heen
que tu eusses ete, thou mightest have heen
qu'il eut ete, he might have heen
que nous eussions ete,ioe might have heen
que vous eussiez ete, you might have heen
qu'ils eussent ete, ih^ might have heen
Pres. etre, to he
Infinitive.
Perf.
avoir ete, to have heen
Participle.
Pres. etant, heing Perf- ayant ete, having heen
Past, ete, heen [L 93, 94. 95. 96. 101. 102. 103. 104. Ill, 112.
117. 118, 119. 120. n. 1. 2. S. 6. 9. 10. 15. 16.]
193. lu general, the French auxiliaries are used nearly the same as to
have and to he in English, namely, avoir for the compound tenses of the
active voice, and ^tre for the passive. But there are also not a few active
verbs in French, which form their compound tenses with 6tre, where
to have in English is employed. These are:
1. All reflective verbs, as: se lever, to rise; je mesuis leve, I have risen;
2. The following neuter verbs:
aller, to go retoumer, to come hack
aiTiver, to arrive sortir, to go out
entrer, to come wi tomber, to fall
mourir, to die venir, to come
naitre, to he horn parvenir, to attain
partir, to set out devenir, to hecome
rester, to remain revenir, to come hack
194. A few verbs may take either auxiliary; namely, avoip, when the
action of the verb is had in view, and ^tre, when reference is had to the
condition or state which the verb expresses. These are :
accourir, to run to
cesser, to cease
changer, to change
croitre, to grow
descendre, to descend
echapper, to escape, evade
grandir, to grow tall
monter, to ascend
perir, to perish
vieillir, to grow old
— 122 —
195. Some fiire uaed with different meanings,
demeurer, with avoir: to reside with etre: to remain
conveuir, *• to suit " (o agree
Vf^^^otf ♦' iogotikrcugh fo pass away, go
expiier, '; to die ^> expire
Formation of the Tenses.
196. There are five principal parth in the conjugation of French verV)R,
niuiicly, the I*rc8ent Infin itive, the Prewent Parti ciple, th e fi^^ ^iirtic-iplt? .
the Present indicati ve, and the Preterit »Indim£iaL They are nxlh-A prin-
cipai or pnmiUve parts, beoanse when they am known, all others wm be in-
ferred from them.
197. From the Present Infinitive are formed:
the Future by changing r or re into rai, and
the Pkeseut Conditional by changing r or re into raiR.
Pret. IniBitfve. Future. Pret. CondMonaL
parler to upeak y- iwirhral je parlerais
llnir to finiaii je finiral je finirals
vend re to aeif je vendral jo vend ra 1 8
198. From the Present Participle are formed:
the Plural of the Indicative Preaenft faj changing ant into oiiM, es, ent
the Imperfect Inilicative by changing ailt into ai8; and
the Present Subjimctive by changing ant into e.
Pres. Part lod. Prat. Plur. Imperl. Ind. Pret. Sut
pnrlant, frpftskimj nous pftrlons je jwirlais qut-jt
rtniHsailt, ^*ni-«Aiik; nou8 fini-i^OI18 je fmi.'vsai.s que je liiii-sc
vendant, selling nons veudous je vemlais que je veude
199. From the Past Participle all comiwimd tensctj are formed by means
of the anxiliarit^ avoir, to h 'ce^ and etre. to he.
Past Part. — C owpoe ad Taaaea. ^
parl^, spoken j'ai parl6 j'avais porW jaurai parle etc.
pnni, punished j'ens puni j'anrais puni je suis puni etc.
vendu, soid j*ai vendu j'aurai vendu j'ai et^ vendu etc
2CX). From the Present Indicative the Im]>erative is formed by sim-
ply omitting the pronouns Je^ noUH* YOUSy thus:
Prea. Indie Imperative,
je parle, / spetUc parle
nous finissons, toe fimsh finissons
VOU8 vendez, you sell vendez
201. Prom the Preterit Indicative the Subjunctive of the same tense is
formed by changing ai into asse for verbs of the first Conjugation, and by
adding se to all other verbs, as:
Pret Indicative. Pret Subjunctive.
je parlai, / spf>ke que je parlasse
je finis, I finished que je finlsse
je vendis, Isold que je vendisse
— . 123 —
EEGULAK VEKBS. — FIKST CONJUGATION.
202. parler, to speak
SiMPiiE Tenses. Compound Tenses.
Indicative.
Perfect,
j'ai parle, I have spoken
tu as parle, thou hast spoken
il a parle, he has spoken
nous avons parle, we have spoken
vous avez parle, you have spoken
ils ont parle, they have spoken
Present.
je parle, / speak
tu paries, thou speakest
il parle, he speaks
nous parlons, we speak
vous parlez, you speak
ils parlent, they speak
Imperfect,
je parlais, I was speaking
tu parlais, thou wast speaking
il parlait, he was speaking
nous parlions, we were speaking
vous parliez, you were speaking
ils parlaient, they were speaking
Preterit.
je parlai, I spoke
tu parlas, thou spokest
il parla, he spoke
nous parlames, ice spoke
vous parlates, you spoke
ils parlor ent, they spoke
Future.
je parler ai, / shall speak
tu parler as, thou wilt speak
il parlera, he will speak
nous parler ons, we shall speak
vous parlerez, you will speak
ils parleront, they will speak
Pluperfect
j'avais parle, I had spoken
tu avals parle, thou hadst spoken
il avait parle, he had spoken
nous avions parle, we had spoken
vous aviez parle, you had spoken
ils avaient parle, they had spoken
Preterit Anterior.
j'eus parle, I had spoken
tu eus parle, thou hadst spoken,
il eut parle, he had spoken
nous eiimes parle, we had spoken
vous eutes parle, you had spoken
ils eurent parle, they had spoken
Second Future.
j'aurai parle, I shall have spoken
tu auras parle, thou wilt have spoken
il aura parle, he will have spoken
nous aurons parle, we shall have spoken
vous aurez parle, you will have spoken
ils auront parle, they will have spoken
Present.
je parlerais, I should speak
tu parlerais, thou wouldst speak
il parler ait, he would speak
nous parler ions, we should speak
vous parleriez, you would speak
ils parleraient, they would speak
Conditional.
Past.
j'aurais parle, I should have spoken
tu aurais parle, thou wouldst have spoken
il aurait parle, he would have spoken
nous aurions parle, we should have sp.
vous auriez parle, you would have spoken
ils auraient parle, they would have sp.
parle, speak (thou)
Imperative,
parlpns, let us speak
parlez, speak (you)
— 124 —
Sddxa
CoxpowD TmsM.
Present
que je pMrle, I may speak
que ta paries, thou maytst speak
qu'il parle, he may speak
que nous parlions, toe may speak
que vouH parliez. you may speak
qa'ils parleilt, they may speak
Subjunctive.
Perfect
que j'aie parks / may havf sjyiikeu
quo tu aie8 jxirle, thou maytst have sp.
qu'il nit j»irle, he may hare symken
que nouw ayou« jxirle, ire- may have sp.
que vou« ayez |>arle, you may have sp.
qa'ils aieut ixirle, they may have spoken
Pluperfect
que je parlasse, / might speak que j^enaee parl^ / might have spoken
que ta parlasses, thou mighiest speak qae ta eoases porl^, thim mighiest etc.
qa*il parlAt, he mighl speak qu'il eftt parl^ he might have >-
qaenoos parlassions, tee might sp. que noos eosnons parld, tee m
queyoos parlassiez, youmtght spieak que toos eovieK park*, you mijht dc.
qa'ils parlassent, they might speak qa'ils coasent porl^, thry might etc.
Infinitive,
parler, to speak Ptri aroir parie, to have spoken
Partioiple.
Perf.
ayant parl^ having spoken
Pret. parlant, speaking
Past parl6, spoken
(L IMS. UM. 19S. 196, Vil. i9S. 1^. l.'iO. 131. 139.
n. .'1. •/- 7. s. //. /•.*. /.'{. It, IS. itf.]
SECOND CONJUGATION.
203.
y Present
je finis, Ifinhh
tu finis, thoafinishest
il fiuit, he finishes
nous finissons, xte finish
Tous fiuissez, you finish
lis finissent, they finish
Imperfect
jc ii.ii.-.-iii>>. / icas finishing
tu tiiiissais, thou icaM finishing
il finissait, he icti.s finishing
nous finisslons, toe were finish i Jig
' vcus finiKsiez, you xoere finishing
ils finissaieilt, ihey tcere finishing
finir, to finish
Indicative.
Perfect "^^'^-^
j'fti fini, 1 hnv jliish'd
tu as fini, th-ni hastjlnisf^d
il a fini, he has finished
nous avons fini, toe have finished
vous avez fini, you have finished
ils ont fini, they have finished
f^uperfect
j'avais fini, / had finished
tu avais fini, thou hftdst finished
il avail fini, he h(ul finished
nous av-ions fini, ice had finished
vous aviez fini, you had finished
ils avaient fini, they had finished
— 125 —
Simple Tenses.
Preterit.
je finis, I finished
tu finis, thou finishedst
il finit, lie finished
nous fininies, loe finished
vous finites, you finished
ils finirent, they finished
Future.
je finirai, / shall finish
tu finiras, thou wilt finish
il finira, he will finish
nous finiroiis, we shall finish
vous finirez, you will finish
ils finiroilt, they will finish
Compound Tenses.
Preterit Anterior.
j'eusfini, I had finished
tu eus fini, thou hadst finished
il eut fini, he Imd finished
nous eumes fini, we had finished
vous eutes fini, you had finished
ils eurent fini, they had finished
Second Future,
j'aurai fini, I shall have finished
tu auras fini, thou wilt have finished
il aura fini, he will have finished
nous aurons fini, we shall have finished
vous aurez fini, you will have finished
ils auront fini, they will have finished
Conditional.
Present,
je finirais, I should finish
tu finirais, thou icouldst finish
il finirait, he icould finish
nous finirions, we should finish
vous finiriez, you loould finish
■ ils finiraient, they would finish
Past.
j'aurais fini, I should have finished
tu aurais fini, thou wouldst have finished
il aurait fini, he would have finished
nous aurions fini, we should havefinished
vous auriez fini, you would havefinished
ils auraient fini, they would havefinished
finis, finish (thou)
Imperative.
finissons, let us finish
Subjunctive.
finissez, finish (you)
Present.
Perfect.
que je finisse, I may finish
que tu finisses, thou rnayest finish
qu'il finisse, he may fiyiish
que nous finissions, we may finish
que vous finissiez, you may finish
qu'ils finissent, they may finish
Preterit.
que je finisse, I might finish
que tu finisses, thou mightest finish
qu'il finit, he might finish
que nous finissions, we might finish
que vous finissiez, you might fiyiish
qu'ils finissent, they might finish
que j'aie fini, I may have finished
que tu aies fini, thou may est havefinished
qu'il ait fini, he may have finished
que nous ayons fini, toe may havefinished
que vous ayez fini, you may havefinished
qu'ils aient fini, they may havefinished
Pluperfect.
que j'eusse fini, I might have finished
que tu eusses fini, thou mightest etc.
qu'il eut fini, he might etc.
que nous eussions fini, we might etc.
que vous eussiez fini, you might etc.
qu'ils eussent fini, they might etc.
— 126 —
SocPLB TiNfOH!. Compound Txkbv.
Infinitive*
Prtt. flnir, to finish P»H. avoir fini, to hat^ finished
Participle.
Pr«i. finiHSant« finishing Peri ayant fini, fiaving finished
PtiL liui, fiiusfaed [I. 1S3. 134, 135, 130. 137, 138.
n. 3. 4, 7. 8. 11, 1^, 13. 14. 18. 16,]
204.
FOURTH CONJUGATION,
vend re, to sell
Indicative.
Pretwit
je Tends, / sell
tu vends, thou stUesl
il vendt he seUs
nous vendons, toe M
Youa vendez. you seU
ils vendent, they mU
je vendais, I was uBbug
tn vendais. ihcu waat atiUng
il veudait. he was aeUing
nous vvndioiis» we toers mOing
Yons vendiez. you were aeOing
ils vendaieut, they were sdUng
PretenCi
je vendis, / sold
ta vendis, thou soldest
il vendit, he sold
nous veudiines, we sold
vous vendites, you sold
ils vendirent, they sold
Future,
je vendrai, / shall sell
in vendras, thou witt sdl
il vcndra. he wiS seU
nous vendrons, loe shall sell
Yona vendrez, you will sell
ils vendront, they tcHl seU
jai vttudu, I have sold
toMTendu, thou had wold
il a Tendo, he has Mold
noQ8 ayoDB vendo, we ham aM
TOQB aves vendo, you have aM
ils ont yendn, they have sold
j*aTai8 Tendo, 1 had add
to avais Tendu, thcu hadst acid
il avait vendu, he had sold
nona avioDa Tendn, we had aold
Tons avies vendii, you had aM
ils avaient vendo, they had aold
Prelenl MBienof .
j'ens vendn, I had aold
ixL ens vendu, thou hadat aold
il eut vendn, he had sold
nous edmes vendu, ire had aold
vons efttes vendu, you had aold
ils enrent vendu, they had sold
Second Future.
jaurai vendu, IshaU have sold
tu auras vendu, thou wili Jiave sold
il aura vendu, he trill Iiave sold
nous aurons vendu, we shall have sold
vous aurez vendu, you wiU have sold
ils auront vendu, they wUl have sold
— 121 —
Simple Tenses.
Present.
je vendrais, / should sell
ill vendrais, thou wouldst sell
il vendrait, he would sell
nous vendrions, we should sell
vous vendriez, you would sell
ils vendraient, they would sell
Compound Tenses.
Conditional.
Past.
j'aurais vendu, I should Jmve sold
tu aurais vendu, thou wouldst have sold
il aurait vendu, he would have sold
nous aurions vendu, we should have sold
vous auriez vendu, you would have sold
ils auraient vendu, they would have sold
vends, sell (thou)
Imperative.
vendons, let us seU
vendez, sell (you)
Present.
que je vende, I may sell
que tu vendes, thou rnayest sell
qu'il vende, he may sell
que nous vendions, we may sell
que vous vendiez, you may sell
qu'ils vendent, they may sell
Preterit.
que je vendisse, I might sell
que tu vendisses, thou mightest sell
qu'il vendit, he might sell
Subjunctive.
Perfect.
que j'aie vendu, Imxiy have sold
que tu aies vendu, thou mayest have sold
qu'il ait vendu, he may have sold
que nous ayons vendu, we may have s.
que vous ayez vendu, you may have sold
qu'ils aient vendu, they may have sold
Pluperfect,
que j'eusse vendu, I might have sold
que tu eusses vendu, thou mightest have s.
qu'il eut vendu, he might have sold
que nous vendissions, we might sell que nous eussions vendu, we might etc.
que vous vendissiez, you might sell que vous eussiez vendu, you might etc.
qu'ils vendissent, they might sell qu'ils eussent vendu, they might have s.
Infinite
Pres. vendre, to sell
Per', avoir vendu, to have sold
Pres.
Past
vendant, selling
vendu, sold
Participle.
Perf.
ayant vendu, having sold
[I. 130. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144. 145. 146.
II. 3. 4. 7. 8. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.]
Notes to the Conjugations.
205. Verbs ending in the infinitive in cer, take ^ (with the cedilla)
instead of c before a and o; as: placer, to place, nous pla9ons, we place.
206. Verbs ending in the infinitive in ger, always take a silent e after
g' when followed by a or o; as: manger, to eat, nous mangeons, we eat.
207. Vert)S ending in the infinitive in eler or eter as : appeler, to call;
Jeter, to throw, double the 1 or t before a silent e, as: j'appelle, I call, but
nous appelons, we call,' je jette, I throw, but nous jetons, we throw. Only
three are excepted, namely; acheter, to buy, geler, to freeze, and peler, to peal
— 128 —
20a The three verbs, acheter, to buy, g^eler, to freete, and peler,
to pwl, and all those which hnve a nilent e or 6 in the second syllable from
the end, change e or 6 into ^ when the following syllable is silent; as:
acheter, to buy; j'ach^te, I buy; lever, toraiaty je l^ve; rep^ter, to rgjeat,
je repute.
209. Verbe ending in the infinitive in yer change the y into i before
a silent e; as: balayer, to stt^, je balale, I gwttp. Hark that these verbs
retain the i tifter y in the first and second persons plural of the imperfoct
indicative and pn»ent subjunctive: thus, from employer, to fnq^toy, we
y< fonn nous employions, vous employlez (Imperfect Indicative and Present
^' Subjunctive).
210. In a like manner, verbs ending in the infinitive in ier, are written
with double i in the first and second persons plural of the imperfect indica-
te tive, and of the present subjunctive; thos we say: prier, to beg; nous
priions, vk begged. [i. i47. 14S, 149. ISO, 151. 159. 155. iJ^]
Forms of Conjugation.
211. For the three forms of conjugating a verb in English, the Freneh
has but one, the simple form; thus,
je vends I aell lammBkig IdoaeU
nousvendons toe se0 1M ore siOlii^ tosdoMff
ilsvendent they sell ftcy are jaBfaig thgydoseU
je vondais / soid I waa aeOing IMseU
noiis vendions tcf sold we leere aeOing tcedid aeU
ilA vendaient they aold they were aMng they did aeU
212. A verb is conjugated negatively by placing the adverb ne before
it, and pa.s or point after it, or after the first auxiliaiy. In the present
infinitive ne >md ims are both placed before it In general, point implies
a strougtr negation than pas. Examples:
ne pas donner, not to give.
je ne donnc pas, I do not give je n*ai pas donn^ I have noi given
tu ne donues pas, thou dost iiot give tu n'l^s pas donn^ thou haat not given
ii ne donue pas, he does not give il n*a pas donn^ he has not given
nous ne dounous pas fite do not give nous n uvons pas donn^ toe have net g.
vous lie dounez pas, you do not give vous n*avez pas donn^ you have not g.
ils ne donnent pas, they do not give ils n'ont pas donne, they have notg.
213. The negatives pas and point maybe omitted after the verbs
cesser, to cea,se, OSer, to dare, poiivoir, to be able, and in the negative
conditional of savoir, je ne saiirais, when meaning, I cannot; thus,
il ne 06886 de 86 plaindre he does not cease complaining
je n*ose lui parler I dare not speak to him
je ne puis marcher I cannot waOc
vous ne sauriez le refuser you cannot refuse it
— 129 —
214. A verb is conjugated interrogatively by placing the pronoun after
it, or after the first auxiliary. In this form, a hyphen should always be
inserted before the pronoun; and if the verb or the first auxiliary ends in a
vowel, and the pronoun l3egins with another, for the sake of euphony, -t-
(with a hyphen before it and after it) is inserted. Examples:
punissais-je, did I punish ? ai-je puni, have I punished ?
punissais-tu, didsi thou punish ? as-tu puni, hast thou punished ?
punissait-il, did he punish ? a-t-il puni, has he punished ?
punissions-nous, did we punish ? avons-nous puni, have we punished ?
punissiez-vous, did you punish ? avez-vous puni, have you punished ?
punissaient-ils, did they punish ? ont-ils puni, have they punished ?
215. When a question is asked, with a noun or any of the following
pronouns, ceci, cela, aucun, quelqu'un, personne, or rien as
subject, the noun or pronoun belongs at the head of the sentence, and the
verb follows in the interrogative form, thus,
le diner est-il pret? is dinner ready ?
cela est-il bon a manger? is that good to eat ?
quelqu'un m'a-t-il demande ? did anybody ask for me ?
la compagnie est-elle arrivee ? has the company arrived ?
216. A verb ending in a mute e in the first person singular, takes an
acute accent when used interrogatively, thus,
je parle, I speak je ne respire pas, I do not breathe
parle-je, do I speak ? ne respire-je pas, do I not breathe?
217. When a verb used interrogatively has but one syllable in the first
person singular, the expression est-ce que should be employed instead of
the simple form of question; thus,
est-ce que je perds, do Hose ? est-ce que je dors, do I sleep ?
With some verbs, this rule appears to be disregarded; as ai-je, have I?
suis-je, am I? dis-je, do I say? sais-je, do I know? puis-je, can I?
218. A verb is conjugated interrogatively and negatively by placing the
adverb ne before it, and the pronoun with pas or point after it, or
after the first auxiliary, thus,
ne pleurai-je pas, did I not cry ? n'ai-je pas fini, have I not finished ?
ne pleuras-tu pas, didst thou not cry ? n'as-tu pas fini, hast thou not finished ?
ne pleura-t-il pas, did he not cry ? n'a-t-il pas fini, has he not finished ?
ne pleurames-nous pas, did we not cry ? n'avons-nous pas fini, have we not f ?
ne pleurates-vous pas, die? you not cry ? n'avez-vous pas fini, have you not f. ?
ne pleurerent-ils pas, did they not cry ? n'ont-ils pas fini, have they not f. ?
[I. 103, 104. til. U2, 113. 114, 115. 116, 1^1, 129,}
— 130 —
219.
PrttMt
je suis aim6, / am loved
tu 68 aim^, thou art loved
il est aiiii^, he is hved
elle est aim6e. she ia loved
nous sommes aim^, toe are loved
Toos dtes aim^, you are hved
ilssontaimto 1,j,^,^k,,^
The Passive Verb.
6tre aiiu<^, to be loved
Indicative.
fteis aim^ I was hved
tu^taisaim^ thouwasthved
il 4tait aim^ he was hved
nous ^ons aim^ we were hved
▼OQB ^ties aim^ you were hved
ibteientaim^ ihtywenhved
je tuB aim^ I was hved
tu fas aim^ thou wasi hved
il fat aim^. Aa was hved
noos f&mes aim^ we were hved
▼0118 f^tee aim^ you were hved
ils fiirent aim^ ihey were hved
Future,
je serai aim^ I shall be hved
ta seias aime, ihou wiU he hved
il sera aim^ he will be hved
nous serons aim^ toe shall be hved
yooB sereE aim^ you wiU be hved
ils seiont aim^ Ihey wiU be hved
Perfect
j'ai ^t^ aim^, / hair Wen loved
ta as ^ aim^ thou hast been hved
il a ^ aim^ he has been hved
elle a M aimte, she has been hved
nooB aroDB M aim^, we havebeenhved
yciOBtLweiKMMim^, you have been hved
ilsontMaimto K^ ^ ,_ ,
elleBantMaimtes, \'^'^^oeenl.
ynyniM M aim^ I had been hved
ta afais M aiM ihou hadsl been hved
U avait M tami, he had been hved
nooBnyUmmMtdBMiBfWehadbeenhved
▼oll8a▼ieE^aim&^ you had been hved
ihrnysMoaiMnuDiis, they had been hved
j*ei» M aim^ I had been hved
taeosMaim^ thou hadsl been hved
HwAM^m^hehadbeenhved
jiovBeAiDMMsiUDAB, we had been hved
V01I8 efttes ^ aim^ you Aod been iotwi
ils earent M aimds, they had been hved
j'aozai ^ aim^ I shall have been hved
taBxuMM/6tami,thouwiUhavebeenhved
ilaara^aim^ he wiU have been hved
noos aorons M aim^s, toe shaU have etc
▼oos aaree M aim^ youwOlhave etc.
ils auroni M tdmie, (hey wHl have etc
Conditional.
Ptti
je serais aim^ I should be laved j'aoiais ^t^ aim4 I should have been hved
tn serais aime. ihou wouldsi be hved ta aorais 4i6 aim^ ihou wouldst have etc
il serait aime, he uxnild be hved il anrait ete aim^ he would have etc
nous serions aime8,toe should be hved nous aorions ete aim^ we should ett
Tons seriez aimes, you loould be hved yons anriez ete aim^ you would etc.
ils seraient aimes, they would be hved ils nuraient isU aim^ they uxmld etc
Imperative.
sois aim^, he (thou) hved
Boyons aim^, Id us he loved
Boyez aiinfe, he (you) hved
131
Subjunctive. ^ ^ ^
Present Perfect
que je sois aime, I may be loved que j'aie ete aime, I may have heenloved
que tu sois aime, thou may est he loved que tu aies ete Q,im.e,thou mayest have etc.
qu'il soit aime, he may be loved qu'il ait ete aime, he may have etc.
que nous soyons aimes, we may be loved que nous ayons ete aimes, we may etc.
que vous soyez aimes, you may be loved que vous ayez ete aimes, you may etc.
qu'ils soient aimes, they may be loved qu'ils aient ete aimes, they may etc.
Pluperfect
que j'eusse ete aime, I might have been I.
que tu eusses ete aime, thou mightest etc.
qu'il eut ete aime, he might have been I.
que nous eussions ete aimes, ice might etc.
que vous eussiez ete aimes, i/ow might etc.
qu'ils eussent ete aimes, they might etc.
imperfect
que je fusse aime, I might be loved
que tu fusses aime, thou mightest be I.
qu'il fut aime, he might be loved
que nous fussions aimes, we might etc.
que vous fussiez aimes, you might etc.
qu'ils f ussent aimes, they might etc.
Pres. etre aime, to be loved
Pres. etant aime, being loved
Infinitive.
Pert
Participle.
Perf.
avoir ete aime, to have been loved
ayant ete aime, having been loved
[H. 87. 88.]
The Reflective Verb.
220. se lever, to rise
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses.
Indicative. „ , ^
Perfect
je me suis leve, 1 have risen
tu t'es leve, thou hast risen
il s'est leve, he has risen
nous nous sonimes leves, we have r.
vous vous etes leves, you have risen
ils se sont leves, they have risen
Pluperfect
je m'etais leve, I had risen
tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen
il s'etait leve, he had risen
nous nous etions leves, we had risen
vous vous etiez leves, you had risen
ils s'etaient leves, they had risen
Present
je me leve, I rise
tu te leves, thou risest
11 se leve, he rises
nous nous levons, we rise
vous vous levez, you rise
lis se levent, they rise
Imperfect
je me levais, I was rising
tu te levais, thou wast rising
11 se levait, he loas rising
nous nous levions, we were rising
vons vous leviez, you were rising
ils se levaient, they imre rising
Preterit,
je me levai, I rose
tu te levas, thou rosest
il se leva, he rose
nous nous levames, we rose
vous vous levates, you rose
ils se leverent, they rose
Preterit Anterior.
je me fus leve, I had risen
tu te fus leve, thou hadst risen
11 se fut leve, he had risen
nous nous fumes leves, we had risen
vous vous futes leves, you had risen
ils se furent leves, they had risen
— 182 —
Sdcflb Twnam, Compound Tscbib.
Indicative.
je me l^verai, / shcJl rise je me seiai lev^ I shall have rimn
tu te liveras, thou will rise tu te aena ler^ thou wiU have risen
il 86 l^vera, he will rise il se sera ler^ he ttiU have risen
nous nous leverooB, we shaU rise nous noosseroiiB leT^ we shall have etc
▼ous voos levereK, you wiU rise yooh toos aerez lev^ you will have etc
ilfl se l^veront, they wiU rise ils ae aeront \er4m, thsy will have etc
CondttionaL ^^
Pnem/i. Pitt
je me l^eraia, / shovid riss y me aeroia leT^ IshoMhave risen
ixL te l^YenM, thoti wouldsl rise in teaemiHleY^ thou wouldsl have risen
il ae l^erait, Ae wtndd rise il ae aerait lev^ he would have risen
uooa nous l^veriona, tee shoM riss nooa noaa aeriona ler^ toe ^uwld etc
voua Totts l^veriez, you would rise votia Toua aeries lev^ you would etc
ila ae l^emient, they would riss ila ae aeraieni lev6^ thsy would etc
Imperative,
l^ve-toi, rise (thou) leYous-nooa, let us rise leres-Tona, rise (you)
Subjunctive.
Present Perfect
que je me 16ve» / may rise que je me sola levt% /f»'/// have risen
que tu te l^vee, thou mayest rise quetuteaoialev^ thou mnytst havt risen
qu'il ae l&ve, he may rise qa*il ae aoit leT^, he may have risen
que nous noua leTions, tea tnay riss que nodia nooa aoyons K■vl3^ we may etc.
que Yona voua levies, you may rise que Toua Toua aoTes ler^ you may etc.
quails ae l^Tent» thsy majf rise qvCUs ae aoient leWa, thsy may have risen
que je me levaaae, / might rise que je me fnaae ler^ J might have risen
que tu te levaaaea, Ihou mighUst rise que tu te ftaaaea ler^ thou mighiest etc
qu*il ae levat. he migJU rise qu'il ae fftt ler^ he mSghi have risen
que nous noua leTaaaiona, we might r. que noaanoiiafiiaBioiialeT^ wemight etr,
que vous voua levaaaiez, you might r. que YousTouafnaalez ler^^ youmighi etc.
qu*il8 ae levaaaent, they might rise qu'ils ae fussent lev&, they might etc
Infinitive.
Prat, ae lever, to rise Perf. s'etre lev^ to have risen
Participle.
Prv- se levant, rising Perf. s'^tant lev^ having risen
Past leve, risen p^ ,7^ ^7^, ^^3 i7^,j
221. All reflective verbs take as their object a reflective pronoun of the
same person and number \*ith their subject, and ^tre as their auxiliary.
In the first and second persons, singular and phiral, the reflective pronoun
is the same with the conjunctive personal; in the third person, there is a
special reflective pronoim se ; it has the value of both dative and accusative
of either number and gender.
— 133 —
222. Instead of the passive voice, which is less frequentty used in
French than in English, a reflective phrase is usually substituted in such
sentences as the following:
ce mot ne s'ecrit pas ainsi this word is not written thus
ce cheval ne se vend pas this horse is not for sale
cela se voit tous les jours that is seen every day
223. A reflective verb is often used in a reciprocal sense, but in the
plural only. In this case, the reflective pronoun answers to the English one
another, each other.
224. A large number of French reflective verbs correspond to English
intransitives, and require, therefore, special attention. Such are:
s'abstenir, to abstain s'evaporer, to evaporate
s'accorder, to agree se fier, to trust
s'amuser, to be amused se figurer, to fancy
s'apercevoir, to perceive se fondre, to melt
s'appeler, to be called se hater, to make haste
s'asseoir, to sit down s'imaginer, to imagine
se baigner, to bathe se lever, to rise
se coucher, to go to bed se moquer, to make fun
se defier, to distrust se plaindre, to complain
se depecher, to make haste se porter, to be (of health)
s'echapper, to escape se promener, to take a icalk
s'ecrier, to cry out se rejouir, to rejoice
s'emparer, to seize upon se repentir, to repent
s'empresser, to hasten se reposer, to rest
s'en aller, to go away se reveiller, to aioake
s'endormir, to fall asleep se rire de, to laugh at
s*enfuir, to run away se soumettre, to submit
s*enrichir, to grow rich se souvenir, to remember
s*entretenir, to talk se taire, to be silent
s'etonner, to wonder se tromper, to be mistaken
s'evanouir, to faint se vanter, to boast
Impersonal Verbs.
225. Some verbs, which, in virtue of their meaning, can be used only in
the third person singular, with the indefinite subject il, it, have been called
Impersonal Verbs. Such are:
11 neige, it snows il gresille, it sleets il pleut, it rains
il gele, it freezes il eclaire, it lightens il degele, it thaws
11 grele, it hails il tonne, it thunders 11 faut, it is necessary
[II. 80.]
226. The impersonal verb il faut corresponds to the English must,
to be obliged to, to have to, and the like. It is followed by an infinitive, or by
que mth a verb in the subjunctive; thus,
il faut instruire les enfants children must be instructed
il faudra que votre frere lui ecrive your brother shall have to write to him.
— 134 —
227. Whf^n il fant mennfl to he in need of, to tt<tnt, it takes the stibjeet
of the English senteiioe in the dative, and the tiling wanted in the nomina-
tive, thtis,
il fiiut un cliapeau k votre fi^re yotir brother tcanis a hat
il lui falliiit de Torgent he i«m in tciDii of money [U. 61. 6V.J
228. There are many verbs in French, transitive as well as intransitive,
which are also used impersonally, as:
il importe, it matters il parait, it itppeara
il sufflt, a IB sufficieni il semble, it teems
il s'agit, the question is U arrive, i^ happens
il couvient» it becomes il vaut mMoz, it is better
229. Impezsonal plu»aeB formed with the verbs BTolr. Mro and
faire, are very fireqaent, and deMrve special notioe.
230. il y a corresponds closely to the Eofi^ish there i.v. therr <n: md
is nsed i nearly the same manner. Very often, it refers in a parUcuhir l.-rm
to time and pkce. Examples:
il y a une voitore k la porta ihsre is a oaniage at the door
il y a d^jk des cerises there are cherries abreadff
oombien y a4-il d'ici k Albaigr? how far is ii from here to Albany T
combien y a-t-il que Totn Mrs how long has your brother been dead T
est mort ? il y a qQimoe joozs Uisa fortnight
[I. 51. 59, n. 89. 90.]
231. The impersonal verb it is, it was, Ac, is expressed in French by
it esty i! ^taity Ac, when followed by an adjective without reference to
anything mentioned before, and in all denominations of time. But when
followed by a nonn, a pronoun, a verb in the infinitive, or a single adjective
(which th**" nlvtov" T'f-^y^ ♦'^ ^r.T»,« ]ireceding obi.rti it i^ rendered by c'est.
Examples
il est six heurcs. 1 1 est toinps do ])anir it is six «' niHK, U is time to set out
il est possible que j'aie eu tort it may be tftnt /t/vw wromg
ce fdt une grande joie pour nous if was a great joy for us
o'est xm malheur, c*est agr&ble it is a misfortune^ it is agreeabte.
232. Before a noun in the plural, and the pronoun eux, elles, we
shoiild alT^-ays employ oe sont instead of c'est; thus,
ce sont vos frere« qui out raison t7 ifi your brothers who are rigid
ce sont eux qui Tout vu it is they who hat^ seen him
[H. 91. 99.]
233. The impersonal expression il fait (lit it makes) is commonly used
to describe the operations of nature and the state of the weather; thus,
il fait beau temps anjourd*hui U is fine weather to^ay
il faisait mauvais temps hier U was had weather yesterday
il fait froid, il fait dii vent it is cold, it is wii^dy
il fait jour, il fait nuit U is daylight, U is night \u. 9S. 94.\
— 135 —
234. Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation.
Infinitive, aller, to go Pres. je vais, I go
Pres. Part, allant, going Pret. j'allai, Iwerd
Past Part. aWe, gone F"*- yimi, I shall go [11.63,64,]*
Infinitive. enY oyer, to send Pres. j'envoie, J send
Pres. Part, envoyant, sending Pret. j'envoyai, I sent
Past Part, envoye, sen^ Put- ^ euNQxmi, I shall send
235.
Infinitive, acquerir, to acquire
Pres. Part, acquerant, acquiring
Past Part, acquis, acquired
Infinitive. bouillir, to boil
Pres. Part, bouillant, hailing
Past Part, bouilli, boiled
Infinitive. courir, to run
Pres. Part, courant, running
Past Part, couru, run
Infinitive. convrir, to cover
Pres. Part, coiivrant, covering
Past Part, couvert, covered
infinitive. cueillir, to gather
Pres. Part, ciieillant, gathering
Past Part, cueilli, gathered
Infinitive. dormir, to sleep
Pres. Part, dormant, sleeping
Past Part, dormi, slept
Infinitive. fuir, to flee
Pres. Part, fuyant, fleeing
Past Part, fui, fled
Infinitive. hair, to hate
Pres. Part, haissant, hating
Past Part, hai, hated
Infinitive. mentir, to lie
Pres. Part mentant," lying
Past Part, menti, lied
Infinitive. mourir, to die
Pres. Part, mourant, dying
Past Part, mort, died
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation.
Pres. j'acquiers, I acquire
Pret. j 'acquis, I acquired
Fut. ysLcqueviSii, I shall acquire [ii. 69.]
Pres. je bous, I boil
Pret. je bouillis, / boiled
[II. 72. 73.]
Pres. je cours, I run
Pret. je courus, Iran
Fut. je courrai, I shall run [11.65,66.]
Pres. je couvre, I cover
Pret. je couvris, I covered
[U. 47, 48.]
Pres. je cueille, I gather
Pret. je cueillis, I gathered
Fut. je cneillerai,i"5/ia?^ gather [H. 69,]
Pres. je cueille, I gather
Pret. je cueillis, I gathered
Fut. je cueillerai,/5/ia7' "■
Pres. je dors, I sleep
Pret. je dormis, I slept
pi. 43, 44.]
Pres. je fuis, I flee
Pret. je fuis, I fled
[II. 67. 68.]
Pres. je hais, I hate
Pret. je hais, I hated
[II. 67. 68.]
Pres. je mens, Hie
Pret. je mentis, I lied
[II. 45. 46.]
Pres. je meurs, Tarn dying
Pret. je mourus, I died
Fut. je mourrai, I shall die [H. 65. 66^
* For the full paradigms see the Exercises here referred to,
136 —
offirir, ioi^tr
Pret. Pari offraut, offering
Pist Pari offert, offered
Infinitive, onvrir, to opm
Pret. Part ouvrant, opening
Past Pari onTert, opened
laMttvt. partir, to go away
Prta. Part partant, going away
Pait Part, parti, gone away
Infinitive, so repentir, to repent
Pres. Part. 86 repentant, repejdiii>j
Paet Pari repenti, repented
InflnHive. sentir, to fee^ rnndl
Pres. Pari sentant, feeiing
Pait Pari scnti,/^
Infinitive, serrir, to serve
Pret. Pari servant, serving
Pa§t Pari servi, served
Infinittve. sortir, to go out
Pre«. Pari Rortant, going out
Patt Pari Borti, gone out
Inrintttve. RonflHr, to siffer
Pres. Pari sonffrant, altering
Past Pari sonfRert, suffered
Infinitive, tenir, to hM
Pres. Pari tenant, holding
Past Pari tenu, held
Inrinitive. venir, to come
Pres. Pari venant, coming
Past Part, venii, come
Infinitive. vetir, to dothe
Pres. Part, vetant, clothing
Past Part, vetu, doihed
(a. 47. 48.]
fn. ^7. 4S.]
Prea. foifre, Iqffir
Prei j'offris, /offered
Praa. j'ouvre, I open
Prei j*ou>Tia, I opened
Prat, jc pttra, J go away
Prat je partis, / tcent away
(n. 4:i. -iS.]
Prei, jo me repens, I repent
Prei je me repentia, / rtpenietl
[TI 41 4/11
Praa. je sens, I feel
Prtt je aentia, JfeU
(D. ■I,';. 4C]
[a. 99, 40.]
[n. 41, 49,]
fn. 17. 4H.]
. jeaen, /«
Prtt jeaania, I served
Praa. je aora, J go out
Prtt je sortia, / went out
Praa. je aonflire, I suffer
Prtt jaaofoifria, I suffered
Prta. je tiena, /AoU
Prtt je tins, / held
Put je tiendrai, 7 aW7 ^oU
(n. .?7. ««.l
Prta. je viens, J come
Prei je vins, / came
Fui je viendrai, I shall come
[IL 55. 36,]
Pret. je vets, 7 clothe
Prtt je vetis, 7 clothed
236.
Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.
Infinitive. aperoevoir, io perceive
Pres. Part, apercevant, perceiving
Past Part. aper9n, perceived
Pres. j'ftp€r9ois, I perceive
Prei j'apeitjus, I perceived
Fui j'apercevrai, I ahaU perceive
— 137 —
Infinitive, s'asseoir, to sit down
Pres. Part, s'asseyant, sitting down
Past Part, assis, sat down
Infinitive, concevoir, to conceive
Pres. Part, concevant, conceiving
Past Part. con9U, conceived
Infinitive, decevoir, to deceive
Pres. Part, decevant, deceiving
Past Part. de9u, deceived
Infinitive. devoir, to owe
Pres. Part, devant, owing
Past Part, du, owed
Infinitive, falloir, to he necessary
Pres. Part.
Past Part, fallu, heen necessary
Infinitive. mouvoir, to move
Pres. Part, mouvant, moving
Past Part, mu, moved
Infinitive, pleuvoir, to rain
Pres. Part, pleuvant, raining
Past Part, plu, rained
Infinitive, pouvoir, to he ahle
Pres. Part, pouvant, heing ahle
Past Part, pu, heen ahle
Infinitive, recevoir, to receive
Pres. Part, recevant, receiving
Past Part. re9u, received
Infinitive. savoir, to know
Pres. Part, sachant, knowing
Past Part, su, known
Infinitive, valoir, to he worth
Pres. Part, valant, heing worth
Past Part, valu, heen worth
Infinitive, voir, to see
Pres. Part, voyant, seeing
Past Part, vu, seen
Pres. je m'assieds, I sit down
Pret. ]e m'&ssis, I sat down
Fut. je m'asseyerai, I shall sit down
[n. 83. 84. 8S. 86.]
Pres. je conQois, / conceive
Pret. je con9Us, I conceived
Fut. je concevrai, I shall conceive
[H. 81, 8^.]
Pres. je de9ois, I deceive
Pret. je de9us, I deceived
je decevrai, I shall deceive
[H. 81. 82.]
je dois, I owe
Pret. je dus, I owed
Fut. je devrai, I shall owe [n. 39. 60.]
Pres. il faut, il is necessary
Pret. il fallut, it was necessary
Fut. il faudra, it will be necessary
[n, 61. 62.]
Pres. je meus, I move
Pret. je mus, / moved
Fut. je mouvrai, I slwdl move
Fut.
Pres.
Pres. il plent, it rains
Pret. il pint, it rained
Fut. il pleuvra, it will rain
[H. 80.]
Pres.
Pret.
Fut.
je peux, je puis, I can
je pus, I was ahle
je pourrai, I shall he ahle
[H. 49.
50.1
Pres.
Pret.
Fut.
je re9ois, I receive
je re9us, I received
je recevrai, I shall receive
[H. 81.
82.]
Pres.
je sais, I know
Pret.
je sus, I knew
Fut.
je saurai, I shall know [H. 51,
.52.]
Pres. je vaux, lam worth
Pret. je valus, I was worth
Fut. je vaudrai, I shall he worth
pi. 53. 54.]
Pres. je vois, I see
Pret. je vis, I saw
Fut. je verrai, I shaU see pl. 55. 56.]
— 138 —
Infinitive, vouloir, to he \Jo(Bing
pr«s. Part voolant, being wilUng
Pift Ptrt Toulu, been uiUling
237. Irregular Verbs of
Infiniliv*. atteiodre, to reach
Pr«i. Pirt. atteignant, reaching
PMt Part atteint, reacKed
InMthrt. battre, to heed
PrM. Part battant, beating
Pm\ Part batta, beaUn
Inflnilive. boire, to dHmk
Pet. Part bnvani, drimidng
Past Part bu, drunk
Infinitive, condaire, to oondud
Pres. Part condiiiaant, eonducUng
Past Part oonduit, eondueUd
Infinitive, oonnaltre, to know
Pres. Part connaiasant, knowing
Past Part oonnu, known
Infinitive, ooudre, to aew
Pres. Part oouaant* tewing
Past Part couflo, eewed
Infinitive, oraindre, to fear
Pres. Part oraignant, fearing
Past Part craini» feared
Infinitive, oroire, to heReve
Pres. Part croyant, betieving
Past Part cm, believed
Infinitive, croitre, to grow
Pres. Part croissant, growing
Past Part cru, grown
Infinitive. cuire, to cook
Pres. Part cnisant, cooking
Past Part ctiit, cooked
Infinitive. dire, to say
Pres. Part disant, saying
Past Part dit, said
Infinitive. ecrire, to lortie
Pres. Part ecrivant, turiiing
Past Part ^rit, wriUen
Pret. je Teas, lam wiUing
Pret je Toulaa, / was wiUing
Fut je voadrai, / shaU be wUHMg
[n. 57. S8,]
the Fourth Conjugation.
Pret. j'tttteiuH, I reach
Pret j'atteigiiiB, Ireaohed
(IL 70. 71.]
Pree. je bats, I beat
Pret jdbattiB, Ibeai
Pret. jebois, I drink
Pret iebCM, I drank
[IL3X84.\
Pree. Jo condnis, / oondud
Pret je oopdiiieii, / oondueled
Pree. je coimaia, Iknow
fret je oonnns, I knew
Pree. je ooads, Jeeto
Pret je consis. J sewed
Pret. je crains, I fear
Pret je craignis, I feared
Pree. je crois, Ibeiieve
Pret je cros, IbeHeved
Pret. je crois, I grow
Pret je crfta, I grew
Pres. je cnis, J cook
Pret je cuisis, / cooked
Pres. je dis, I say
Pret je dis, I eaid
Pres. j*ecris, Iwriie
Pret j'ecrivis, I wrote
[ILSP.ML1
[n. 75. 7«.l
[n. 70. 71.]
pL 31. 5;?.)
pi. 77.1
[H. 7J9. 73.)
[H. 17. l«.l
PL 19. »0.]
139 —
Infinitive, faire, to do Pres.
Pres. Part, faisant, doing Pret.
Past Part, fait, done Fut.
Infinitive, lire, to read Pres.
Pres. Part, lisant, reading Pret.
Past Part, lu, read
Infinitive, mettre, to put Pres.
Pres. Part, mettant, putting Pret.
Past Part, mis, put
Infinitive, naitre, to be born Pres.
Pres. Part, naissant, being born Pret.
Past Part, ne, born
Infinitive, paraitre, to appear Pres.
Pres. Part, paraissant, appearing Ppef.
Past Part, paru, appeared
Infinitive. plaindre, to pity Pres.
Pres. Part, plaignant, pitying Pret.
Past Part, plaint, pitied
Infinitive, plaire, to please Pres.
Pres. Part, plaisant, pleasing Pret.
Past Part, plu, pleased
Infinitive. prendre, io take Pres.
Pres. Part, prenant, talcing Pret.
Past Part, pris, taken
Infinitive. rire, to laugh Pres.
Pres. Part, riant, laughing Pret.
Past Part, ri, laughed
Infinitive, suivre, to follow Pres.
Pres. Part, siiivant, following Pret.
Past Part, suivi, followed
Infinitive, se taire, to he silent Pres.
Pres. Part, se taisant, being silent Pret.
Past Part, tu, been silent
Infinitive, vaincre, to vanquish Pres.
Pres. Part, vainquant, vanquishing Pret.
Past Part, vaincu, vanquished
Infinitive, vlvre, to live Pres.
Pres. Part, vivant, living Pret.
Past Part, vecu, lived
je fais, I do
je fis, / did
je ferai, I shall do [H. 27. 28.]
je lis, I read
je lus, / read
[II. 21. 22.]
je mets, I put
ie mis, I put
je nais, I am born
je naquis, / was born
je parais, I appear
je parus, I appeared
je plains, I pity
je plaignis, I pitied
je plais, I please
je plus, I pleased
je prends, 1 take
je pris, I took
je ris, I laugh
je ris, Ilaugi
[II. 23. 24.]
[II. 77.]
[H. 74.]
[H. 70. 71.]
[II. 78, 79.]
[H. 25. 26.]
[H. 72. 73.]
[II. 75. 76.]
je suis, I follow
je suivis, I followed
je me tais, lam silent
je me tus, I was silent
[II. 78. 79.]
je vaincs, I vanquish
je vainquis, I vanquished
{JI. 70. 71,]
je vis, I live
je vecus, Hived
[H, 74.]
-^ 140 —
Agreement of the Verb.
238. In general, the verb is of the same person and nmnber as its
subject; thiitt,
mon pte est mort my father ii dead
mes fi!^re8 sont morta my brtMhen art dead
nous aimons nos amis toe love our friauls.
239. When a verb has two or more subjeots connected by et, it most
agree with them in the ploral number, thus,
le papier et I'encre ne valent rien the paper and ink art good far nothing
moQ p^ et ma mhte Tiendront my father and mother wiU come,
240. When the imbjects of the same Torb aw of diffeient persons, tba
verb must be in the plural number, and most agree with the first person
rather than the second, and with the seoon^ rather than the third. The verb,
then, is preceded by nous, if it be in the first person, r? -I »>v vouh, if in
the second. Thus we say:
mon ttkn et moi, nous aUons It la my brother and I gn lo \ue jnay
oomWe
Toos et votre sosor, V0118 restens you and yomr Mater w4U etay at home,
klAmaiaon
241. When a veib has two or mora sabjeols oonneoted by on, it must
agree with that which is nearest Wbenthesobjectsarsofdifierent persons,
the verb agrees with the first person in pr eference to the second, and with
the second in preference to the third, but always in the plural number; au:
le vice ou la vertn tEiomphera vice or virtue wiU triumph
vous ou votre ttkte viendrez you or your brother vciU come,
242. When a verb has for its subject the relative qui» it agrees with
the antecedent of the relative, thus,
c'est moi qui Tai vu it is I who hone seen Mm
c*est vous qui en avez parl^ Hie you who have spoken of U
oe sont eux qui Tout pris U is they who have taken it
Government of Verbs.
243. All transitive verbs govern the accusative case. The characteristic
of these verbs is, that they are convertible into passives in the following
manner. The accusative after the verb in the active voice becomes the nom-
inative before the verb in the passive voice. The nominative before the verb
in the active voice is joined to the passive by the preposition de or
par, by.
Some verbs which in English are regarded as transitive, take in French
the genitive or the dative case; thus we say: we obey the Inics, nous
obeissons aux lois. And again, some verbs which are in English in-
transitive, are in French transitive, as, le chien cherche son maitre, the dog
looks for his master .
— 141 --
244. Some transitive verbs govern a genitive in addition to their direct
object, the accusative. Such are:
absoudre, to absolve combler, to Jill up emplir, to fill
accuser, to accuse delivrer, to free informer, to inform
avertir, to warn detourner, to divert priver, to deprive
accuser un bomme de vol, to accuse a man of theft
emplir une bouteille de vin, to fill a bottle with wine
delivrer le pays des tyrans, to free the country from the tyrants
245. A large number of transitive verbs govern, together with the ac-
cusative, a dative as modal complement of their action. Mark the following:
accorder, to grant demander, to ask for preferer, to prefer
adresser, to direct devoir, to owe presenter, to present
annoncer, to announce dire, to tell preter, to lend
apporter, to bring donner, to give procurer, to procure
attribuer, to attribute ecrire, to write promettre, to promise
avouer, to own [icate enseigner, to teach raconter, to tell, relate
communiquer, to commun- envoyer, to send rapporter, to bring back
confesser, to confess epargner, to spare refuser, to refuse
confier, to trust expliquer, to explain rendre, to give back
conseiller, to advise oter, to take away renvoyer, to send back
declarer, to declare pardonner, to forgive repondre, to answer
dedier, to dedicate predire, to foretell vendre, to sell
accordez-lui cette grace grant him this favor
il nous raconta ses voyages he told us his voyages.
246. Some verbs take a genitive only, after the manner of a direct ob-
ject, as:
abuser, to abuse heriter, to inherit medire, to slander
convenir, to admit jouir, to enjoy profiter, to improve
douter, to doubt manquer, to want user, to use
jouir d'une bonne sante to enjoy good health
medire de son prochain to slandei' one's neighbor
247. A large number of reflective verbs admit a genitive in addition to
their reflective object. Examples of these are:
^"ob^eniex, to absent one' ss. s'ennuyer, to get weary se rejouir, to rejoice
s'abstenir, to abstain s'enorgueillir, to get proud se repentir, to repent
s'apercevoir, to perceive s'entremettre, to intervene se retirer, to withdraw
s'attrister, to grieve se ^cher, to be angry se saisir, to seize
s'aviser, to bethink one* ss. se flatter, to flatter one's s. se soucier, to care
se demettre, to resign se garder, to beware se souvenir, to remember
se desister, to give over se plaindre, to complain se vanter, to boast
se saisir de quelque chose to seize upon something
se souvenir d'une histoire to remember a history.
— 142 —
248. Tho following yeibs take a dative as their sole object:
nuire, to hwi
obUr, to obey
obvier, to olwicUe
parler, to speak
parrenir, to aUain
penaer, to think qf
plaire, topLease
aco^er, to acotde
appartenir» to belong
oon^mtir, to ootiserU
contreveuir, to contravene
contribuer, to contribute
deplaire, to displease
d^beir, to disobey
ne d^b^iaaes pas Ik voa iMirontH
je pense k votte aflkire
249. There are also many n ilv< t : .
tion to their reflectiye object Such .u<
s'abandonner, to abandon one*s se^
s*aoooatiimer, to aeeutiom on€*s sejf
s'adonner, to addict one's s^
B'amtiser, to amuse one's se^
s*appUqaer, to apply one's stff
B*appreter, to gd ready
s'attaoher, to stick to
s'adrener, to tipply onufs setf
se d^tetminer, to resolve iipon
se disposer, to prepare one's self
accoutumez-vous k lYlnde
je m'appliqae aux
remwlier, to remedy
r^iwUT, to resist
ressembler, to resemble
Bonger, to thifJc of
fiubveiiir, to nlieve
Buccctler, to succeed
snrvivre, to survive
lo not disobey your parents
I hiiJc of your business.
I ' ^ which admit a dative in addi*
ques
sengager, to engage
8*expo8er, to eipose one's $etf
se fier, to trust
8*habituer, to aeeustom oik's se^
s'obstiner, to 6e obstinate
s'oocnper, to occupy onfs mSjf
8*opiniiltrer, to be opiniative
B'appoeeat, to oppose one's se{f
86 plaire» to toJtce delight in
se preparer, to prepare one's self
aeeustom yourself to study
lapfiy myseff to mathematies
250. Notice that no French verb gorenis two noons, the one denoting
a (>erson and the other a thing, each in the aoouaatiTe, as is the case with
the £ugli8h verbs signifying to altoie, ask, give, qfer, pray, send, teach,
tell, etc. Such verbs take in French the pexsonal object in the dative, thns,
il lui euseignera cette langne he ioiU teach him tlus language
il lui a demand^ son nom Ae asked him for his name.
Uses of the Moods and Tenses.
Indicative.
251. The value and use of the tenses iu the indicative mood are, in
general, the same in French as in English. The principal points of differ-
ence will be stated below.
252. The Present is often substitnted for the Preterit in lively narra-
tion, as:
j'ai vu votre malheureux fils trains I have seen your unhappy son dragged
par ses chevaux, il veut les by his horses; he wishes to recall
rappeler et sa voix les effraye, them, his voice frightens them,
ils courent they run, etc.
— 143 —
253i In expressing a past action or state which is continued so as to
be present also, the French employs the Present, while in English the
tense must be the Perfect, thus,
depuis quand ^tes-vous ici? how long have you been here ?
je SUis ici depuis longtemps IJiave been here a long time,
254. The Present is often used instead of the Future, thus,
je pars ce soir pour Londres Isliall depart to-night for Lcyndon
je suis pret dans un moment I shall be ready in a moment
255. The Imperfect answers nearly to the progressive form of the Eng-
lish Preterit, and represents the action as unfinished at a certain specified
time. Very often, it implies a habit on the part of the subject, in the sense
of the phrase I used to do. Examples:
je vous ecrivais une lettre, quand je I was writing you a letter ^ when Ire-
re9us la votre ceived yours
j'etais malade, quand vous etes venu I was sick when you came
quand j'etais enfant, je jouais souvent when I was a child, I often played.
256. The Preterit represents an action which took place at some time
completely past, as,
je me promenai hier I walked yesterday
je fus malade la semaine passee I was sick last week
j'allai hier voir votre pere I went yesterday to see your father.
257i The Perfect represents an action as having been finished in some
time past reckoning from the present; thus,
je me suis promene ce matin I have taken a walk this morning
j'ai ete bien malade cette semaine I have been very sick this week
notre siecle a produit de grands our age has produced great men.
hommes
258i The Pluperfect represents the action as past before some other
past time, as: j 'avals ecrit ma lettre, quand il entra, I had written my letter
when she came in. K a particular time be mentioned, especially after the
words quand^ lorsque, ichen, aussitdt que, des que, as soon as,
apres que, after, and the like, the tense must be the Preterit Anterior; thus,
je sortis des que j'eus dine I went out as soon as I had dined
quand j'eus fini ma lettre, il entra when I had finished my letter, he entered.
259. The Future tenses ordinarily agree with their English correspon-
dents. In such cases, however, where in English the Present may be used
instead of the Future, and the Perfect instead of the Second Future, the
Future tenses are more strictly required in French than in English, thus,
quand je serai a la campagne, vou- when I aiu in the country, loill you
lez-vous venir me voir ? come to see me ?
vousjouerez, quand vous aurez fini you will play when you have fitl^
votre le9on ished your lesson.
— 144 —
260. The verb venir followed by de with an InfinitiTe, forms an idio-
matio expreiHhiou of paai time, and repreBents an action as just finished,
thns, je Tiens da faire cela, I have Just done ViaL
261. The verb allcr with an infinitiTe after it, is an idiomatic form
for expressing future time in the sense of to 6e about; thus, mon fr^ va
partir, my brciher is about to dqpwt
262* The Conditional Mood is used to expveBB a result dependent upon
certain conditions. It corresponds in general to the Potential Mood in Eng-
lish, when used with the auxiliary ahoxtid^ or tcouid, thus,
si vous avieE des amis, toqs series if you had friends, you wmid be more
plus content saU^fied
▼008 anries M plus henreaz, si Tons you wmki have been more happy, if you
avieE soiTi mee oonseils had followed my advice,
263* There is something particular in the use of the conjunction si.
When it means in ease thai, it requires the verb in the present or the imper-
fect; when it stands for xphdher, it takes the ftitnre or the conditional, accord-
ing to the requirements of the sense; thus,
j'ind demain ^ la campagne, s*il fait / nAoA^oto-fnorroto^iUpt^ootmfry, if
bean temps iheweatherfBiUbefine
s*il reTenait, toos series fort embar- if he eame bade, you toould be much
rasB^ embarrassed
dites-moi si TOOS ires li? UO me vhslhier you wiU go there t
je ne sais si mon frkre riendrait, si Idonoi know whether my brother would
je Veil priais come, should I request him.
264. The use of the ImperatiTe requires no explanation, being the same
in French as in English. (IL S. 6, 7, 8.]
Subjunctive.
265. The Subjunctive Mood denotes something doubtful or contingent,
and its tenses are generally subjoined to other verbs.
266. The Subjunctive Mood is employed:
1. when the governing verb expresses doubt, uncertainiyy fear desire,
command, joy, sorrow, Ac. Such verbs are:
commander, to command douter, to doubt etre cbarme, to be very glad
craindre, to fear s'etonner, to wonder etre ffiche, to be sorry
defendre, to forbid nier, to deny etre surpris, to be surprised
desirer, to wish ordonner, to order etre content, to be satisfied
Examples:
je doute qu'il soit arrive I doubt that he has come
je souhaite qu'on fasse la palx / wish ihey tcould make peace
je crains que ma soeur ne soit morte I fear my sister is dead
je suis facie qu*on vous ait tromp^ I am sorry they Jiave deceived you
— 145 —
2. when the governing verb is used interrogatively, negatively, or condi-
tionally; thus,
croyez-vous qu'il ait raison ? do you believe he is right ?
je ne crois pas qu'il ait raison I do not believe he is right
partons, si vous pensez qu'il fasse let us go, if you think it wiU be fine
beau temps weather.
When the verb is used affirmatively, or when the question con-
tains a fact, the Indicative Mood is required, thus,
je crois qu'il a raison I Relieve he is right
j'espere qu'il viendra I hope he will come
vous ai-je dit que mon pere est mort? did I tell you that my father is dead f
3. after most impersonal verbs and expressions, as:
il convient que vous y alliez it is proper for you to go there
il est temps que nous partions it is time for us to depart
il faut que j'aille en ville I must go to town.
Excepted from this rule are: il s'ensuit, il resulte, it follows; il ar-
rive, it happens, and such impersonal expressions as contain a posi-
tive statement, as: il est vrai, it is true; il est certain, it is certain, etc.
Again, the same expressions require the subjunctive in the sub-
ordinate sentence when they are used interrogativel/y, negatively, or
conditionally; thus,
il est certain que vous avez tort it is certain that you are wrong
il n'est pas certain que j'aie raison it is not certain that lam right
il est probable qu'on fera la paix it is probable that they will make peace
est-il probable qu'on fasse la paix ? is it probable that they will make peace ?
4. after a superlative, and the words le premier, the first, le
dernier, the last, le seul or I'unique, the only; personiie,
nobody, aucun, none, rien, nothing, where the subordinate sen-
tence is introduced by the relative pronoun qui or que. In these
constructions, the indicative is also met with, when the subordinate
sentence defines a fact, and not a mere supposition. Examples:
vous etes le plus savant que je con- you are the most learned man 1 know
naisse dans cette ville in this town
vous etes le x^remier ami que j'aie you are the first friend I have met in
rencontre a New York New York
mon fils est le seul a qui je puisse my son is the only one upon whom lean
me fier rely
il n'y avait personne que je connusse there was nobody whom I knew.
5. after the words quelque que, quel que, qui que, quoi
que, (see 167—170.)
quoi que vous fassiez pour moi, je whateoer you do for me, I will reward
vous en recompenserai ycm for it.
— 146 —
6. after the conjunctioiis whioh exprens a fntore contingency or a snp-
poeition, as: pourvu que, provided; au can qiiey in case^ etc
For the luit of them bee under Conjunctions 302.
je Homi prC't, avant qnlls soient venus / wiU be ready brfore iKey have come
pretez-moi votre livre, aftn que je le liae fend me yowr book thai I may read it
267. In regard to the distinction of tenses, a sqbjonctive verb is put in
the present or perfect, when the goYeming verb was in the present or future;
and in the preti^rit or pluperfect after a verb in the past or conditional ten-
ses. Sometimes a subjunctive imperfect &b met with after a governing verb
in the present, especially in conditional expressions whioh imply both doubt
and futurity. Examples:
il fiuit (faudra) que je le fiiase / am (shall be) obliged to do U
jenecroLBposquilaitapprissale^oii I do noi betteve he has leami his ieiwn
je craignais que vous ue >'ina8i6S I feared iul you wriUd eome
il faudrait quo je le flsse / shoM be obHged todoU
je ne croyais pas qu'il e&t appris sa le9on J did not beUem he had hand hie lesmm
oroyes-vous qu'ils ma nftuMWut, si do yo^ think they woM r^fuM me if I
jelesenpriais? requeskd it cf them ?
(IL 9, 10. It. 19. 13, 14.]
268. The Infinitive is not limited to any particular person or number,
and is properly the verbal noun. As snob it may stand for a subject, predi-
cate, or object (direct as well as indirect) of a sentence. There are, how-
ever, only a few infinitives which have become nonns, and may be used
with the article, as: le rire, laughing; le manger, eating; le boire, drinking,
269. In French, the infinitive is employed by itself^ or preceded by
dCy ^9 or some other preixjsition.
270. The infinitive is used without any preposition in the following cases :
1. when it stands for the subject, or predicate of a sentence; thns,
chanter est nne occupation agreable singing is an agreeable occupation
voir c*e8t croire seeing is believing.
2. when it stands as the direct object of the following verbs:
aller, to go envoyer, to send pouvoir, to be able
courir, to run esperer, to hope savoir, to know
croire, to believe faire, to do sembler, to appear
diiigner, to deign laisser, to let souhaiter, to toish
declarer, to declare nier, to deny soutenir, to maintain
desirer, to icish oser, to dare venir, to come
devoir, to oice pen.ser, to think voir, to see
entendre, to hear paraitre, to appear vouloir, to be toiUing
allez voir votre ami go and see your friend
croye25-vous avoir raison? do you believe to be right?
vous paraissez etre content you seem to be satisfied.
— 147
271. The infinitive, preceded by the preposition de, is used
1. after the verbs
ecrire, to write parler, to speak
empecher, to hinder permettre, to permit
enjoindre, to enjoin persuader, to persuade
entreprendre, to undertake plaindre, to pity
accuser, to accuse
affecter, to affect
avertir, to inform
blamer, to blame .
cesser, to cease
commander, to command
conseiller, to advise
craindre, to fear
defendre, to forbid
detourner, to turn aside
differer, to differ
dire, to tell
dispenser, to exempt
dissuader, to dissuade
prescrire, to prescribe
presser, to urge
prier, to pray
promettre, to promise
proposer, to propose
refuser, to refuse
remercier, to tlmnk
resoudre, to resolve
soup9onner, to suspect
supplier, to beg
essayer, to t7'y
feindre, to feign
finir, to finish
menacer, to threaten
meriter, to deserve
negliger, to neglect
offrir, to offer
omettre, to omit
ordonner, to order
oublier, to forget
and generally after such verbs as govern the genitive; see 24-6, 247,
Examples:
il ne cesse de se plaindre he does not cease complaining
je vous conseille de rester ici I advise you to stay here
je vous prie de lui pardonner I beg you to forgive him.
2. after the impersonal verbs: il convient, il importe, il suf-
lit, and il est, followed by an adjective; thus,
il suffira de lui parler it will be enough to speak to him
il est dangereux de se fier a cet homme it is dangerous to trust this man.
3. after nouns, and such adjectives as govern the preposition de ;
(see 85.) thus,
il est temps de partir it is time to set out
vous etes digne d'etre recompense you are worthy of being rewarded.
272. The infinitive, preceded by the preposition a, is used,
1. after the verbs
chercher, to endeavor
consister, to consist
disposer, to dispose
donner, to give
employer, to employ
encourager, to encourage rester, to stay
engager, to engage travailler, to work
and generally after such verbs as call for the dative as their comple*
ment; see 248, 249. Examples:
j'apprends a danser, a dessiner I learn dancing, drawing
j'aime a chanter, h jouer Hike to sing, to play
il m'a invite a diner he has invited me to dinner
accoutumer, to accustom
admettre, to admit
aider, to help
aimer, to like
apprendre, to learn
autoriser, to authorize
condamner, to condemn
exhorter, to exhmi
inviter, to invite
penser, to think
persister, to persist
porter, to induce
— 148 —
2. after a nonn to denote a pnrpose or an end, and after Bnch acQeo-
tives as are usually followed by ^ ; (see 86. ) thus,
je n'ai point de temps ti perdre / have no time to lose
chambres gamies k loaer fumisheil rooms to lei
CO fruit est bon k manger this fruit is good to eat
je suis pret jk partir / am reaJy to dejxirt,
273. Besides de and 4. the following prepositions are allowed iu
French to govern the infinitiTe directly:
afin de, in order to k force de, by mtatis of par, 6y
aprts, q^ JQsqa'Ji, Ott pour, in ordtrio^for
auprte de, near au lieu de, insUad ff sans, tcUAou^
kvant de, hffort loin de, Jar from saof kt save
faute de, from want of k moins de, unUas
In this relation, the French infinitive is nsoally to be rendered by the
English verbal in ing. Examples:
je I'ai oherch^ sans le troaver I looked for him wUkoui finding him
il est parti sans me parler he hoe gone wilhaui epeaklmg to me
il a M pendu pour avoir void he has been hanged for robbing. >
[IL lA 14.]^
274. The Present Participle ends in ant, and o xpi o s oos a oontinnanoe
:i, stiite, or condition. It has the same government as the verb
it is derived, and remains uninflected. As to its place, it should
always Imve a clear reference to the word to which it belongs. Examples:
nn homme oraignant Diea a man fearing Ood
nne femme oraignant Diea a tooman fearing Ood
dee gens craignant Dieu people fearing Ood
^tant malade, je ne puis vous aooom- being sickt I cannot accompany you
pagner
je les ai trouv^ buvant et mangeant I found (hem eaUng and drinking,
275. The present participle is very often preceded by en, which may
be rendered by in, by, vheti, ithiie. In this use, it refers to the subject of
the sentence; thus,
je lirai sa lettre en me promenant I shall read his letter when waUcing
vous I'avez fait en courant yo^i have done it running.
276. The proper office of the Past Participle is to form with the auxili-
aries avoir and ^tre the compound tenses of the verb from which it comes.
277. When conjugated with dtre, the past participle agrees in gender
and number with the subject of the sentence; thus,
nous avons ^te bien re9\is ?ce have been weU received
la nuit sera bientot passee the night wiU soon be aver
ils sont estimes de tout le moude tJiey are esteemed by every body.
— X49 —
278. The past participle conjugated with avoir, agrees in gender and
number vith the direct object of the sentence, when this object precedes the
participle. But if the participle precedes the direct object, it remains unin-
flected. Examples:
les livres que j'ai achetes sont neufs; the hooks I have bought, are new
quelle affaire avez-vous entreprise ? what affair have you undertaken?
j'ai re9u votre lettre I have received your letter.
' 279. Since with reflective verbs the auxiliary ^tre is substituted for
avoir, usage has established the rule, that the past participle of these verbs
also agrees with the direct object of the sentence, as if conjugated with
avoir. That is to •say, the past participle agrees in gender and number
with the reflective pronoun imless this pronoun be in the dative case; thus
we say:
cette fiUe s'est blessee (Accus.) this girl has wounded herself
cette femme s'est donne la mort (Dat.) this woman has put herself to death.
280. The participles fait, laisse, pu, du, VOUlU, are constantly
left unvaried, when belonging to an infinitive expressed, or understood; thus,
les montres qu'il a fait faire; the watches he ordered to he made
il a dit toutes les raisons qu'il a voulu; he said all the reasons he would.
281. Participles very often become adjectives, and agree in gender and
number with the nouns they qualify. When so used, they are commonly
placed after their nouns; thus,
une dame obligeante, an obliging lady un livre bien ecrit, a loell-written book
des brebis belantes, bleating sheep une lettre bien ecrite, a well-written letter.
[H. 15, 16.]
ADVERBS.
282. An adverb is a word which qualifies a verb, or adjective, or another
adverb, and belongs to the class of indeclinable words called Particles. To
this class also belong Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. Adverbs
are usually divided into four classes, namely adverbs of time, of place, of
degree, and of manner.
283. Adverbs of time are those which answer to the questions when ?
how long ? how soon ? or, how often ?
quand? when? alors, then aussitot, directly
jamais, never depuis, since tard, late
toujours, always enfin, at last aujourd'hui, to-day
souvent, often apres, after hier, yesterday
autrefois, fo7'merly tot, early demain, to-morrow
auparavant, before plutot, rather maintenant, now
jadis, formerly bientot, soon a present, at present, etc.
— 150 —
284. AdverbA of place are those which answer to the qnesticmB whtn f
tBkUherf or tohencef
otf toher^ whUkttf deUk on that Me ailleun, ebmekiBn
d*oti? tohenoeT deaBOs, over pris, doaeby
ici, here demaim, uncbr proche, yiaor
]k, there dedani, iniide loin, far
en, from there dehon, outtide en haat, above
de^ on thia aide partont, everywhere Tia-4-Yis» oppoaUe; etc.
285. AdTertw of degree are thoee which answer to the question how
nrnehf
oombien? how much? ti^ very ploai I more
beanconp, nmok tant, ao much da^antage, j
trop, too much antant, aa nmek moina, leaa
peu, litUe ammt, enomgh anasi, )
trop pea, too lUUe pfeeqoe, olmofi oomme, ) ^^
286. Adverbs of manner are those which answer to the qoestton how f
comment? how? Traiment» truly non, no
bien, toeO fiMsilement, eaaOy ne. .pas, not
pourquoi ? why? oni, yea point dn toat» nolaiaU
ainsi, thiut oertes, J cerUUnki P*****^**^ perhapa
ensemble, together oertainement, ) *^^^**^''^ nnUement by no meana
volontiers, wUHngty asBordment, aaawrecBy probablement, very likely,
287. Among the adverbs belonging to this olaas. the negative ne calls
for special attention, as being often employed in French, where no negative
word is reqoired in Knglish This is the case
1. after a comparative, and after autre, autrement, as already
stated above, 78. Examples:
il eel pliiH riche qn'on ne le croit he is richer than ene thinka
il ^rit mieux qu*il ne paVle he wriiea better than he apeaka
c'est autre choee que je ne croyais U is different from what I ihmight
2. after the verbs appr^hender, to apprehendy avoir peiir, to be
ofraitl, craindre, to fear; emp^cher, to hinder, and prendre
^arde, to take care, when nsed affirmatively; and after doiiter, to
doubt, and nier, to deny, when nsed interrogaHvely, or negalively; thus,
je crains qu'il ne vienne //ear he wOl come
je ne nie pas que cela ne floit I do not deny thai this is so
je ne doute pas qu'il ne soit arrive I do not doubt thai he has came,
3. after the conjunctions ^ moins que, unless^ de cralnte que,
for fear, and que used with the signification of unUsa, before, or
until; see 303. Examples:
a moins que vous ne le vouliez ainsi urikss you vDtU har>€ U so
je ne vous donnerai pas de montre, I unll not give you a watch, uniU yoa
que vous ne parl^pz fhui9ais speak French.
— 151 —
4. when ne is followed by que with the force of the English only or
hut; thus,
je n'ai que vingt dollars I have hut twenty dollars
je n'ai qu'un veritable ami I have only one true friend
je ne ferai que ce qu'il vous plaira I will only do what you please.
288. A large number of adverbs of manner are formed from adjectives
by means of the derivative ending ment. Adjectives ending in a vowel
are generally converted into adverbs by simply adding ment, as:
poli, polite poliment, politely
absolu, ahsolute absolument, ah solutely
troisieme, third troisiemement, thirdly.
289. Adjectives ending in a consonant, add ment to their feminine
termination. Under this description may also be placed the adjectives beau,
nice, nouveau, new, fou, foolish, mou, soft,- as:
heureux, heiureuse, happy heureusement, happily
premier, premiere, fii'st premierement, firstly
mou, moUe, soft mollement, softly.
290. Excepted from the foregoing rule are nearly all the adjectives
ending in nt, which change these letters into mment, to form the cor-
responding adverbs, as:
prudent, prudent prudemment, prudently
patient, patient patiemment, patiently
elegant, elegant elegamment, elegantly.
29 1 i Those adverbs whose signification admits of different degrees, are
compared after the manner of adjectives; as:
souvent, often plus souvent, oftener le plus souvent, oftenest
doMGement, gently plus doucement, more gently le plus doucement, mos^ gently
292. The following are irregularly compared:
bien, icell mieux, hetter le mieux, the hest
mal, hadly pis, worse le pis, the worst
peu, little moins, less le moins, the least
beaucoup, much plus, more le plus, the most.
293i For the placing of adverbs, no definite general rule can be given;
those which relate to verbs in a simple tense, immediately follow them,
and those which belong to verbs in a compound tense, are commonly placed
between the auxiliary and the participle.
294. Exceptions are hier, yesterday, aujourd^ui, to-day, de-
main, to-morrow, tot, soon, tard, late, ici, here, la, there, and generally
all adverbs of place, which follow the participle of a compound tense.
295. There are, as in English, several customary combinations of
words, which are used adverbially. Examples of these are:
tout a coup, suddenly d'abord, at firot
peu a peu, hy degrees d'ailleurs, besides
tout a I'heure, immediately du moins, at least.
— 152 —
PREPOSITIONS
296. A preposition is a word lined to show the relations of things, and
is always placed before a noun, or pronoun. The following are the principal
French prepotiitions:
k, tOt at dcvant, brfore
apr^ after diirunt, during
k traverB, Uirough en, in
avant, brfort entre, bdween
aveo, wUh enren, towardg
ohes, at environ, aboid
oontxe, atjahisi except^ ) eteeot
dans, in honnis, f '*''^*
de, of, froniy 6y malgre, m nj^e cf
depnis, »\nct moyennant, by vMona qf snr, tipoa
derrite. behind nonobetant, nottHDMonci- tooohant, ccmiomdng
d^ frcm ing Tefa, loioanfff
deasoDs, luidfr nntre, hesidn Toioi, #00 Wv
devQs, on, npon ^lar, (Arou^A, (y voiUk, amthert.
297. The prepositions volol, vollf^^ litemlly m0 A«re, Me (htrt, answer
closely to the English exprewions hart is, hn-r ar^; ihtrt Ui, th&t art. When
referring to a penonal pronoun, they are regarded as verba in the impera-
tive, and take the oonjnnotive prononns in the accoaative before them. Ex-
amples:
parmi, anxong
pt'udftut, durnig
pour, for
proche, near
KiiuK, without
siixif, save
m'lou, acconVmg to
KOTW, uwler
suivant, according to
voici mon Mare
voiltk ma soenr
le voici, les void
me voil^ nons voiU
here is myhroiher
Okere ismy sister
here he is, here thsy are
there Tam^ (here we are.
(L 79. 90.]
298. The prepositions de, &, en, should always be repeated before
several nouns in the same couKtmction, as: llionmie est partoot le meme,
en Europe, en Asie, en Afrique et en Amerique; man is everywhere the
same ; in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America.
299. There are also certain Prepositional Phrases in French which re-
(luire the prepositions de or ^ after them. Such are:
a cause de, on accouj^t of an-dessns de, t^xm en suite de, after
ix cote de, by the side of au-devant de, before faute de, for want of
au lieu de, instead of hors de, out of
au moyen de, by means of loin de, far from
au travers de, through pres de, near
aupres de, near proche de, nigh to
autour de, around tout aupres de, dose to
en depit de, in spite of . vis-a-vis de, opposite
par rapport k, with respect to
quant a, as for.
:\ force de, by means of
a lV'j:>ard de, in regard to
a inoins de, unless
a I'opposite de, opposite
au dela de, beyond
tiU-dessous de, under
conformement a, according to
jaequ^k, as far as
— 153
CONJUNCTIONS.
300. A conjunction is a word which connects two sentences, or parts of
sentences. The following are the principal simple conjunctions in French:
ainsi, thus
aussi, also
car, for
cependant, however
comme, as
done, then
encore, still
et, and
et. .et, both, .and
lorsque, when
mais, but
meme, even
neanmoins, nevertheless
ni, nor
ni. .ni, neither, .nor
or, now
ou, or; ou. .ou, either, .or
pourtant, however
puis, then
puisque, since
quand, when
que, that
quoique, although, though
si, if.
301. Besides these, there are numerous compound conjunctions, consist-
ing of two or more words, as:
apres que, after depuis que, since pendant que, while
aussitot que, as soon as parce que, because tandis que, whilst, etc.
302. The conjunctions that require the governed verb in the subjunc-
tive, are:
en cas que, in case that
encore que, though
jusqu'a ce que, till
loin que, far from
a nn que, that
a moins que, unless
avant que, befoi^e
au cas que, in case that
bien que, although, though malgre que, for all that
de crainte que, ) . .
de peur que, )
pour que, that
pourvu que, provided that
quoique, although, though
sans que, without
soit que . . soit que, ) wheth-
nonobstant que,/o?' all that soit que . . ou que, ) er. .or
non pas que, not that suppose que, suppose that.
303. The conjunction que, that, is worthy of particular attention on
account of its great range of meaning as a substitute for the conjunctions:
de peur que, lest
depuis que, since
jusqu'a ce que, till
afin que, that
a moins que,
avant que, before
cependant, yet
Examples are:
venez ici que je vous parle
je n'irai pas le voir qu'il ne m'en
prie
vous ne partirez pas qu'il ne soit jour
combien y a-t-il que votre frere est
mort?
attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus
que ne repondez-vous pas quand je
vous parle ?
parce que, because
quand, when
pourquoi? why?
come here that Imay speak to you
I will not go and see him unless he in-
vites me
you shall not depart before it is light
how long is it that your brother
died ?
wait till it does not rain any more
why do you not answer when I speak
to you ?
304. The conjunction that, frequently understood in English, is always
expressed in French, as: je crois que vous avez tort, I think you are wrong.
— 154 —
INTERJECTIONS.
309. An mtarjeetion is a word thrown in to expreas some sadden emo-
tion of the mind. The following are the principal interjections, aooording
to the emotions which they are genecally intended to indicate:
of joy: ah! oA/ ^/ bon!iMiB/
of sorrow: ah! oA/ aXe!ciA/ h^3aB!€i2a9/
of pain or fear: h^Iae ! alas / ah ! oA / eh ! oA / ,
of aTersion: tlfie! fi done ! Jie then! foin de ! otooy wUh
of calling to attention: eh! eA/ h&\ aht ho]kl hoOot
of oalling to sHonoe: chat! hiHI huahl motosl sUeno$I st! *sii
— 155
INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
k, after adjectives, 86,
contracted with the article, 42.
forming the dative, 42.
.preceding the infinitive, 272.
preposition, 296.
repeated, 298.
with verbs, 245. 248. 249.
absolute demonstratives, 130.
absolute possessives, 127. 128.
accusative, 38.
of personal pronouns, 113,
with verbs, 243—245.
with void, voild, 297.
acheter, its conjugation, 208.
active verb, 172. 173.
its auxiliary, 193—195.
adjectives, 60—89.
agreement, 61. 70—72.
comparison, 73—79.
definition, 60.
demonstrative, 129.
feminine, 63-69.
government, 84—89.
of measure, 88. 89.
place, 80-83.
plural, 62.
possessive, 122.
with the subjunctive, 266. *•
adverbial phrases, 295.
adverbs, 282—295.
from adjectives, 288—290.
by combination, 295.
comparison, 291. 292,
definition, 282.
of degree, 285.
of manner, 286.
of place, 284. 294.
place, 293. 294.
adverbs,
of quantity, with de, 57.
of time, 283.
affirmative form of conjugation, 211.
agreement of
absolute possessives, 128.
adjectives in general, 61. 70,
with nous and vous, 71.
with several nouns, 72.
comparatives and superlatives, 75,
possessive adjectives, 123.
verbs, 238—242.
with diiferent persons, 240. 241,
with one subject, 238.
with relatives, 242.
with several subjects, 239—241,
aieul, plural, 15.
aller, denoting future time, 261.
alphabet, 1.
appeler, its conjugation, 207.
apprehender, with ne 287. 2.
article, 5.
contraction, 42.
definite, 40-42.
definition, 5.
elision, 41.
indefinite, 43. 51,
no article, 52. 53.
partitive, 44. 45.
repeated, 49.
use, 49—59.
aucun, with ne before the verb, 155.
without ne, 165. 166.
in questions, 215.
with the subjunctive, 266. ^.
aujourd'hui, its place, 294.
' !■ for the degree of equality, 77i
— 166 —
autre, ) with ne before the rerb fol-
■utrement ) lowing, 78. 287. l-
autrui. indefinite pronoun, 159. 164
tiniiary verbs, 190-196.
avoir, 191.
etre, 192.
usee, 193-196.
■voir, auxiliary verb
oonjugatiou, 191.
1188,198-196.
beaucoup, followed by de. 67.
bien, followed by the ddf&nite article, 68.
capital inHiai letters, 4a
cardinal numerals, 91.
nifKlitioitioiiK, 92.
used iuHtoAd of th. ■ i m ; . 97.
cases, 37. 38.
ca, used with fire, 134. 231. 232.
08 qui, 08 que, 141.
ce, cet cette, 129.
ceci, ccla. uschI (\hfu)lntely, 131
in qnoHtionM, 216.
,1 demonBtratiTe pro-
celuM:.. celle^i, V
celuhli. celle-14. ) """"^ xov-xoo.
cent, 92. 94.
certain, indefinite pronoun, 163.
cesser, pas omitted after it, 213.
c'est, ce sent 23L 232.
chacun, indefinite pronoun, 159. 162.
cheque, indefinite pronoun, 151.
ci, 1^, appended to demonstratives, 129.
133.
ciel. plural, 15.
classification
of adverbs, 282.
of nouns, 6.
of pronouns, 99.
of verbs, 172-177.
collective numerals, 98. !•
common nouns. 6.
comparatives
agreeing like adjectives, 75.
comparatives
with M«, 78. 287. 1*
with que or de, 76.
cowpiriaoo of
adjeotireo, 78—79.
adverbs, 291. 292.
compound conjunctions. dOL
compound nouns. 16—19.
compound personals, 107. 117* '
cow pou wd looses. 186.
fonnation, 199.
fofmation. 197.
nao, 262. 263.
Bli i io|8 « on, 18a 18a
of the anziliarieo, 19L 192.
formo, 811— 81&
notes, 90(MaOl
principal parts, 190.
of irregular Toibs, 934—987.
of the passiTO rerb, 9ia
of the refloottTo Terb, 99a
of regular TOfbo, 909—904.
of Torbo in oer , ger, eier, der, ier,
yer, 906— Sia
ooolooetions, 300-304.
compound, 301.
simple, 300.
with the Rubjimctive, 266. <5. 302.
conjunctive personals, 102—104. 106.
consonants. 2.
contraction of the article, 42.
il convient, with de and the infiniti][e,
271.2.
craindre, with ne, 287. 2-
do crainto quo. with ne, 287. 3>
dative, a, 38. 42.
after adjectives (d), 86.
of personal pronouns, 111. 112.
with verbs, 245. 248. 249.
de, after adjectives, 85.
after comparatives, 76.
contracted with the article, 42.
forming the genitive, 42.
16t —
after words denoting quantily, 57.
with passive verbs, 243.
preceding the infinitive, 271.
preposition, 296.
repeated, 298.
replacing the partitive article, 56.
with verbs, 244. ^46. 247.
declension
of nouns, 39—46.
with the definite article,* 40.
with the indefinite article, 43.
with the partitive article, 44. 46.
of proper nouns, 46.
of interrogative pronouns,' 143.
of personal pronouns, 103—106.
of relative pronouns, 135.
definite article, 5. 40—42.
after Men and la plupart, 58.
replacing the possessives, 126.
uses, 49. 50. 54.
definition of the
adjective, 60.
adverb, 282.
article, 5.
conjunction, 300.
interjection, 305.
noun, 6.
pronoun, 99.
demonstrative, 129.
indefinite, 148.
interrogative, 143.
personal, 100.
possessive, 121.
relative, 135.
verb, 171-177.
degree of equality expressed by aussi,
si, autant, tant, 77.
demain, its place, 294.
demonstrative pronouns, 129—134.
derivation of adverbs, 288—290.
dernier, with the subjunctive, 266. *•
disjunctive personals, 105.
Jont, relative pronoun, 137. 140.
douter with ne, 287. 2.
dO, participle left unvaried, 280.
elision of the article, 41.
elle-meme, 107.
empecher, with ne, 287. 2.
employer, its conjugation, 209.
en, adverb of place, 115.
with a participle, 275.
its place, 119.
preposition, 296.
pronoun, 115.
repeated, 298.
est-ce que, in questions, 217.
etre, auxiliary, 192.
of neuter verbs, 193. 2.
of passive verbs, 192.
of reflective verbs, 193.1- 221.
6tre aime, 219.
fait, participle left unvaried, 280.
il fait, impersonal expression, 233.
il faut, impersonal verb, 226. 227.
feminine of
adjectives, 63—69.
nouns, 23-28.
finir, regular verb, 203.
formation of the
plural of nouns, 10—21.
plural of adjectives, 62.
tenses, 196-201.
forms of conjugation, 211—218.
afi&rmation, 211.
negation, 212. 213.
question, 214-217.
question with negation, 218.
fractional numerals, 98. 2.
future tense, 186.
formation, 197.
replaced by alter, 261.
use, 259.
geler, its conjugation, 208.
gender of nouns, 22—36.
as determined by the ending, 34. 35
as determined by the meaning, 32. 33
of persons and animals, 22—28.
of things without life, 31-35.
— 158 —
twofold— with difforentmeamiigs,89.
of the word (je>is, 29. 30i
gMiKivt, de, 38. 42.
alter adjectives, 86.
of penoniil pronouiiH, 110.
after snpcrliUivcH, 79.
with verbs, 244. 246. 247.
its gender, 29. 30.
tof
a^jeotivea, 84-88.
with a, 86. •
with da, 86. 88.
of measure, 88. 88.
with other prepoeitioiia, 87.
superlatives, 79. 266. «>
verba, 843-260.
intransitive, 846. 848.
reflective, 247. 249.
transitive. 943-940.
Mer, adverb, its place, 991
168.
with le, lOy 9L note,
hyplimi, 12a 214.
iei, adverb, its place, 994.
n est ) impersonal expression, 23L
il 6tait, 3 with dc and the inflnitiTe,271.2.
il y a. im]>or8onal expreesion, 230.
imperative. 182.
formation, 200.
with pronouns, 120.
use, 264.
imperfect, 186.
formation, 198.
use, 255.
impersonal phrases. 229.
impersonal verbs. 177. 225—233.
with de and the intiiiitive, 271. 2,
with the subjunctive, 266. 3.
it Importe, with de and the infinitive,
271. 2.
indefinite article, 5. 43.
use, 61.
indefinite pronouns. 148—170.
definition, 148.
used with nouns only, 149.
used with or without nouns, 161
used without nouns, 169.
used with fpie, 167.
indicative, 180. 251-261.
of the future teases, 989.
of the imperfect, 966.
of the perfect, 967.
of the pluperfect, 908.
(if the present, 909—964.
of the preterit, 966.
of the preterit anterior, 968.
inflnitivo, 184.
employed by itself, 270.
as a notm, 268.
preceded by a, 979.
preceded by de, 971.
preceded by other prepositions, 973.
principal part of the verb, 196.
to be rendered by the verbal in ing,
973.
interjections. 306 017.
interrogative lorw of conjugation, 914—
of verlis in e mut<', 216.
of verbs of one syllable, 217.
intowo Qs t i v and negative form of con-
jugation, 918.
inttrrogativo pronouns. 143—147.
declension, 143.
definition, 143.
uses, 144-147.
IstraatHive verbs
governing the dative, 248.
governing the genitive, 246.
irregular comparison of
adjectives, 74.
adverbs, 292.
irregular verbs. 234—237.
1st conjugation, 234.
2d conjugation, 235.
3d conjugation, 236.
4th conjugation, 237.
jetor, its conjugation, 207*
169
\k, appended to demonstratiyes, 129.133.
its place, 294.
Iaiss6, participle, left unvaried, 280.
le, personal pronoun, expletive, 116.
lequel, interrogative pronoun, 145.
relative pronoun, 135. 138—140.
se lever, to rise, 220.
Ton, used for o?i, 160.
lui-meme, elle-meme, etc., 107. 117.
manger, its conjugation, 206.
meme, indefinite pronoun, 107. 156.
mil, mille. 93. 94.
modifications of
cardinal numerals, 92.
nouns, 7.
verbs, 178—187.
moi-meme, 107.
a moins que, with ne, 287. 3.
mon, ton, son, before feminine nouns, 124.
moods, 179—184.
their uses, 251-281.
multiplicative numerals, 98. 3.
nature of the subjunctive, 183. 265.
ne, negative adverb, 286. 287.
negation in French and not in English,
287.
negative form of conjugation, 212. 213.
negative and interrogative form of con-
jugation, 218.
neuter verb, 175.
nier, with ne, 287. 2.
nominative, 38.
of personal pronouns, 108. 109.
notes to the conjugations, 205—210.
noun, 6—48.
cases, 37. 38.
declension, 39—48.
definition and classification, 6.
formation of the plural, 10—21.
genders, 22—36.
of measure used instead of adjec-
tives, 89.
modifications, 7.
numbers, 8. 9.
of quantity with de, 57.
nul, always with ne before the verb, 166.
numbers, 8. 9. 187.
numerals, 90—98.
cardinals, 91—94.
collectives, 98. l.
fractionals, 98. 2.
multiplicatives, 98. 3.
ordinals, 95-97.
oeil, plural, 15.
office of the past participle, 276.
omission of
the article, 59.
pas and point, 213.
the conjunction que not allowed, 304.
relatives not allowed, 142.
on, indefinite pronoun, 159. 160.
onze, onzifeme, with le, la, 91, note.
ordinal numerals, 95.
derived from the cardinals, 96
replaced by the cardinals, 97.
oser, pas omitted after it, 213.
par, with passive verbs, 243.
parler, regular verb, 202.
participles, 274—281.
employed as adjectives, 281.
left unvaried, 280.
past, 276-279.
present, 274. 275.
particles, 282.
partitive article, 5. 44. 55.
omitted, 59.
replaced bj^ de, 45. 56. 67.
parts of speech, 4.
principal, of conjugation, 196.
pas and point omitted, 213.
pas un, with ne before the verb, 155.
passive verb, 174.
its conjugation 219.
past participle, 276—280.
agreement, 277—279.
left unvaried, 280.
oface, 276.
principal part, 196.
used adjectively, 281.
— 160
w, its oonjogation, 206.
perfect 186.
it8 Uhe, 267.
ptrMMl pronouns, 10(>-120i
aooiuativc, 113.
olaaniioation, 101.
oomponod personals, 107. 117. -^
conjunctive personals, 102—104. 106.
dative. UL 112. .
decloiiHion, 103—106.
definition. lOa
disjunctive personals, 102i 106.
genitive, UO.
nominative, 106. 108.
place, U8-120.
after prepositions, 114.
refleotiTe 117. 221.
for thiu^s without life, 116.
use. 108-117.
pertoMM, with ne before the verb, 166.
without ne, 166. 166.
in questions, 216.
with the subjunctive, 266. 4-
pertont, different, 240. 241.
of pronouns, 100.
of verbs, 187.
plact of
adjectives, 80-63.
after their nouns, 82.
after or before their nouns, 83.
before their nouns. 81.
adverbs, 293. 294.
personal pronoiuiH, 118—120.
in the accu&\tive, 119.
in the dative, 119.
iu the nomiDative, 118.
with a verb in the imperative, 120.
placer, its conjugation, 206.
la plupart, with the definite article, 68.
pluperfect, 186. its use, 268.
plural, 9.
of adjectives, 62.
of nouns, 10—21.
compound, 16—19.
with a difi'erent meaning, 21.
irregular, 14. 15.
of nouns,
projMjr, 46.
regular, 10—13.
wanting, 20.
of the present tense, 196.
omitted, 213.
pronouns. 121—128.
absolute, 127. 128.
adjectives, 122.
definite article used for, 126.
definition, 12L [i24
fiiOfi, ton, son, before feminine nouns,
repeated, 185.
\ paa omitted after it. 213.
\ with the sobjunctive, 266.4.
prtndrt gir^, with ne, VIX
piiratei, 290.
principal part, 196.
.274.276.
nature and use, 274.
preceded by en, 276.
principal part, 196.
used a^jecUvely, 281.
pcesesl tease, 186*
pliu^ 196.
principal part, 196.
subjunctive, 196.
used instead of the ftitnre, 264.
used instead of our perfect. 263.
used instead of the preterit, 262.
preterit tense, 186.
principal part, 196.
subjunctive, 201.
use, 266.
preterit anterior. 186. it.s use, 258.
principal parts of conjugation, 196.
pronouns. 99—170.
classificatiou, 99.
definition. 99.
demonstrative, 129—134.
indefinite, 148-170.
interrogative, 143-147.
personal. 100-120
possessive, 121—128.
} reilective, U7. 221. 223.
161
pronouns,
relative, 135—142.
with the subjunctive, 266.^.5.
pronunciation, 3.
proper nouns, 6.
declension, 46.
plural, 47.
pu, participle, left unvaried, 280.
quatre-vingts, 92.
que, conjunction,
after comparatives, 76.
never omitted, 304.
replacing other conjunctions, 303.
with ne, 287.3.
que, interrogative pronoun, 147.
que, relative pronoun, 136.
qu'est-ce qui, [ interrogative phrases,
qu'est-ce que, f 147.
quel, interrogative pronoun, 146.
quelconque, indefinite pronoun, 152.
quel que, ) indefinite pronouns,
quelque, \ 150. 168-170.
quelqueque, ) with the subjunctive, 266.5.
quelqu'un, indefinite pronoun, 161.
in questions, 215.
qui, interrogative pronoun, 143. 144.
relative pronoun, 135—139.
qui est-ce qui, [ interrogative phrases,
qui est-ce que, j 144.
qui que, with the subjunctive, 266. 5.
quiconque, indefinite pronoun, 162.
quoi, interrogative pronoun, 147.
relative pronoun, 141.
quoi que, with subjunctive, 266. 5.
reflective pronouns, 117. 221.
in a reciprocal sense, 223.
reflective verbs, 176. 220—224.
auxiliary, 221.
conjugation, 220.
corresponding to English intransi-
tives, 224.
government, 247. 249.
object, 221.
past participle, 279.
reflective verbs,
reciprocal sense, 223.
relation to the passive, 222.
regular comparison
of adjectives, 73.
of adverbs, 291.
regular verbs, 202—204.
1st conjugation, 202.
2d conjugation, 203.
4th conjugation, 204.
relative pronouns, 135—142.
declension, 135.
definition, 135.
omission not allowed, 142.
with the subjunctive, 266. 4.
uses, 136—142.
repetition
of the article, 49.
of possessives, 125.
of prepositions, 298.
rien, with ne before the verb, 165.
without 7ie, 165. 166.
in questions, 215.
with the subjunctive, 266. 4.
seul, with the disjunctive personals, 109.
with the subjunctive, 266. *.
si, adverb, for the degree of equality, 77.
si, conjunction, its use, 263.
simple conjunctions, 300.
simple tenses, 186.
singular, 9.
soi, 105. 117.
soi-meme, 107.
subjunctive, 183. 265—267.
nature, 183. 265.
tenses, 267.
with adjectives and pronouns, 266.^.5.
with conjunctions, 266.6. 302.
with verbs, 266.1—3.
il suffit, with de and the infinitive, 271.2.
superlative,
of adjectives, 73. 74.
agreement, 75.
formation, 73. 74.
government, 79. 266.4.
of adverbs, 291. 292.
— 162 —
tiiit, adverb for the degree of equality,
tvd, adverb, it« place, 394.
tel, indefinite pronooii, 157.
tMMt. 186.186.
oomponnd tenses, 186.
formation, 196—801.
simple tenses, 186.
of the subjunctive, 267.
, 261-281.
I without life,
gender, 31-38.
pronomiK. 115.
tdt adverb, its place, 291
lost indefinite pronoun, 168.
preceding yens, 88.
[77,
with the aconaative, 8i8.
with the aocnaative together with
the dative 916.
with the aconaative together with
the genitive, 244.
tin, une. nnmeral, 98.
run rautre, indefinite pronoon, 163.
Tunique, with the (mbjonotive, 968. *•
uses of tbo
Auxiliary verbs, 193—196. (58.
definite and indefinite articles, 49— 64.
moods and tenses, 961—281.
conditional, 962. 263.
imperative, 964.
indicative, 261-261.
infinitive, 268-273.
participles, 274-281.
subjunctive, 266-267.
partitive article, 55.
personal pronouns, 108—117.
in the accuRative, 113.
in the dative. 111. 112.
in the genitive, 110.
in the nominative, 108. 109.
after prepositionR. 114.
as reflectives, 117. 221.
for things without life, 115.
uses of the
relative prononns, 135—142.
in the accusative, 136.
in the dative, 138.
in the genitive, 137.
in the nominative, 136.
vtadrt, regular Tsrb, 904.
venir de, expressing past time, 98(K
in ing, 973.
171-281.
agreement, 238-942.
amiliarice, 190-196.
daaaifioation, 172-177.
ooi^jiigation, 188. 189.
definition, 171.
formation of the lenses, 196-901.
forms of conjogatkni, 911—918.
government, 948-980.
infinitive, 988—978.
norm or pronoun, 243—260.
subjunctive, 966. i— 8.
impersonal, 225-233.
irregular, 934r-287.
modifications, 178—187.
notes to the conjugatiomt, 211—218.
passive, 219.
reflective, 290-224-
regular, 902-904.
uses of itsmoodsand tenser, 251— 28L
vmgt 02.
void, voHi. prepositions, 297.
participle, left im varied, 280.
, 2.
whatever. 169. 170.
wtiose. 140.
y, adverb, 115.
its place, 119.
pronoun, 116.
Third Part.
VOCABULARIES.
Kote. The plural of French nouns is added only when irregular; adjectives
whose feminine differs from the masculine, are always given in full.
1. FRENCH AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY,
containing all French words occurring in this book, with their meanings,
hut only as itsed in the French Exercises.
agreable, agreeable, pleasant
(j')ai, (I) have
aider, to help
aimable, amiable [Zoue, like
(il) aime, (he)loves, likes; (j')aime, (I)
aimer, to love, like
aimer mieux, to prefer, like better
aine, ainee, eldest
ainsi, thus \_sad
I'air, the look; avoir I'air triste, to look
aise, glad; je suis bien aise, I am very
aisement, easily \gUxd
alle, go7ie
allemand, allemande, German
aller, to go ; aller au-devant de quel-
qu'un, to go to meet some one; s'en
aller, to go away; allez, go, go away
(you); avant d'aller, before goin^
allumer, to light
Alphonse, Alphonso
I'ame (f.), the soul
I'Americain (m.), the American
I'Amerique (f.), America
rami (m. ), the friend
I'amie (f.), the friend
Tamitie (f. ), the friendship
s'amuser, to be amused
I'an (m.), the ^y ear
Vanglais, English _ ;
a, has
% to, at, in; a cause de, on account of;
a la mode, in the fashion, fashionable;
a present, now
abandonner, to abandon
aboyer, to bark
accepter, to accept
I'accident (m.), the accident
accompagner, to accompany
achete, bought
acheter, to buy
achever, to complete, erid, finish
acquerir, to acquire
actif, active, active
Taction (f.), the action, deed, share
Adele, Adela
adieu, good-bye
Adolphe, Adolphus
adonne, adonnee, addicted
I'adresse (f. ), the skill
s'adresser, to address one's self
I'affaire (f. ), the business, work, affair
affliger, s'affiiger, to grieve
afin que, in order that, so that
I'Afrique (f.), Africa
I'age (m. ), the age
age, agee, old
ftgir, to c^ott behave
— 164 —
ranimal, lee animauz (m.), the aninuU
Tanii^ (f. ), the year; chaque ann^
every year; Tann^ bineztile, leap-
Autoine, ArUhorty [year
Ao^t (zu.), August (monihj
ap^rcevoir, i to perceive, noHoe, §e$,
•'aperoevoir, ) be aware of
Tapoplezie (f.), apoplexy
appartenir, to bdong
appeler, to catt, nam$
8*appeler, to he oafled, to be named
B'appelle, ia caBed
Tappetit (m. ), the appetUe
applique, appliqn^ dUigeni
8*appliquer. td apply <me'a je(f
lee ap|)ointementii (m.), the salary
upporter, to 6riju;
npport«;r remMe, to rwMdjf
apprendre, to toom, hmr
appriB, Isami
8*approoher, to apprwuk
aprte, cffUr
aprfta-demain. the dojf qfUr toHnorroM
rapr^midi {t), the q^lemoon
aprte qae, e^ter
I'arbre (m.), the tree
I'ardoise (f.), thedaie
Taigent (m. ), the numey, silver; la pi^oe
d*argent, the piece of money
rarm^(f.), (he army
arranger, to arrange
s'arreter, to stop (one*8 self)
en arri^re, backwards
arriv^ arriv^ arrived
rarriv^ (f.), the arrival
arriver, to arrive^ to hcqjpeti ; il est ar-
rive qnelqne chose, something has
hcq)pened
arrogant, arrogante, haughty
arroee, icaiertd
as, hast
TAsie (f.), Asia
s'asseoir, to sit doicn
aaaez, enough, preity
Taasiette (f.), the j^late
•ads, seated; toe a«ii, to 6^ eeated;
realeraaaiB, to remom #eatod
aaaorti, aMortie, supplied
raanriiment (m.), the assortmmi
a8Biir6meiit« certainly
attaoher, to tie
attaqner, to attack
attendre, to }QaU
attentif, attentive, attenttve
s'attrister, to grieve
aucun, ancone, any; ne. .ancun, au-
ctine, not any
Angmite, Augustus
anjourdliai, to-day
Taune (f.). tU eB
anprte de, near [as
anasi, aiso, as; aiuai bien que, as iceS
aufldtdt que, aa soon as
r AoBtialie (1 ), AustraUa [as miuck
antant, as much, a# many; d'autant,
antoor de, rommi
Tantre, the other; deferent
autre ohoae, somtthing dse
aiitrefoiB, formsriy
antrement* ettenoiee, dyfersnlly
antmi, otherst othsr people
avanoer, to advance [9^>^
avant, brfcre; avant d'aller, '^ore
Tavantage (m.), the advanUige
avant-hier, the day before yesterday
avare, avaricious
aveo, with
Tavenir (m. ), the future
avertir, to warn
(voos) avez, (you) have
avoir, to have; avoir I'air triste, to
look sad; avoir besoin, to be in need
of, want; avoir coutume, to 6f acctts-
tomed; avoir des ^gards, to have con-
sideralion; avoir envie, to have a
mind; avoir faim, to be hungry; avoir
honte, to be ashamed ; avoir mal anx
yeiix, to have sore eyes: avoir pa-
tience, to be patiettt; avoir peur, to
fear, to be afraid; avoir piti^ to have
pity; avoir de quoi vivre, to have
— 165
means to live (m; avoir raison, io he
right; avoir sommeil, to he sleepy;
avoir tort, to he vyrong; avoir la vue
basse, to he short-sighted; avoir la vue
bonne, to lutve good sight
(nous) avons, (we) havi
avoTier, to admit
Avril (m.), April
babiller, to chatter
badiner, to joke
se baigner, to hathe
le banc, the hench
le banquier, the hanker
le bas, the stocking
bas, basse, low ; avoir la vue basse, to
he short-sighted
batir, to huild; fairs batir, to get huilt
battre, to heat
beau, bel, belle, heautifuly fine
beaucoup, much; beaucoup de bien, a
great deal of good; beaucoup de
monde, many people
le beau-frere, the hrother-in-law
la bequille, the crutch
le berceau, the arhor [need of, icant
le besoin, need; avoir besoin, to he in
le beurre, the huUer
la bibliotheque, the library
bien, well; very
le bien, the henefit, good, that which is
right, the property, estate, fortune,
wealth; beaucoup de bien, a great
deal of good; fairedubien, to do good
bienfaisant, bienfaisante, liberal
le bienfaiteur, the henefactor
bientot, soon
la biere, the heer
le billard, the hilliards
le billet, the note
blamer, to hlame
blanc, blanche, white
blesser, to wound, hurt
boire, to drink
la boite, the hox
bon, bonne, good; de bonne heure,
early; avoir la vue bonne, to have
good sight
le bonbeur, (the) happiness
la bonte, the kindness, goodness; les
bontes, the kindness, good-will
le bord de la mer, the sea-side
la botte, the hoot
la bouche, the mouth
le boucbon, the cork
la boue, the mud
bouillir, ^0 hoil
le boulanger, the haker
le bouquet, the nosegay
la bourse, the purse; the Exchange
le bout, the end
la bouteille, the hottle
le bras, the arm
la brebis, the sheep
le brouillard, the fog; il fait dubrouil-
lard, it is foggy
le bruit, the noise
Bruxelles, Brussels
bu, drunk
c.
le cabaret, the inn
le cadeau, les cadeaux, the present
le cafe, the coffee
le cahier, the copy-hook
la campagne, the country
le canape, the sofa
le canif, the penknife
la canne, the cane
car, for, as
la carafe, the decanter
la carte, the card, map
le cas, the case Icount of
la cause, the cause ; a cause de, on ac-
causer, to cause, give
le cavalier, the horseman
la cave, the cellar
ce, cet, cette, ces, this, that; these, those
^ ' !• that which, which, what
ce que, )
c'est, it is, that is
^ 166 —
oe sont, fhtst are; ih^ m^
eeoi. this
o6deT, to cede, give, yieid
oela, t^uit; oela est, it is; oeU im flert
de rien, that is quite useless
celt'brer, to ceteUraie
celui, celle, oeox, oell<», thai, Ihom
oclui-ci, celle-ci, oenx-ei, oelles^i,
this, these; the latter
celni-lk, celle-lji; oeax-U^ oeUee-U^
thai, those; the former
oeut, a hufutred; cent on, a hmdted
and one
le, la centi^me, the ^undraM
oependftot, yei
la oerise, thechtrry
osrtain, oertaiii6» e&riokk, mim
la oease, ceasing; sans oease^ kneee
santiy
chaonn, ohaoane, each cm, every cme
le chagrin, gritf
la chaise, the chair
la chambre, the room
la chandelle, the candte
changer, to change
la chanson, the eong
chanter, to sing
le chapeau, lee ohapeanx, the kaithotmei
chaqne, each, every; chaqtM aan^f,
every year
charm^, charm^ delighied
le ch^t, the cat IcomUry-eeat
le chateau, lee chUeaaz, Gie eaeUe,
chatier, to chastise
le chatiment, the chastisemeiU
chaud, chaude, twrrm
le chemiii, the loay, road
la chemise, the shirt
le chene, the oak
cher, chere, dear; cher, deofiy
cherche, sought
chercher, to seek, look for
le cheval, les chevaux, th^ horse
le cheval de bois, the rocking-horse
•uii cheveu, a single hair; les cheveux,
la chevre, the goat Ithe hair
to, cf at the houee cf; dies noi
to, or at my house; chez le boulanger,
at the baker's; ohes mon fihee, at
my brother's; chez mon ptee, at my
father's; chez aoi, at home
le chien, the dog
le chooolat, the choookde
choisir, to choose [tktmg
lacho(ie,fAf thing; qaelqQecho8e,som*-
Ghr^en, Christiati
le ciel, lea cienz, the eky, Bunen
cinq, five
cinqaante^ fifty
le, la dnquitoe, thej^
la droooatanoe, ike drewnu tmi m
le dtron, the lanon
ekmi, eloo^ anr, nailed to
le coober, the coachman
le ocBor, the heart; de toot mon canr,
vUhaBmy heart
leooffre, O^inmk
la ooltee, (the) anger
leooll^ the college
le combat, the eombat, fight
combien? horn nmekt how mamyf
laoomMe, the comet
eommeneer, io begin
eonuiienl? how? what? looaree
le oommeroe, the trade, tmebweef imier^
oommettze, ioeomimU
la commiadon, the errand
commode, contforiabU
commTmiqner, to oonrnvunioate
la compagnie, the oompany
oomplet, complete, oompMe
le compliment, the eomptimerd
comprcndre, to comprehend,un d eretand
le concert, the concert
concevoir, to conceive
la condition, the condition
la conduite, the conduct
le cong6, the leave; prendre conge, to
take leave
la connaissance, the knowledge, ac-
quaintance; des connaiseances, leam-
connaitre, to know [ing
— 16Y
connu, known
le conseil, the advice
conseiller, to advise^ recommend
consequent, consistent^ par consequent,
conserver, to preserve {therefore
consulter, to consult
content, contente, contented, pleased
se contenter, to he contented with
continuer, to continue
le contraire, the contrary
contre, against
convenir, to suit
il convient, it is proper j it becomes
copier, to copy
la corbeille, the basket
le cordonnier, the shoemaker
le corps, the body
corriger, to correct
corrompu, corrompue, corrupted
le cote, the side,- a cote de, by the side
of, beside
se coucher, to go to bed
coudre, to sew
la couleur, the color
la couple, the couple
le courage, courage
courir, to run
court, courte, short
le cousin, the (male) cousin
la cousine, the (female) cousin
le couteau, les couteaux, the knife
coiiter, to cost
la coutume, custom,' avoir coutume, to
be accustomed
le couvert, shelter- se mettre a convert,
to get under shelter
couvrir, to cover,- se couvrir, to put on
one's hat,- to get cloudy (of the sky)
craindre, to fear, to be afraid
craintif, craintive, timid
la cravate, the cravat
le crayon, the pencil
le creancier, the creditor
le credit, the credit
credule, credulous
cree, creee, created
crever, to burst
croire, to believe, think, be of opinion
(je) crois, (I) believe
croitre, to grow
(vous) croyez, (you) believe, think
cruel, cruelle, cruel, fierce
cueillir, gather
la cuiller, la cuillere, the spoon
cuire, to cook, bake; faire cuire, to cook
la cuisine, the kitchen; faire la cuisine,
to cook
le cuivre, (the) copper
D.
la dame, the lady
le danger, the danger
dangereusement, dangerously
dans, in; dans peu de temps, in a short
danser, to dance \iime
davantage, more
de, by, of , from
le de, the thimble
debout, upright, standing; etre debout,
to be standing
Decembre (m.), December
decevoir, to deceive
le defaut, the defect, fault
defendre, to defend, forbid
les degats (m.)j damage
deja, already
dejeuner, to breakfast
delicieux, delicieuse, delicious
demain, to-morrow; demain matin, to-
morrow morning; demain soir, to-
morrow evening
demander, to demand, beg, ask, ask
for; je vous demande pardon, I beg
your pardon
demeurer, to live, dwell
demi, demie, half
une demi-douzaine, half a dozen
la demoiselle, th^ young lady
la dent, the tooth
se depecher, to make haste
dependre, to depend
<Jepenser, to spend
— 168 —
d^plaire, to dispUast
depai8,5m<;^ayo; fivm; depoiii qiuindf
since wheti* hoic long?
lo deruier, la demiire, the last
derriere, befihul
lies (jue, as soon as, tohen [down
(l<'scondro, to descend, come doten, go
le desespoir, despair
d&drcr, to desire, vithfor
dteld, dtel^ ^Mrtseed
le deesin, (he drawing; le maltra de
desfdn, the drawing-maater
d(*88iner, to draw
« u detail, retaU
(U'teiiir, to detain
<loux, two; deux foiB, ittiee
'lovant, before; de i\e\nnU from before;
oUer au-devant de qtielqu'uii, to go
to meet some one; devaui soi, before
one*s self; le de^'aI]t, the front
devenir, to Itecome; (elle) devient, (she)
doviner, to guess \becomes
devoir, to owe, must, ought
lo devoir, the duty
dieter, to dictate
1 > dictionnaire, the dicHonary
Dicu, Gi)fi
h\ difft'n'iioo, the differemoe
ilifticilo, (ii^icult
dinmucbe (m.), Sunday
diutr, to dine
lo diner, (the) dinner
<liro, /() say, tell
Jiro a I'oreille, to ichisper to
h\ disposition, the disposition
distiugner, to distinguish
tlites, say, teU
so divertir, to play
dix, ten
dix-huit, eighteen
le, la dix-liuitieme, the eighteenth
le, la dixieme, iJie tenth
dix-neuf, Jiineteen
I', \;\ dix-neuvieme, the nineteenth
dix-sept, seventeen
le, la dix-fieptieme, ihe seventeenth
le doigt, the finger
le dollar, the dollar
le dommage, the damage; o*e8t dom-
m%Se, it is a pity
done, then
donn^ given [me
donner, to give; donnes-moi, give (to)
dent, whose, of vchom
dormi, slept
dormir, to sleep; dormir In gruae ma-
tin^e, to sleep late in the morning
d*oii? whence?
doQcement, sofUy, gently, dowty
la dooceor, {the) genUeneea
la donlcur, the pain [iainiy
le donte, the doubt; wana doaia, oer-
donter, to doM
donter fort, to doubt very nmek
douteax, doutenM, doubfful
doxa, donoe, sweet, gantte
ladonndne, thedoaen
doQze, twetve
le, la donzi^e, the iweifth
le drap, the etoth; de bon dzap^ aomo
good doth; dn dxap bleu, some bhte
k droiie, (to the) right [cloth
dnr, dure, hard
E.
Teau, les eaox (f.). the y rater
Tedair (m. ), the lightning; faire des
flairs, to lighten
Teoole (f. ), the school
I'ecolier (m.), the scholar
^conome, saving
^center, to listen, listen to
^crire, to torite
ecrit, icritien
Tecriture (f. ), the vriiing, handwriting
nn ecu, a crown, dollar
I'ecurie (f.), the stable
eflfacer, to efface, strike out
Teflfort (m.), the effort; fiaire tons aea
efforts, to do one's utmost
— 169 —
efirayer, to frighten
des egards (m. ), consideration
I'eglise (f.), the church
I'eleve (m. & f.)> the pupil
eleve, elevee, educated
elever, to bring up, educate
Elise, Eliza
elle, she, it; elles, they, them
elle-meme, herself
elles-memes, themselves
Elvire, Elvira
embarrasse, embarrassee, troubled
Emilie, Emily
empecher, to prevent, hinder
Templette (f.), the purchase
Femploi (m.), the office
employer, to employ, spend
en, in, on, by; of him, of her, of it; of
them; with him, with her, with it, with
them; some, any
encore, still, yet, again; encore tin,mie,
another; encore une fois, once more
encourager, to encourage
I'encre (f.), the ink; de I'encre, some
ink, any ink
I'encrier (m.), the inkstand
s'endormir, to fall asleep
I'enfant (m. & f.), the child; des en-
fants, some children, any children
enfin, at last
s'enfnir, to rim away
enroue, enrouee, hoarse
enseigner, to teach
ensemble, together
entendre, to hear
entendu, heard
entre, between, among, in
r entree (f. ), the entrance, admission
I'entreprise (f.), the undertaking
entrer (dans), to come in{to), to go in{to)
s'entretenir, to talk, converse
envers, towards, to
Ten vie (f.), the desire; avoir envie, to
have a mind
envier, to envy
envoye, senJt
envoyer, to send
epais, epaisse, thick, heavy
epargner, to spare
I'erreur (f . ), the mistake
esperer, to hope
Tesprit (m.), the mind; de I'esprit, ioi<,
intelligence
essayer, to try
i'essuie-main (m. ), the towel
essuyer, to wipe, dry up
est, is
est a, belongs to
I'estampe (f.), the engraving
estropie, estropiee, crippled
et, and
I'etang (m.), the pond
I'etat (m.), the state
les Etats-Unis (m.), the United States
ete, been
I'ete (m.), the summer
Etienne, Stephen
I'etoflfe (f.), the stuff, goods
s'etonner, to wonder
etouffant, etouffante, s^dtry
etourdi, etourdie, thoughtless, giddy
I'etranger (m. ), the stranger
etre, to be; etre assis, to be seated;
etre debout, to be standing ; etre a
plaindre, to be to be pitied
I'etude (f.), the study
Tetndiant {m.), the student
en, had
I'Europe (f.), Europe
eux, they, them
eux-memes, themselves
eveiller, to wake up
eviter, to avoid
exagerer, to exaggerate
excellent, excellente, excellent
I'exception (f. ), the exception
Texemple (m.), the example; par ex-
emple, for instance
expliquer, to explain
s'exposer, to expose one's self
I'extremite (f.), extremity; etre a Tex-
tremite, to be dying
— ito —
k toriqoa» HU mnmifiuktf
Hoh^ fachee, atujry, sorry
86 i&cber, to get anyry
fftcile, tasy
1a iacilite, eaae^ JiMimcif
Irtibli', {^ea^'
Li faim,/)foti/fr; avoir faiin,to 6f Aunyry
faire, /<> makt, do, cause; faire bolir,
to tjet built; (adxe du bien« to do <;K>od;
faire caire, to cook; faire la cuisine,
to cook; £aire des eclairs, to lighUn;
fidre tons ses efforts, to do <m«*ir ut-
most; faire place, to make room;
fiBdre preuve, to makt a trial; faire
noe promenade, to take a icaik^ ne
ftdie qne, to do nothuig bid; (aire n^
toilette, to dress; iaiie le ionr, to
tooOc around; laire Tenir, to smtdfor;
faire Toir, to let see
♦"iit, CA«^ makes ; made; paid (of a
visit); il fait, t/ m; il fait dn brouil-
lard, it hf foggy; il fait nn brouillard
tr^s-^paiji, it is vtryfotjgy; il fait de
la pooasiere, H is dusty; ii fiiit da
Tent, it is witidy; il fait beauooop
de vent, t^ Car very windy
faites, nuUce, do
ftdloir, to be neoesmary
la famille, the famU^f
h\ farine, the JUntr, meal
fatigue, fatign^ tired
il faut, it is neeesmtry
la faute, the faulty mistake; mna iknle,
without fail
le fauteuil, the arm-chair
faux, fausse, fnlsey treacherous^ tfitfm-
la femme, the troman [eere
la fenetre, the wiruiou)
le fer, (the) iron
former, to close, shut
la fete, the feast, birthday
le feu, les feux, ihfi fire
feu, late, deceased
la fcuille, the leaf
Feyrier (m.), ^ruary
ildMeme&l^ faithfully
86 fier ^ to trust
la figure, the figure^ face
la fiUe, the daughter, girl
le fila, the son
fln, fine, fine
ftni, finished
ftnir, to finish
lefisaU:ni, the flatterer
la flenr, the flower; des fleon, tfo#it#
floweret any flowers; do belletf fleur>,
some beauty flowers
laflate, fA«^to
la fois, the time; nne fois, onor; deux
fois, twice; one autre fois, another
ttnuB
le fond, the hack
font, maik«
la foret, the forest
former, toform^ ienprove
fort, forte, sirotuj
fort, very, very much; fort ik propoa,
quite opportunely
la fi)rtune, the fortune
le foH8^, /A« di/cA
fouetter, to irift^, drtM on
la fourcbette, the fork
foumir, to furnish (with)
f^ais, firaiche, fresh, new
lafiraise, the strawberry
le franc, thefranc, twenty cents
fran^aia, fran9aiae, I>)rench; le fran-
9ai8, FNnch
la France, Erance
Fran9oiH, Fhincis
frapper, to strike
Frederic, Frederic
le frere, ttie brother
froid, froide, cM
le fromage, the cheese
le fruit, the fruit; de bons fruits, some
good fruit f des fruits murs, some
ripe fruit
fair, to flee, run away
lafaite, the flight
— Ill —
G.
gagner, to gain, make
gai, gaie, lively
la gaite, cheerfulness
galoper, to gallop
le gant, the glove
le gar9on, the boy, waiter, fellow
la garde, care^ prendre garde, to take
garder, to keep {care
garni, garnie, furnished
le gateau, les gateaux, the cake
gater, to spoil
a gauche, (to the) left
la gazette, the gazette
geler, to freeze
le general, les generaux, the general
les gens (m. & f.), people
Geoffiroi, Godfrey; Jeffrey
Georges, George
la gloire, the glory
Godefroi, Godfrey
le gout, taste
la goutte, the drop
le grain, the corn
grand, grande, large, long, tall, great
grandir, to grow tall
la grand'mere, the grandmother
gras, grasse, fat; dormir la grasse
matinee, to sleep late in the morning
le gre, (the) liking; a son gre, to his
(her) satisfaction; savoir bon gre,
to take kindly
le grec, Greek
greler, to hail
grimper sur, to climb up
gronder, to peal [wholesale
gros, grosse, large, coarse; en gros,
ne . . guere, scarcely, hardly
guerir, to cure
la guerre, the war
Guillaume, William
la guitare, the guitar
H.
habile, skillful
les habillements (m.), the clothing
s'habiller, to dress one^s self
I'habit (m. ), the coat, dress, garment
habiter, to inhabit
I'habitude (f.), the habit, custom
hair, to hate
I'haleine (f. ), the breath ; a perte d'ha*
leine, out of breath
la harpe, the harp
se hater, to make haste, to hurry
haut, haute, high; plus haut, louder
Henri, Henry
I'herbe (f.), the herb, grass; mauvaise
le heros, the hero [herbe, ill weed
le hetre, the beech
I'heure (f. ), the hour, time of the day;
tout a I'heure presently, just now; de
bonne heure, early; a I'heure qu'il
est, at this hour
heureux, heureuse, happy, fortunate
hier, yesterday; hier matin, yesterday
morning; hier soir, yesterday evening
I'histoire (f.), the story
I'homme (m. ), the man
honnete, honest
I'honneur (m.), the honor
honorer, to honor
la honte, shame; avoir honte, to be
hors de, outside {ashamed
I'hote (m. ), the landlord
I'hotel de ville (m.), the (My-Hall
I'huile (f. ), the oil
huit, eight; huit jours, a week
le, la huitieme, the eighth
I'humeur (f. ), the temper; de mauvaise
humeur, in a bad temper
I'hyene (f.), the hyena
I.
ici, here
I'idee (f.), the idea
ignorant, ignorante, ignorant
il, he, it; il aime, he loves, likes; il est,
it is, that is; il est arrive quelque
chose, something has happened; il
fait, he makes; it is; il trouve, he
finds; il vend, he sells
— 172 —
il y a, therf is, therf are, it is; fujo; i\
y a nn mow, a month ago; iJ y a
quelqu'nn, there is somebody
il y a>'rtit, tfitre loas, there wert
ils, they
H'imaginer, to imagine
iiiimortel, immortelle, immortal
I'impertiuonce (f.), the impertinence
important, importante, important
u'importe, no matter
en impoeer, to deceive
impoflsible, impossHfle
rimproHsion (f. ), the im pn at Um
iucouHolable, inconaohbU
incroyable, incredible
riudigence (f.), nieed, povmi^
indinpofl^ indinpoa^ iMtpOMd
I'indulgence (f. ), fofbearanee
ingrat, ingrate, ungrai^fid, wnihmk^
I'ingratitnde (f.), ingroHbtde
iujiistement, w^uaOy
I'inuocence (f.)f Umocenoe
iuqniet, inqai^ta, anoBkmg
rinntant (m.). the monmd; 1^ l*iiiilaiil
meme, at this very moment
iustrnit, instrnite, lecmned
intelligent, intelligcnte, iideBlgent
riutention (f.), the inientUm
int&ressant, intdreaBante, hnierettb^
int^reeser, to inieresi
inutile, useless [yUe to dbmer
inviter, to invite; inviter & diner, to h^
J.
Jacqnes, James
jamais, et'er
1e jambon, the ham
Jii-ivier (m.), January
le jardin, the garden
le jardinier, the gardener (vu)
la jardiniere, the gardener (f.)
je, /; j'ai, / have; j'ai raison, / am
right; j'ai tort, lam icrong; j'aime,
/ lovcy I like; je parle, / speak; je
pense k vous, / think of you
Joan, John
Joannettc, Jane, Jenny
Jeter, /o throw, throw atcay
le jeu, los jeux, the play, gftme
jeudi (m.), Thursday
jenne, young
la jemiesKt', youth
joU, jolif, preity [(at) hiUiarde
jouer, to play; joner an billard, to play
le jonr, the day; huit joors, a tieekf
par jour, daily , a day
le journal, the (n€we)paper
la joum^ the day
Joillet (m. ), July
Join (m.)t J^tne
Jolea, JuUua [iSU io-day
jnaqoe, a» far as; jallqa*a^jonrdllui.
JiuAe, juai^ right, rightecua
jnstemmt exactly
L.
la, the; her, it
lik, there; de lu, Uicncx, frum Vicre; U^
baa, yonder
laborieox, laborienae, indMlriom
laiaaer, to Id, to Uave
le lait, the mSk
la langne, theUMnguage
large, wide
lalarme, Ihetootr
laa. laase, <ir«(l
le latin, Xotffi
86 layer, to wash one*s sdf
le, the; Aim, it; le leur, it to them; le
lui, i7 to him
la le^on, the lesson
la lecture, reading
l^ger, l^g^, light
les legumes (m.), the vegeialAes
lentement, sloicly
lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesqnelles,
which ? who, which
les, the, them; les leurs, them to them;
les lui, them to him
la lettre, the letter
leur, leurs, their
le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs
ITS —
leur, them, to them
leur en, some to them
leve, lifted [gei up
lever, to lift, raise; se lever, to rise,
le libraire, the bookseller
au lieu de, instead of
la ligne, the line
le linge, the linen
le lion, the lion
lire, to read
le lit, the bed
le livre, the book
la livre, the pound
se livrer a, to give one's self up to
le logis, the house, dwelling
la loi, the law
loin, /ar; de loin, f7'om afar
le loisir, (/Ae) leisure
Londres, London
long, longue, long; au long, a^ /engr^/i
longtemps, a long time
lorsque, wheyi, at the time when
louer, to praise; to let
Louis, Louis
Louise, Louisa
lourd, lourde, he/ivy
lu, read
lui, he, him; to him, to her, to it; lui
en, some to him, to her, to it
lui-meme, himself
liiire, to shine
la lumiere, the light
lundi (m.), Monday
la lune, the moon
M.
madame, Mrs.; mesdames, Mesdames
mademoiselle. Miss; mesdemoiselles,
Misses
magnifiqiie, magnificent
Mai (m.), May
maigre, thin, meagre
la main, the hand
le maire, the Mayor
mais, but [home
la maison, the house; a la maison, at
le maitre, the master, teacher; le maitre
de dessin, the drawing-master
mal, badly
le mal, les maux, the evil, complaint;
avoir mal aux yeux, t% luwe sore
eyes; mal a la tete, the headache
malade, sick, ill
la maladie, the sickness
le malheur, the misfortune
malheureux, malheureuse, unhappy^
unfortunate
la malle, the box, trunk
le manege, the riding-school
mange, eaten
manger, to eat
la maniere, the manner
le marbre, the marble
le marchand, the tradesman
marchander, to bargain
le marche, the market
marcher, to walk, march
mardi (m.), Tuesday
Marie, Mary
Mars (m.), March
Martin, Martin
Mathilde, Matilda
le matin, the morning; tous les matins,
every morning
la matinee, the morning; dormir la
grasse matinee, to sleep late in the
morning
Matthieu, Matthew
mauvais, mauvaise, bad; mauvaise
herbe, ill weed; mauvaise humeur,
bad temper
me, me, to me; m'en, some to me; me
le, it to me; me les, them to me
mechant, mechante, naughty, mali-
cious {of beasts)
le medecin, the physician
medire, to slander
meilleur, meilleure, better; le meilleur,
la meilleure, the best; le meilleur
homme de la ville, the best man in
town
se meler de, to meddle with
— i74 —
Ic meme, la memo, let memei, the
name; meme, self; even
la memoire, the memory
la memice, the threat
luener, to lead, tjuUiet bring
le meii8oiige« Ute lie
le meuteur, the liar
mentir, to lie
le menuiHicr, thejoitwr
mepruier, to despise
mcrci, thank you
mercredi (m.). Wednesday
la m^ the nwiherf mon pte« et ma
m^, myparenU
le m^te» the merU
m^ter, la deserve
\e m^tal, lea m^uz, the mdal
le metier, the trade
mettre, to p\d, jAaot^ jnd en; Minettfe
k convert, to get tmderaheiter; mettre
a profit, to t\im to aceomU; se mettve
a tiihle, to sit down to t4Me
K« meubles (m.), the fiantiture
midi (m. ), midday, noon; midi et
demi, hfilf past ticeive
le mien, la miexme, les miena, let
miennet, mvM
luieux, better: il Taut mienx, U is belter;
aimer mieux, to prefer, like btUer; la
mienx, best
mil, thousand
le milien, the middle; le bean milieu,
the very middle
luille, thottsand; le miUe, the mile
lo, la milliome, tfie thousandth
hi mine, the mine
ininuit (m.), midnight
h\ minnte, the minute
uiis, pidy laid
hi misere, the misery
la mode, the fashion; k la mode, in the
fashion, fashionable
mod^re, moderee, moderate
moderer, to moderate
modeste, modest
la modestie, mcdetitg
la modiste, the miUhm
moi, /, me; moi-memt^ i
le moineaii, les moineanx, the sparrow
moinH, less; moins. .moiiia, tlie less. .
the less; le moinH, least
le moia, the month
la moitie, the half; la moiti^ de la
▼ille, half the town
le moment, themameiU
mon, ma, met, my
le moodtb the woHd, people; beauoonp
de monde, many people; pins de
monde, more people; toni le monde,
everybody
momieinr, 16r,f aMtriton, MBetn,f
oe mamieiir, this gen/Umtim
la montagne, the moimtaifi
monter k oheval, to Hde on kormbaek
monter en Toitora, to get into the oat'
la montra, the wateh [riage
montrer, to <^oie
le morcean, Icm morceaux, (he pieoe
mordre, to bit'
la mort, deaUi
mortel, mortelle, mortal
le mot, the toord
le monchoir, the pocket^handkerehi^
monrir, to die; se moorir, to be dying
la moutarde, the mustard
m€ir, m^re, r^
If.
naitre, to be bom; je snia n^ I {have
been) taw bom
n6, bom
ne..gnere, scarcely, hardly; ne.. ja-
mais, not ever, never; ne. .pas, not,
no; ne. .pins, not more, no more, no
longer; ne . . point, not at all, no; ne
. .plus jamais, never again; ue. .qne,
only, but, nothing but
necessaire, necessary
n^Iiger, to neglect
le negociant, the merchant
neiger, to snoio
nettciyer, to dean
\
175
tlie news
neuf, neuve, new
neuf, nine
le, la neuvieme, the ninth
le neveu, the nephew
ni, nor; iii . . ni, neither . . nor
Nicolas, Nicolas
noir, noire, black
la noix, the nut
le nom, ihe name
le nombre, the number
nombreux, nombreuse, numerous
non, no; non plus, either
notre, nos, our
le notre, la notre, les notres, ours
nous, we, us, to us; nous en, some to
us; nous le, it to us; nous les, them
to us
nous-memes, ourselves
nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new
la nouvelle, )
les nouvelles, )
Novembre (m.), November
le nuage, the cloud
nuisible, hurtful
la nuit, the night
nul, nulle, wo, no one
o.
obeir, to obey
oblige, obligee, obliged
observer, to observe
obtenir, to obtain, get
I'occasion (f. ), the opportunity
occupe, occupee, busy
s'occuper, to occupy one's self
Octobre (m. ), October
I'odeur (f.), the odor, smell
I'oeil, les yeiix (m.), the ey$
offenser, to offend
I'officier (m.), the officer
offrir, to offer
I'oiseau, les oiseaux (m.), the bird
oisif, oisive, idle
I'oisivete (f. ), idleness
I'ombre (f. ), the shadow
OUfV on, one, people; Ton salt, one knows
I'oncle (m.), the uncle
I'ondee (f.), the flood
onze, deven
le, la onzieme, the eleventh
I'opinion (f.), the opinion
I'orage (m. ), the storm
ordinairement, usually; generally
ordonner, to order
en ordre, in order [whisper to
I'oreille (f. ), the ear; dire a I'oreille, to
oser, to dare
oter, to take out
ou, or; ou ou, either or
ou, where? d'ou, whence'/
oublier, to forget
oui, yes
ouvert, ouverte, open
I'ouvrier (m.), the workman
ouvrir, to open
P.
la page, the page
le pain, the bread; du pain, some bread,
any bread; de bon pain, some or
any good bread
la paire, the pair
le pantalon, the trowsers
le papier, the paper
par, by
paraitre, to appear
le pare, the park
parce que, because
parcourir, to run thrmigh
par-dessus, over
le pardon, (the) pardon; je vous de-
mande pardon, / beg your pardon
pardonner, to forgive, excuse
les parents (m.), the relatives; mes
parents, my parents
paresseux, paresseuse, idle
parfume, parfumee, scented
(je) parle, (I) speak
parle, spoken
parler, to speak
la parole, the speech, word; tenir pa-
role, to keep one's word
— 176 —
^ pttl^ Ofidt, qp^
ptftegvor, <o«Aan,dMI»
parti, partie, gone away, Mi cut, d^
parted, storied
hi partie, the pari
}>artir, to go away, depart, set oui^ etart
I)artoui, everywhere
Ic poB, thp step
1)08 de, no; pas dn tont, not at all; pas
grand' choHe, not much} ne. .paM, not
\yam6, paoofa, paai, tost
lifloior, to spend (time)
la paoricm, love, affecHon
la pattenoe, (the) patience; avoir pa-
tience, to he patient
pauTre, poor
payer, to pay, pay for
le pays, the country
lo pajsago, the landscape
\& peine, the pain, trmMe; 4 peine. .
que, scarcely , . when; valoir la peine,
to be worth whUe
pendant, during
p^niblc, painfid
i'U p^iitence, as a j^enance
penaer, to think: j»- i^uho k rcfoa, I
think of you
perdre, to lose
perdu, lost
le p^ the father; mon p^ et ma
mere, my parents
l>ermettre, to permit, attow
la permiKsion, the permission, leave
persecutcr, to persecute
l^>ersonne. .ne, no one
la personne, the person
Ik^rsiiade, persuad^ convinced
1a perte, the loss; k perte dlialeine,
mtt of breath
])etit, petite, smaUy short, little
l>eu, little, few; trop pen, too little; daij3
peu de temps, in a short time
le peuple, the people
la peur, fear: avoir peur, to fear, be
(11 se) peut, (it) may be [(rfraid
peut-etre, perhaps
la pbarmarie, (he d ny i<or>
Pbiladelphie, Philadelphia
l'hilipi>e, Phil^
le piano, the piano
lapi^ the piece; lapi^ce d*argent, (he
pieeeqf money
la pierre, the stone
pire, worse
pis, wares
la piti^ pity; avoir piti^ to hone pity
la place, the piaee, room; faire place,
to.makeroom
placer, to put, place, lay; ae plaoor, to
takea seat
plaindre, to pity; tee ipkdndre, iohe
to be pitied; se plaindre, to complain
pHtdx^, to pieaee; aepitdTe, to take plea-
sure, to etgoy amfe aeff; je me plais
ici, / tike being hers
le plaiair, the pteaewrt
la plante, the plant
planter, to plant
pleor^ cried, wqd
pleorer, to cry, toeep
pleuToir, to rain
le plomb, (the) lead
la plnie, the rain
la plume, the pen
la plapart, Me greater pari
plus, morr; non plus, either; le plus,
(^ most; plus plus, <A« more. . .
the more; plus bant, louder; plus tdi,
sooner
plusieurs, several, many
point du tout, not at aU; ne. .point, not
la poire, the pear
le poisson, the fish
le poivre, the pepper
poli, polie, polite
la pomme, /A« <ipp^; dee pommes,
some apples, any apples
la porcelaine, (he porcelain
la porte, the door
porter, to carry, wear; se porter, (to
carry one*s sdf) to be; se porter bien,
tobeweXL
— m —
la portiere, the (carriage-) door
positif, positive, positive
posseder, to possess
possible, possible
la poste, the post-office
pour, for, to, in order to
pour que, in order that, so that
pourquoi? why?
poursuivre, to pursue
pourtant, however, yet, nevertheless
pourvu, provided
la poussiere, the dust; il fait de la
poussiere, it is dusty
pouvoir, to he able
le pouvoir, the power
la prairie, the meadow
la preference, the preference
preferer, to prefer
le premier, la premiere, the first
prendre, to take, catch; s'y prendre, to
manage; prendre conge, to take
leave; prendre garde, to take care
a present, now
presque, almost; presque pas, scarcely
presse, pressee, in a hurry
presumer, to suppose
pret, prete, ready
prete, leiit
preter, to lend [make a trial
la preuve, the trial; faire preuve, to
prier, to beg
le printemps, the spring
pris, taken
le prix, the price
probablement, probably
la probite, honesty
prochain, prochaine, next
le prochain, the neighbor
le profit, the profit; mettre a profit, to
turn to accoxmt
profondement, soundly, deeply
leprogres, the progress-
es^ promenade, the walk, promerutde;
la promenade a cheval, the ride on
horseback; faire ime promenade, to
take a walk
se promener, to walk, take a walk; se
promener en voiture, to ride in a
carriage
(tu) promets, (thou) promisest
promettre, to promise
promis, promised
promptement, quickly
prononcer, to pronounce
la prononciation, the pronunciation
a propos, opportunely; fort a propos,
quite opportunely
proposer, to propose
propre, proper; clean, neat
proteger, to protect
prudent, prudente, prudent
la prune, the plum
puis-je ? may I ?
puisque, since, as
punir, to punish
Q.
la qualite, the quality {when ?
quand ? when ? depuis quand ? since
quarante, forty
le, la quarantieme, the fortieth
le quart, the quarter
quatorze, fourteen
le, la quatorzieme, the fourteenth
quatre, four
quatre-vingts, eighty
le, la quatre- vingtieme, the eightieth
quatre-vingt-dix, ninety [tieth
^le, la quatre- vingt-dixieme, the nine-
quatre-vingt-un, eighty one
le, la quatrieme, the fourth
que ? what ? que ! how !
que, that, than, as; whom, which, that
quel, quelle, quels, quelles, which, what;
quel que, quelle que, &c., whatever
quelconque, whatever
quelque, some, any; however, as, what-
ever; quelque chose, something
quelquefois, sometimes
quelqu'un, quelqu'une, quelques-uns,
quelques-unes, some one, some
— 178 —
k qiMnHnii, tk$ ij^mMm; il est qoes-
tioD, the yiK rt i tf n i»
qui, tMo, irAicA, Ma<; iMo f qui que
ce Hoit, who&otr k^ way 6«
quiconque, tMoiMT, Miryted^ toAo
les quillni (f.), (Kb akmUt (kKkfimt)
le quintal, les q nin ta wx , </U Ai wdrw^
i\\\\\\ud^fiflmi; qain&e joaxB, afoftirigki
Us la quinzitoe, the J^UmiK
I pi i iter, to leave
i|uui ? toAol f qnoi qua oe soit, whatever
quoiqae, although [tt m^y b$
R.
raeonter, fo /*•//, rdaie
niifion, riijht; j'ai niition, / am right;
la raiaon, the reason
raisoxmable, reasonable
le lameao, les rameaax, the bnmeh
rare, rare
rarement, seldom, rarely
le xat, the rat
reoevoir, (o reoslne
r^cbapper, to escape
la r^oompenae, i!he reioorti
r^mpenser, (o reioorti
(je) reoonnais, ^/^ reoogniie
reconnftiwmit, reooninkMnto, gnd^
xeoonDaltre, to recogmse, kmow agaka
reooavrer, to recover
16911, received
refuser, to refuse
regarder, to look at *
le regiment, the regimerU
la r^le, the rvk
regler, to rule
regretter, to regrd
la reine, the queen
se rejouir, to rejoice, to be rejoiced
relier, to birid
remarqaable, remarkable
le remede, the remedy; apporter re-
mede, to remedy
remercier, to thank
remettre, to rermi, put back, hand over
U* rempart, the rttmpart
remplir, to fill, to fulfil
rencontrer, to meet
88 rendormir, to fall asleep again
TetDdn^ to give back, to restore; to make;
88 randre, toyield, surrender; rendro
aenioa, to do (render) a service
rendu, paid (of a visU)
renfermer, to contain
reotrcr, to come in again; rentrer chas
8oi, toretumhome
rtDToyer, to put off
86 repentir, to repejU
r^pondre, to answer, reply
lar^ponaa, (Kiamamer
ler^poB, Ihepeacs, repoes
86 repoaer, to resit
le reproohe, the reproaek; fitiie des
reptowMBi (0 Tspmeu^
IniipateJtum^ Ae reputation
lareate, the remainder
raster, to remain, stay; rerter mssia,
io remain eeaied; reeler ohes aoi, to
etayathoms
88 rdlablir, to get better
retmeg, keq^ remember
retenir, to keep, keep bade
da retour, ffhmdng, on ret u n d ng
retoumer, to return, go back
rteasir, to succeed
rdreiUer, to wake up
revenir, to return, come back
rerenu, returned
les reyenns (m.), the income
revoir, to see again
ricbe, rich
les richesses (f. ), riches
rien. . .ne, nothing; rien du tout, nO'
thing at all
iin rien, a trifle
rincer, to rinse
rire, to laugh
la robe, the goum, dress
Robert, BobeH
le roi, the king
rrr. 11% =
la rose, the rose,' ruban rose, pink rib-
rotir, to broily roast [bon
rouge, red
le ruban, the ribbon,- ruban rose, pink
la rue, the street [iibbon
la ruse, the cunning, trick
la Eussie, Eussia
sage, wise, good (as to conduct)
la sagesse, (the) wisdom
la saison, the season
(il. Ton) salt, (he, one) knows
sale, dirty
salir, to soil, dirty
la salle, the room
le salon, the drawing-room
samedi (m.), Saturday
sans, without,' sans faute, without fail
la sante, the health
le sapin, the fir
s'appelle, is called
la satisfaction, the satisfaction
sauter, to jump [escape
sauver, to save,- se sauver, to make one's
savant, savante, learned
savoir, to know, know how, be able,- sa-
voir bon gre, to take kindly, thank
le savon, the soap
la science, (the) knowledge
se, himself, herself, itself, themselves,
one another, each other
sec, secbe, dry
le second, la seconde, the second
la seconde, the second (of a time)
secourir, to help
le sein, the bosom
seize, sixteen
le, la seizieme, the sixteenth
le sel, the salt
la semaine, the week
(il) semble, (it) seems
sense, sensee, sensible
sentir, to feel, smell; sentir bon, to
smell nice; sentir le brule, to smell
burnt; sentir mauvais, to smell bad
sept, seven; sept heures et demie, half
past seven
Septembre (m.), September
le, la septieme, the seventh
(il) serait a souhaiter, (it) would be
serieux, serieuse, serious {desirable
la servante, the maid-servant
le service, the service; rendre service,
to do a service
la serviette, the napkin
servir, to serve, wait on; servir a, to
serve for, to be of use to; servir de,
to serve for, or instead of; se servir
de, to make use of; a quoi sert cela ?
what is the use of that ? cela ne sert
de rien, that is quite useless; on a
servi, they have served up
seul, seule, only, alone
seulement, only
si, so; if, as, whether
si ne, if not
s'il vous plait, if you please
le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes,
simple, simple [his, hers, its
(de) sitot, so soon,
six, six
le, la sixieme, the sixth
sobrement, soberly
la societe, the society, conipa7iy
la sceur, the sister
soi, one's self; cbez soi, at home
soi-meme, one's self
la sole, the silk [thirsty
la soif, the thirst; avoir soif, to be
le soir, the evening
la soiree, the evening; toute la soiree,
soixante, sixty [all the evening
soi Xante et dix, seventy
soixante et onze, seventy one
soixante-douze, seventy two
le, la soixantieme, the sixtieth
le, la soixante-dixieme, the seventieth
le soldat, the soldier
le soleil, the sun
le sommeil, (the) sleep; avoir som-
meil, to be sleepy
— 180
■on, M, ses, his, Mp, U$
Bonger, to think
sonner, to strike, ring
sont, are; sont k, belong (o, areto
Sophie, Sophia
le sort, the lot
Borti, 8ortie, gone out
sortir, to go out
le Bot, la sotte, (A« /ool
le son, the sou, eeni
Booffiir, to sv^er
Boohaiter, to xti^ il sendt k aoohai-
ter, it ipould be desirable
lo Hoolier, the ehoe
la Bonpe, the 8<nq>
souper, to sup
m)iiH, under
Kontenir, to susMn^ qffirm
le Hontiou, the suffpori
se souvenir de, to remember
Kouvont, often
\i) spectacle, the theatre, the sight
lo sncc^ the success
lo Hucre, th^ su/jar
l\ Suisse*, Siritzrrland
la Boita, the mtite; Unai de snito^ i
diateig, at once
sui\Te, to foiUow
suj^erbe, spiendid
sur, on, tipon
sur. Hure, sure
sui. ment, certotnly
siirvivre a, to 8%avive
T.
la table, the tahie: h table, at table
le tableau, les tableaux, the picture
la tache, the task.
tailler, to nit, mend (of a pen)
le ti\illeur, the tailor
se taire, to he silent
tandis que, whilst
tant, so much, so mangy so
la tante, the aunt
tard, late
tarder, to loiter
latMM, theeup
te, thee, to thee; i*en, some to thee; te
le, i7 to thee; te les, them to thee
tel, telle, such^ mang a one
le temps, the t'utie, loeaiher; dans pea
de temps, in a short time; k temps,
tenes, here [in time
tenir, to hold, keep; tenir parole, (o
keep one*s utord
tenter, to tempt
la terre, the earth; les terree, the land;
4 terra, onthegrou^
la idle, flto head; mal i la tdte, head-
Xeih^thetea [ache
UthUkn, the theatre
le thkne, the esteretse
le tien, la ticnne, lea tifltts, leatiennei^
le tigre, the tiger [thine
le tiroir, the drawer
toi, ttou, thee; toi-mtae, thysetf
la toil^ the ttnen
la toUette, the toilet; fidxe aa toaett^
le toit, the roof [to dress
tomber, to fall
ton, ta, tee, (Ay
tenner, to thunder
letomiflRe, thetkmder
toit, teron^; j*ai tort, lam wrong
t6t, soon; pins tot, sooner
toaoher, to touch
toajonrs, akcays
le tour, the turn; faire le tour, to walk
aroitnd
le tonrbillou, the whirl
tourmenter, to vex
tous les jours, every day
tout, everything, all; quite; le tout, the
whole
tout, toute, tons, toutes, all; tout a
ITieure, presently, just now; tout de
suite, immediately, at once; tout le
monde, everybody
traduire, to translate
traduit, traduite, translated
la tranche, the piece, slice
tranquiUe, ^uiet
— 181 --
tranquillement, quietly
le travail, les travaux, the work
travailler, to work
treize, thirteen
le, la treizieme, the thirteenth
trente, thirty
trente et un, thirty-one
trente-deux, thirty-two
le, la trentieme, the thirUetk
tres, very
triste, sad; avoir Tairtriste, tolooksad
trois, three
le, la troisieme, the third
tromper, to deceive; se tromper, to de-
ceive one's self, to be mistaken
trop, too much, too mxmy; trop peu,
too little
trotter, to trot
le troTipeau, les troupeaux, the flock
(il) trouve, (he) finds
trouve, found
trouver, to find, meet with, like; setrou-
ver bien, mal, to feel well, HI
tu, thou
tuer, to kiU
V.
un, line, a, an; one; encore un, une,
another
I'un, I'une, the one
I'un I'autre, les uns les autres, one an-
other, each other; I'un et I'autre, both
I'lisage (m.), the use
utile, usefid
(il) va, (it) will directly; va venir, is
going to come, is coming; va-t*-en, go
away (thou)
vaincre, to vanquish, defeat
le vaisseau, les vaisseaux, the ship
la valeur, the value
valoir, to be worth; valoir la peine, to
he worth while
le vase, the vessel, vase
(il) vaut mieux, (it) is better
(il) vend, (he) sells
vendre, to sell
vendredi (m.), ^Priday
vendu, sold
venez, come
venir, to come
le vent, the wind; il fait du vent, it is
windy; il fait beaucoup de vent, it
is very windy
venu, come
veritable, true
la verite, the truth
le verre, the glass
vers, towards, to
verser, to pour
vert, verte, green
la vertu, the virtue
vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous
veuillez, be so kind
(il) veut, (he) wishes
la veuve, the widow
(je) veux bien, (I) amperfectly willing,
most willingly, with pleasure
la viande, the meat; de la viande,
some, any meat; de mauvaise viande,
some bad meat
le vice, (the) vice
vide, empty
la vie, (the) life; en vie, living
Vienne, Vienna
vieux, vieil, vieille, oU
vif, vive, lively
le village, the village
la ville, the town
le vin, the wine
le vinaigre, the vinegar
vingt, twenty
vingt-deux, twenty-two
vingt et un, twenty-one
le, la vingt et unieme, the twenty-first
le, la vingtieme, the twentieth
le violon, the violin
la visite, the visit
vite, quickly i fast
— 182 —
vivrc, to live; YiTre da, lo lire on;
avoir de quoi vivre, to hOoe meant
to live on
voici, here is, here are
voih\ there is, iktre are
voir, io see
le voisin, ) , ... , ^ ,
lavoUine, r*'"'^'^'^'^- •*•/-»
hi voiture, the carria^j'
hi voix, the txfiee
v(^loulierH, wiUingly
votre,*voe, yofur
le, la T6tre, les ^dtres, yourg
(je) voiidraiH, (l) should triM, Wee;
je voudmiH bien, / ahoM Uhe very
much; on Yoadrait, one (they) woM
wish
vondric2-voDB? uxndd you have the
kindness f
voulea^voiiB ? do you wiahf
▼ouloir, to xoisht he itiUing^ have a mind,
to grand
▼oolo, wished
▼eras, you, to ymi; voufl en, some to
you; vous le, i7 to you; vons lea,
themtoyou
▼OQS-mdmee, youra4ce$
le Toyage, the voyage
voyager, to travel
Yiai, vraie, real
vraiment, really
▼u, seen
la vne, the eight; k vne d*oeil, visibly;
j'ai la Tue basse, / am short-sighted;
j'ai la Toe bofnne, / have good sight
y, there, thither, tcithin; to it, to them
lea Jens (m.), the eyes; j'ai mal aoz
y enz, / have sore eyes
— 183 —
2. ENGLISH AND FRENCH VOCABULARY,
containing all English words occurring in this book, with their meanings,
btU only as iised in. the English Edcercises,
A.
a, an, nn, nne
to abandon, abandonner
able, habile; to be able, pouvoir, savoir
to accept, accepter
the accident, I'accident (m.)
to accompany, accompagner
on account of, a cause de
accustomed, accoutume; to be accus-
tomed, avoir coutume
the acquaintance, la connaissance
to acquire, acquerir
to act, agir
the action, Taction (f. )
active, actif, active
addicted, adonne, adonnee
to address one's self, s'adresser
Adekt, Adele
the admission, I'entree (f.)
to admit, avouer
Adolphus, Adolphe
to advance, avancer
the advantage, I'avantage (m.)
the advice, le conseil
to advise, conseiller
afar, loin; from afar, de loin
the affair, I'affaire (f. )
(the) affection, la passion
to affirm, soutenir
afraid, effraye, effrayee; to be afraid,
avoir peur, craindre
Africa, I'Afrique (f.)
after, apres, apres que
the afternoon, I'apres-midi (f. )
again, encore; to see again, revoir
against, centre
the age, I'age (m. )
aged, age, agee
ago, depuis, il y a; a month ago, il y a
agreeable, agreable [un mois
all, tout, toute, tous, toutes; tout
to allow, permettre
almost, presque
alone, seul, seule
Alphonso, Alphonse
already, deja
also, aussi
to alter, changer
although, quoique
always, toujours
America, I'Amerique (f.)
the American, I'Americain (m.)
amiable, aimable
among, entre
and, et
(the) anger, la colere [facher
angry, fache, fachee; to get angry, se
the animal, Tammal, les animaux(m.)
(the) annoyance, le chagrin
another, encore un, une
the answer, la reponse
to answer, repondre
Anthony, Antoine
anxious, inquiet, inqi^te
any, en, quelque
apart, a part
(the) apoplexy, I'apoplexie (t. )
to appear, paraitre
the appetite, I'appetit (m.)
the apple, la pomme; some apples, aivy
apples, des pommes
to approach, approcher
— 184
AprU, Avril (m.)
the arbor, Id beroeaa
are, sont; tare going, allei
the arm, \e bras
tfie arm-chair, le faateoil
Vie army, rarmee (f. )
to arrange, arranger
the arrival, Tarrivee (f.)
to arrive, arrivor
arrived, arrive, arivwj
as, que, car; si, aossi; ptUflqao;quel-
que; as far as, joaqae; as mmiy,
as much, tant, autant; as sipon as,
AVumtJbi qae, des que; as weU as,
aofsi bien que
Asia, FAsie (f.)
aside, k part [demander
to ask, prier, demander; to ask for,
asleep, endormi; to fall asleep, B'en-
dormir; to fall asleep again; ae xen-
dormir
Ike assorimad, TasBoitiment (m.)
at, k\ at the Urns uhsn, loraque; at the
house of, ohec; at the baker*s, ohes
le boulanger; at mjf father's, chas
mon p^; at home, ohes aoi; to or
at my house, cbes moi
to attack, attaqner
attentive, attentif, attentiTe
August (month), Ao^ (m.)
Augustus, Augnste
the aunt, la tante
Australia, TAiistralie (f.)
avaricious, avaie
to avoid, ^viter
atoare, instruit, instniite; to be aware,
apercevoir, s'apercevoir
B.
the back, le fond
backwards, en arriere
bad, manyais, mauTaise
badly, mal
to bake, cuire
the baker, le boulanger; at the baker's,
chez le boulanger
the banker, le baaqider
to bargain, marchander
to bark, aboyer
the basket, la corbeiUe
to bathe, se baigner
to be, etre; to be able, pouvoir, sit voir;
to be accustomed, avoir coutume ; to
be qfraidi, avoir pear, craindre; to
be amused, a'anmser; to be ashamed,
avoir honte; to be aware, s'aperce-
voir; to be bom, naltre; to be valltd,
8*appeler; to be contented, se con-
tfloter de; to be dying, se moorir,
etre k reztr&nit^; to be hungry,
avoir laim; to be mistaken, se trom-
per; to be named, s*appeler; to be
necessary, (alloir; to 6e tn need,
avoir beeoiu ; to 6e qf oplnton, croire ;
to be patient, avoir patienoe ; to &c to
be pitied, dtre k plaindre; to be re-
joiced, te r^ooir; to be right, avoir
raison; to be seated, etxe assis; to be
sUent, se taire; to be rietpy, avoir
sommeil; to be thirsty, avoir soif;
to be qf use to, senrir k; tobe well,
se porter bien; to be willing, vouloir;
to be worth, valoir; tobe wrong, avoir
tort
toheat, battle^ frapper
beautiful, bean, bel, belle
because, paroeqne
to become, devenir: she becomes, elle
devient; it becomes, il oonvient
thebed,\em
the beech, le hetre
been,M
the beer, la bi^
brfore, avant, devant; from b^ore, de
devant; before going, avant d'aller;
b^ore one*s self, devant soi
to beg, prior, demander; / beg your
pardon, je vous demande pardon
to begin, commencer
tob^ve, agir
behind, derrito
to bdieve, croire; (I) believe, (je) crois
— 185
hdong, sont a; belongs tOy est a; to he-
long, appartenir
the bench, le banc
the benefactor, le bienfaiteur
the benefit, le bien
beside, a cote de
the best, le meilleur, la meilleure; le
mieux; the best man iniown, le meil-
leur homme de la ville
better, meilleur, meilleure; mieux, ; it
is better, il vaut mieux; to get better,
se retablir
between, entre
(the) billiards, le billard
to bind. Teller
the bird, Toiseau, les oiseaux (m.)
the birthday, la fete
to bite, mordre
black, noir, noire
to blame, blamer
the body, le corps
to boil, bouillir
fjie bonnet, le cbapeau, les chapeaux
ihe book, le livre
the bookseller, le libraire
the boot, la botte
bom, ne; to be born, naitre; I (have
been) was born, je suis ne
the bosom, le sein
both, I'un et I'autre
tJie bottle, la bouteille
bought, achete
ihe box, la boite, le coflfre, la malle
the boy, le gar9on
the branch, le rameau, les rameaux
the bread,le pain; some bread, any bread,
du pain ; some, any good bread, de bon
to break, casser [pain
to breakfast, dejeiiner
the breath, rhaleine (f. ) ; out of breath,
a perte d'haleine
to bring, mener, apporter
to bring up, elever
to broil, rotir
the brother, le frere; to my brother s,
ohez mou frere
the brother-in-laWi le beau-frere
Brussels, Bruxelles
to build, batir; to get built, fairebatir^
to burst, crever
the business, le commerce, Taffaire. (f. )
busy, occupe, occupee
but, mais ; ne . . que
the butter, le beurre
to buy, acheter
by, en; par; de
c.
the cake, le gateau, les gateaux
to call, appeler; is called, s'appelle
the candle, la chandelle
tfie cane, la canne
the card, la carte [garde
the care, la garde; to take care, prendre
ihe carriage, la yoiture; to get into ihe
carriage, monter en voiture
the carriage-door, la portiere
to carry, porter; (to carry one's self)
to be, se porter
the case, le cas
the castle, le chateau, les chateaux
the cat, le chat
to catch, prendre
Gatherine, Catherine
to cause, faire, causer
to cede, ceder
to celebrate, celebrer
the cellar, la cave
the cent, le sou
certain, certain, certaine
certainly, surement, sans doute, as.
surement
the chair, la chaise
to change, changer
to chastise, chatier
the chastisement, le chatiment
to chatter, babiller
(the) cheerfulness, la gaite
ihe cheese, le fromage
ihe cherry, la cerise
ihe child, I'enfant (m. & f.) ; some child'
ren, any children, des enfants
— 186 —
(he chocolate, le chooolat
to choose, cboisir
Christian, Chretien
the church, 1 eglise (f. )
the circuinstarice, la circoustanoe
the City-llali, I'botel de ville (m.)
clean, propre
io clean, nettoyer
io climb up, grimper snr
to close, fermer
tlie doth, le drap; some good eloih, de
bon drop; some blue doth, da drop
bleu
the clnthing, lee babillementB (m.)
the cloud, le nnage
cloudy t nnagenx, noageota; to gel
eUmdy, se couTrir
the coachman t le ooober
coarse, gros, groaee
the coat, lliftbit (m.)
the coffee, le caf^
cold, fruid, froide; U is cold, il fidt
froid
the college, le collie
tlie color, la couleur
the comhai, le combat
to come, Tenir; to come batk, rerenir;
to come in, entrer; to come in o^crfn,
xentrer; is coming, va venir
come, yenn; venes
io come down, desoendre
the comet, la comdte
conrforlable, commode
to commit, commcttre
to communicaie, commoniquer
the company, la compAgnie, la sod^
io compUUn, se plaindre
the complamt, le mal
complete, complet, compl^
to compHete, achever
the compliment, le compliment
io comprehend, comprendrv
to conceive, concevoir
the concert, le concert
the condUion, la condition
the conduct, la conduite
(thej consideraikm, regard (m.); io
have coneideraiion, avoir dee ^gaxda
ioconsuU, oonaolter
io contain, renfermer
contented, oonteut, contente; to be covi-
tented with, se oontenter de
to continue, oontinner
the contrary, le oontroire
to converee, s'entretenir
convinced, persnad^ penoad^
to ooofc, coire; &ire cuire, £Edre la oni-
(the) copper, le cnivre [sine
to copy, copier
the copy-book, le oahier
the cork, le boncbon
ihecom, le grain
to correct, oorriger
comipted, oorrompo, oorrompna
to coei, ooAtar
the oowUry, le paja, la oampagne
the oountry-eeat, le chfttean, les cb&-
the coiuple, la conple [teanx
(the) courage, le oonrege
the couein (m. df.), le cousin, la con-
to cover, couTrir [sine .
the cravat, la crovate
created, orw, crooo
the credU, le credit
the creditor, le cr^ancier
credulous, or^dnle
cried, plenr6
crippled, estropi^ estropi^
a crown (coin), nn ^cn
crud, cruel, cmelle
the crutch, la braille
to cry, pleurer
(the) cunning, la ruse
the cup, la taese
to cure, guerir
the custom, Tbabitude (f.), la cou-
tnme; to be accustomed, avoir cou-
to cut, tailler [tume
D.
(the) damage, les degats (m. )
todance, danser
— 187 —
the danger, le danger
dangerously, dangereusement
to dare, oser
the daughter, la fille
a day, daily, par jour
the day, le jour, la joumee; the day
after to-morrow, apres-demain; the
day before yesterday, avant-hier
(the) death, la mort
the decanter, la carafe
deceased, feu
to deceive, decevoir, en imposer, trom-
per; to deceive one's self, se tromper
December, Decembre (m.)
the deed. Taction (f.)
deeply, profondement
to defeat, vaincre
the defect, le defaut
to defend, defendre
delicious, delicieux, delicieuse
delighted, charme, charmee
to demand, demander, prier
to depart, partir
departed, parti
to depend, dependre
to descend, descendre
to deserve, meriter
to desire, desirer
the desire, I'envie (f. )
(the) despair, le desespoir
to despise, mepriser
to detain, detenir
to dictate, dieter
the dictionary, le dictionnaire
to die, mourir
the difference, la difference
different, autre
differently, autrement
difficult, difficile
diligent, applique, appliquee
to dine, diner
(the) dinner, le diner
directly, immediatement; it will direct-
dirty, sale \ly, il va
to dirty, salir
to displease, deplaire
the disposition, la disposition
to distinguish, distinguer
distressed, desole, desolee
the ditch, le fosse
to divide, partager
to do, faive; to do (one's duty ),remplir;
do, faites; to do good, faire du bien;
to do nothing but, ne faire que ; to do
one's utmost, faire tons ses efforts;
to do a service, rendre service; do
you wish ? voulez-vous ?
the dog, le chien
the dollar, I'ecu (m.), le dollar
the door, la porte
to doubt, douter; to doubt very mv^h,
douter fort
doubtful, douteux, douteuse
the dozen, la douzaine
to draw, dessiner
the drawer, le tiroir
the drawing, le dessin
the drawing-master, le maitre de dessin
the drawing-room, le salon
the dress, la robe, rhabit (m.)
to dress, faire sa toilette
to dress one's self, s'habiller
to drink, boire
to drive on, fouetter
the drop, la goutte
the drug-store, la pharmacie
drunk, bu
dry, sec, seche
to dry up, essuyer
during, pendant
the dust, la poussiere; it is dusty, il
fait de la poussiere
the duty, le devoir
to dwell, demeurer
the dwelling, le logis [mite
to he dying, se mourir, etre a I'extre-
E.
each, chaque; each year, chaque an-
nee
each one, chacun, chacune; each other ^
I'lm I'autre, les uns les autres
-- 1S8 —
mrty, de bonne henrt
the earth, la iene
the ease, la faoilitd
e(»i/y, aiatoant
tasyt facile
to eo/, manger
eiiUix^ mange
to educcU€t clever
educated, eleve
to ^oee, e£hoer
eight, hnit
(ifjhtren, dix-huit
ilkt eUjhteeiitK le. In (lix-hiutKiiio
(he eighth, 1<^« la huitit'mc
the eightietfiy le, la qaatxe-Tingtitoie
eighty, (|iuitre-Tingt«
eu;Aty-orit^ quatre-vingi-un
et(A«r, non plus; either. . .or, ou. . .ou
eldest, aind, ainee
eieven, onze
<Ae eleveniK l^ 1a onzi^e
^tsa, Elise
the eU, I'ftune (f.)
Emily. Emilio
to employ, employer
eiixpty, vide
to enooiwrage, encoorager
the end, le boat
to end, aohever
England, TAngleterre (!)
Ikglish, Tanglais (m.)
the engravituj, Testampe (f. )
to enjoy one's self, se plairo
enovgh, assez
the en/ra?ice, I'entree (t)
to emy, envier
Ernest, Ernest
the errand, la commission,
to escape^ recbapper
the estate, le bien
Europe, I'Europe (f.)
even, meme
the evening, le soir, la soir^; aU the
evening, tonte la soir^
ever, jamais
etvry, cbaqae, tout, tonte; everybody f
tont le monde; everybody toko, qni-
conqne; every dcty, tons lee jours;
every morning, tons les matins; every
one, chacnn, chacune; everything,
tout
everyxohere, portout
the evil, le mal, lee manz
exactly, jnstement, pr^isdment
to eB ug gerate, ezag^r
th$ MBompft, Tezemple (m.)
exceBenl. *" t. excellente
the excel - ptioii (f.)
the BBchange, la boarse
the eoBmreite, le ihkmt
to explain, ezpliqner
to expoae one*s self, s*expoHer
the eye, roeil, les yenz (m. >
Mff eyet, J*ai mal anx yeu:^
P.
the face, la iQgiixe
tAe/oii, lkttnib;wUhouifail, sans faute
/otfVW. fldila
femfnOy, fidMement
(o/alZ, tomber; (oybSoflef), s'endor-
mir; to fail asleep Qqojifi^, se rendor-
mir
faUe, fiun, firasse
thefamOy, la.iamille
far, loin; as far a.<r, jtwque
the fashion, la mode; /rM^iona&2e, in
/A« fashimi, a la mode
/(M<, vite
(A« father, le p^; <rf my father's, cbez
mon pere
(/)« /au//, la faute, le defaut
the fear, la peur
to fear, craindre, avoir peur
the feast, la fete
February, Fevrier (m.)
to feel, sentir; to fed voeU, tU, se trou-
ver bien, mal
the fellow, le gar^on
fevD, pen; fewer, moins
fierce, cruel, cruelle
189 —
fifteen, quinze
the fifteenth, le, la quinzieme
the fifth, le, la cinquieme
the fiftieth, le, la cinquantieme
fifty, cinquante
the fight, le combat
the figure, la figure
to fill, remplir
to find, trouver
(he) finds, (il) trouve
fine, beau, bel, belle; fin, fine
the finger, le doigt
to finish, finir, achever
finished, fini
the fir, le sapin
the fire, le feu, les feux
the first, le premier, la premiere
the fish, le poisson
five, cinq
the flatterer, le flatteur
to flee, fuir
the flight, la fuite
the flock, le troupeau, les troupeaux
the flood, I'ondee (f. )
the flour, la farine
the flower, la fleur; some or any heauti-
ful flowers, de belles fleurs
(the) fluency, la facilite
the flute, la flute
the fog, le brouillard; it is foggy, il
fait du brouillard; it is very foggy,
il fait un brouillard tres-epais
to folloic, suivre
the fool, le sot, la sotte
for, car; pour, pendant
(the) forbearance, Tindulgence (f.)
to forbid, defendre
the forest, la foret
to forget, oublier
to forgive, pardonner
the fork, la fourchette
to form, former; se former
the former, celui-la
formerly, autrefois
the fortieth, le, la quarantieme
a fortnight, quinze jours
fortunate, henreux, heureuse
the fortune, le bien
forty, quarante
found, trouve
fcmr, quatre
fourteen, quatorze
the fourteenth, le, la quatorzieme
the fourth, le, la quatrieme
a franc, un franc (twenty cents)
France, la France
Francis, Fran9ois
Frederic, Frederic
to freeze, geler
French, le fran9ais; fran9ais, fran9aise
fresh, frais, fraiche
Friday, vendredi (m.)
the friend (m. &f.), Tami, Tamie
the friendship, I'amitie (f.)
to frighten, efirayer
from, de, depuis
the front, le devant
the fruit, le fruit; some good fruit, de
bons fruits ; some ripe fruit, des fruits
to fulfll, remplir [murs
to furnish, foumir
furnished, garni, garnie
the furniture, les meubles (m. )
the future, I'avenir (m.)
G.
to gain, gagner
to gallop, galoper
the game, le jeu, les jeux
the garden, le jardin
the gardener (m. & f), le jardinier,
la jardiniere
the garment, I'habit (m. )
to gather, cueillir
the gazette, la gazette
the general, le general, les generaux
generally, ordinairement
gentle, doux, douce
this gentleman, ce monsieur
the gentleness, la douceur
gently, doucement
George, Georges
— 100
Chrman, ftllemand,
to geiy obteiiir; to gd angry ^ se dehor;
to get better^ se retablir; to get buUt^
(aire batir; to get into the carriage,
monter en voiture; to get clomly, se
couvrir; to get cooked, faire cuire;
to get under sh flier, se mettre k cou-
Yert; to get up, se lever
giddy, ^nnli, etourdio
the girl, la fiUo
to give, donner, ctiler, cauner; gii'f (to
me), douue3>moi; to give Ixick,
rendre; to give one's atif up tn, w>
lirreik
given, doiin^
glad, aise ; / am very glad, je sols bieu
the glass, le verre [aiae
^ glory, la gloire
the glove, le gant
go, allez; to go, aller; go auooy (thou),
va-t*-en; go away (you), aUes-TouA-
ea; to go atcay, s'en aller, partir;
to go back, retoumcr; to go to bed,
se concher; to go down, deaoendre;
to go to meet some one, aller an-de-
Tant de quelqa'nn; to go out, sortir;
btfore going, avant d'aller; is going
to come, Ta Tenir
Cfod, Diea
Godfrey, Oodefroi, Geoffiroi
gone, all4 allee; gone away, parti, par-
tie; gone out, sorti, sortie
good, bon« bonne; sage; the goodrVciU,
les bont^ (f.); the good, that which
is right, le bien; good-bye, adieu
the goodness, la bont^
the gown, la robe
the grandmother, la grand'm^
to grant, vonloir
gral^uL, reconnaissant, reoonnaissante
great, grand, grande; a great deal of
good, beaucoup de bien
Cfreek, le grec
green, vert, verte
(the) grief, le chagrin
to grieve, s^affiigcr, sattrister, affliger
on the ground, k terre
to grow, croitre; to grow tall, grandir
to guess, deviner
to guide, mencr
the guitar, la guitare
H.
had, CXI
to hail, pn'ltT
a (simjlf) hair, on oheren; the hair,
1«'H chevtux
half, di'ini, deniie; half a dozen, une
d**mi - (lou/jiine; half past twelve,
in'uVi ft (Icmi
/' half, hi moitie; half the town, la
moitie de la Tille
the ham^ le jambon
thehimd, la main
to hand over, remeitre
the (hand)wrUitig, Vieriture (f.)
to happen^ arriver; something fuis hap-'
pened, il est arriT^ quelque ohoee
(the) h(q)pme8s, le bonhenr
happy, heoreox, hooreofle
hard, dor, dure
hardly, ne . . gu^
(the) harm, le mal
the harp, la harpe
has, a
hast, BB [d^peohey
(the) hasie, la h&te; to make haste, se
the hat, le chapean, lee chapeaux, le
to hate, hair [bonnet
haughty, arrogant, arrogante
(J) have, j'ai; toe have, nous ayons;
you have, vons avez
to have, avoir; to have consideration,
avoir dee egards; to have means to
live on, avoir de quoi vivre; to havi
a mind, vonloir, avoir envie
he, il, lui; he finds, il trouve; he likes,
loves, il aime; he makes, il fait; he
sells, il vend
the head, la tete
the headache, mal a la tete
the health, la sante
191
to hear, apprendre, entendre
heard, entendu
the heart, le cceur; with all my heart,
de tout mon cceur
Heaven, le ciel, les cieux
heavy, lourd, lourde; epais, epaisse
to help, secourir, aider
Henry, Henri
her, son, sa, ses
her, la, elle; to her, lui; of her, en
/lere, ici^ tenez; here is, here are, voici
the hero, le heros
hers, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les
herself, se ; elle-meme [siennes
high, haut, haute
him, le, lui; to him, lui; of him, en
himself, se, lui-meme
to hinder, empecher
his, son, sa; ses; le sien, la sienne,
les siens, les siennes
hoarse, enroue, enrouee
to hold, tenir
at home, chezsoi, alamaison, aulogis;
to return home, rentier chez soi, to
stay at home, rester chez soi
honest, honnete
the honor, I'honneur (m.)
to honor, honorer
to hope, esperer
the horse, le cheval, les chevaux
the horseman, le cavalier
the hour, I'heure (f.); at this hour, a
I'heure qu'il est
the house, la maison, le logis
how ? comment ? how many ? com-
bien? how much? combien? how
long ? depuis quand?
however, pourtant; quelque. .que
a hundred, cent
a hundred and one, cent un
the hundredweight, le quintal, les
quintaux
the hundredth, le, la centieme
(the) hunger, la faim; to he hungry ^
avoir faim
to hurry, se hater
in a hurry, presse, pressee
to hurt, blesser
hurtful, nuisible
the hyena, I'hyene (f.)
I.
I, je, moi, I am right, j'ai raison; I
am icrong, j'ai tort; I like, love,
j'aime; I speak, je parle; I think of
you, je pense a vous
the idea, I'idee (f.) [sive
idle, paresseux, paresseuse; oisif, oi-
(the) idleness, I'oisivete (f.)
if, si; if not, si. . . .ne; if you please^
s'il vous plait
ignorant, ignorant, ignorante
ill, malade; ill weed, mauvaise herbe
the illness, la maladie
to imagine, s'imaginer
immediately, aussitot, tout de suite
immortal, immortel, immortelle
(the) impertinence, I'im pertinence (f.)
important, important, importante
impossible, impossible
the impression, I'impression (f. )
to improve, former
in, dans, a, en; in a short time, dans
peu de temps
incessantly, sans cesse
the income, les revenus (m.)
inconsolable, inconsolable
incredible, incroyable
indisposed, indispose, indisposee
industrious, laborieux, laborieuse
(the) ingratitude, I'ingratitude (f.)
to inhabit, habiter [de I'encre
the ink, I'encre (f») ; some ink, any ink,
the inkstand, I'encrier (m*)
the inn, le cabaret
(the) innocence, I'innocence (f.)
insincere, faux, fausse
the instance, I'exemple (m.); for in-
stance, par exemple
instead of, au lieu de
intelligence, de I'esprit
intelligent, intelligent, intelligente
— 192 —
fhehOmdhn, Hntention (f.)
A« kiitrcourat, le oommerce
to Merest, in td r e t wn r
interesting, int^refMint, int^reesanto
to invite, inviter; to invite to dinner,
inviter k diner
(the) iron, le fer
is, est; is called, s'nppelle
it, il, eUe; le, Ui; to it, Ini; y; of U,
en; it to fiim, le Ini; it to me, me le;
it to thee, te le; it to them, tc lenr; it
k> us, nous le; it to you, vom* le; i7
if, c*6st, oela est, il est, U Cut; it is
better, il vaut mieux
its, son, sa, ses; le aien, la sienne, lea
itseif, 86, Boi [siena, lea sfaimeB
J.
James, Jaoqnes
Jane, Jeannette
January, Janvier (m.)
Jeffrey, Geoffroi
Jb/in, Jean
the joiner, le menoiaier
to joke, badiner
the journey, le voyage
Jkdius, JnlcH
Jtily, JuiUet (m.)
to jump, santer
June, Juin (m.)
just, juste
just now, k present
K,
to keep, garder, tenir, retenir; keep,
retenez; to keep bock, retenir; to
keep one's tcord, tenir parole
to kill, tner
he so kind, venillez
kindly, avec bonte; to take it kindly,
awoir bon gr^
the kindnessy la bonte, les bontfe; haiye
the kindness, ayez la bonte, veuillez;
uxndd you have the kindness ? vou-
the king, le roi [driez-vons ?
the kitchen, la cuisine
the knife, le couteau, les couteauk
to know, connaltre; to know hoie, sa-
voir; to know again, reconnaitre
the knowledge, la connaissance, la
known, connu [acienco
(he, one) knows, (il. Ton) salt
L.
the lady, la dame, the young lady, la
laid, plac^ mis [demoiselle
the land, la tcrro; lea terrea
the landlord, lli5te
the landscape, le paysage
the language, la langue
large^ groa, groaae; grand, grande
the kut, le dernier, la demito
last, paaad, paaade; at last, euiin
laie (deceased), feu
late,tud
£a<a^ le latin
the latter, celoi-ci
to laugh, rin;
the law, la loi
to lay, placer
(the) lead, le plomb
to lead, mener
thelettf,]h feuille
(the) leap-yepr, Tann^ bissextile
to Uam, apprendre [Ktruite
(earned^ savant, savante; instruit, in*
learning, des comuuBaancea (f.)
learnt, appria
the least, le moins
the leave, la permission, le conge; to
take leave, prendre cong^
to leave, laisser; quitter
(to the) left, a gauche
(the) leisure, le loisir
the lemon, le citron
to lend, preter
erf length, au long
lent, prete [moiui?
less, moins; the less, .the less, moins. .
the lesson, la le9on
to lei, laisser; louer; to let see, feire
the letter, la lettre [voir
— 193 —
the liar J le menteur
liberal, bienfaisant, bienfaisante
the library^ la bibliotheque
the lie, le mensonge
to lie, mentir
the life, la vie
to lift, lever
lifted, leve
light, leger, legere
the light, la lumiere
to light, allumer
to lighten, faire des eclairs
the lightning, I'eclair (m.)
to like, aimer; trouver; Hike, j'aime,
je voudrais; he likes, il aime; to like
better, aimer mieux; I should like
very much, je voudrais bien; I like
being here, je me plais ici
the line, la ligne
the linen, la toile, le linge
the lion, le lion
to listen, listen to, ecouter
little, pen; too little, trop peu
to live, demeurer, vivre; to live on, vivre
de; to have means to live on, avoir
de quoi vivre
lively, vif, vive; gai, gaie
living, en vie
to loiter, tarder
London, Londres
long, long, longue; grand, grande;
long, a long time, longtemps
to look for, chercber; to look at, re-
garder; to look sad, avoir I'air triste
to lose, perdre
lost, perdu
the lot, le sort
louder, plus haut
Louis, Louis
Louisa, Louise
(the) love, la passion
to love, aimer; Hove, j'aime ;/ie loves,
11 aime
low, bas, basse
M.
made, fait
magnificent, magnifiqne
the maid-servant, la servante
to make, faire, rendre; make, faites;
they make, font; he makes, il fait;
to make one's escape, se sauver; to
make haste, se hater, se depecher;
to make room, faire place, to make
a trial, faire preuve; to make use,
se servir
the man, I'bomme (m.)
to manage, s'y prendre
the manner, la maniere
the manufactory, la fabriqne
many, beaucoup, plusieurs; too many,
trop; many people, beaucoup de
the map, la carte [monde
the marble, le marbre
March, Mars (m.)
to march, marcher
the market, le marche
Martin, Martin
Mary, Marie
the master, le maitro
Matilda, Mathilde
no matter, n'importe
Matthew, Matthieu
May, Mai (m.)
it may be, il se pent
may I? puis-je?
the Mayor, le maire
me, me, moi; to me, me
the meadow, la prairie
meagre, maigre
the meal, la farine
(the) means, les moyens (m. ) ; to have
, means to live on, avoir de quoi vivre
the meat, la viande; some meat, any
meat, de la viande; some or any bad
meat, de mauvaise viande
to meddle with, se meler de
to meet, rencontrer; to meet with, trou-
the memory, la memoire [ver
to mend (a pen), tailler
the merchant, le negociant
— 104 —
the merit, \e m6git^
Mesdames, mesdames
Messrs. t messimun
the metal, le ni^tal, leo m^tanT
mifidnij, midi (m.)
the middle, le milieu; the very mSddkt
le bciiu milieu
midmght, miimit (m.)
the mile, le mille
thf Jiiilk', le Iftit
the niilliiirr, bi modiste
the mind^ ToHprit; to haveamind^ TOO-
loir, avoir envie
mine, le mien, 1a mienne, lee inieiis»
the mine, la mine [lea nriwifwin
thf miyiute, la minuto
thr jyii.frn/, la miH^re
f "■' 'ortinie, le malhenr
V >. ilia UmoiHclle; Misses, mesde-
moiiielles
Oie mistake, la faute; to be ndatake%
Be tromper
moderate, mod^rd, modMe
to moderate, modi6m
modesty modeste
(the) nwdesty, la modeetie
the moment, le moment; at Udt twy
moment, a riustant mtee
Monday, londi (m.)
the money, Targent (m. ) ; the pttcs af
money, la piece d*argent
the monthj le mois; a nuMOt ago, il y a
im mois
the moon, la lune
more, plus, dayantage; more peopte,
plus de monde; once more, encore
une fois; the more. . .the more, plus
. ..pins
the mortting, le matin, la mating; aU
the morning, tout© la matinee; every
morning, tons les matins; the fat
morning, la grasse matinee; to sleep
late in the momlTig, donnir la grasse
matinee
mortal, mortel, mortelle
the most, le plus
Vie mother, la m^
the mowUain, la montuffne
the mouth, la bouobe
Mr., monsieur
Mrs,, niadaroe
much, beauooup; too mudt, trup; fiow
muchf oombien? not muck, pa«
the mud, la boue [grand'obotie
fiMMf, deroir; I must have some money,
il iaut que j*aie de Tai^geiit
the mustard, la moutarde
my, man, ma, mas
myself, moi-mdine
>.
nailed to, clone, clone sur
the name, le nom
.to name, appelrr
the napkin. In Krrvittto
naughty, meobaut, iniVhante
near, anpr^ de
nsai, propre
fMoetfory, neoenaire; it is neMssary,
il taut; to be neeessary, fiilloir
(the) need, rindigenoe (f ), le besoin;
(0 6e In ne$d qf, avoir beeoin de
tonc^M, n^JUger
the neighbor (m. A J.), le voisin, la
Toisine; le proobain
ntiXher, non plus; nfHAker. .fwr, ni. .ni
Ike nephew, le neveo
never, ne. .jamais; never again, ne. .
plus jamais
nwmiheless, pourtant
new, neuf, neuve; nouTcau, nouvel,
nouvelle; frais, fraicbe
the netcs, la nouvelle, les nouvelles
the newspaper, le journal
the next, le procbain, la procbaine
Xicolas, NicoL^
the night, la nuit
nine, neuf
nineteen, dix-neuf
the nineteenth, le, la dix-neuviem«
the ninetieth, le,la quatre-vingt-dixieme
ninety, quatre-viugt-dix
— 195 —
the nintht le, la neuTieme
710, non, pas de, ne. .pas, ne. .point;
710 longer, ne plus; no more, neplus;
no one, personne. .ne; aucun, au-
cune; mil, nuUe
nobody, personne. .ne
the noise, le bruit
noon, midi (m. )
7ior, ni
the nosegay, le bouquet
not, ne. . .pas; ne. . .point; not any,
ne. .aucun, aucune; not at all, ne. .
point, pas du tout, point du tout;
not ever, ne. .jamais; not more, ne. .
plus; nx)t much, pas grand'chose
the note, le billet
nothing, rien. . .ne; nothing hut, ne. .
que; nothing at all, rien du tout
to notice, apercevoir, s'apercevoir
November, Novembre (m.)
now, a present; just now, tout a I'heure
the number, le nombre
numerous, nombreux, nombreuse
the nut, la noix
O.
the oak, le cbene
to obey, obeir
obliged, oblige, obligee
to observe, observer
to obtain, obtenir
to occupy one's self, s'occuper
October, Octobre (m.)
the odor, I'odeur (f. )
of, de; of it, en
to offend, offenser
to offer, o£frir
the office, I'emploi (m.)
the officer, Tofficier (m.)
often, souvent
the oil, riiuile(f.)
old, vieux, vieil, vieille; age, agee
071, sur, en
once, une fois; at once, tout de suite;
once ffiore, encore une fois
one, nn, une; one another, Tun Tautre;
les uns les autres, se; the one, I'un,
OTie's self, soi, soi-meme [I'une
only, seul, seule; seulement; ne. .que
open, ouvert, ouverte
to open, ouvrir
the opinion, I'opinion (f.); to be of
opinion, croire
opportunely, a propos; quite opportune-
ly, fort a propos
the opportunity, I'occasion (f.)
or, ou
to order, ordonner
in order, en ordre
in order that, afin que, pour que
in order to, pour
the other, I'autre
other people, others, autrui
otherwise, autrement
ought, devoir
mir, notre, nos
(Mrs, le, la notre, les notres
ourselves, nous-memes
out of breath, a perte d'haleine
outside, bors de
over, par-dessus
to owe, devoir
the page, la page
paid (of a visit), fait, rendu
the pain, la douleur, la peine
painful, penible
the pair, la paire
the paper, le papier
the (news)paper, le journal
the pardon, le pardon; I beg your par-
don, je vous demande pardon
my parents, mes parents, mon pere et
ma mere
the park, le pare
the part, la partie; the greater pari, la
past, passe, passee [plupart
(the) patience, la patience
to pay, pay for, payer
the peace, le repos
— 196
it>p$oL gtaader
(he pear, 1a poire
the p«7i, la plume
as a penance, en p^tenoe
the pencil, le crayon
the penknife, le canif
the people, le people; people, les gens
(nL&l), le monde, on, Ton; many
people, beauconp de monde; mort
people, pins de monde; olher people,
autmi
the pepper, le poivre
to perceive, apercevoir, ^*aperoeToir
perhaps, peat^tre
ih^ptfrndatioii, l^pennMkm
top«rmK, permettre
ioperaeentU, penfenter
the person, la personne
Philadelphia, Philad«lpliU
PkOip, FhUippe
the physician, le nMeoin
the piano, le piano
the picture, le tableau, lea tableaux
the piece, le moroean, lee moxoeanx, la
tranche, lapi^; the pises qf money,
la pikoe d'argent
pink ribbon, mban roee
(the) pity, la piti^; it is a pity, c*e8t
dommage, to have pity, avoir piti^
to pity, plaindre; to be to be pilied, Stre
the place, la place [k plaindre
to place, mettre, placer
the plaiii, la plante
to plaiit, planter
the plate, I'assiette (t)
the play, le jeu, les jenx
to play, jouer; so divertir; to play {at)
billiards, joner an billard
pleasant, agr^able [plait
to please, plaire ; 1/ you please, 8*il vous
pleased, content, contente
the pleasure, le plaisir; trith pleasure,
ayec plaisir, je veux bien; to lake
pleasure, se plaire
the plum, la prune
the pocke^handkerchief, le mouchoir
polite, poli, polie
the pond, r^tang (m.)
poor, pauvre
the porcelain, la poroelaine
theposUion, I'tet (m.)
positive, positii; poaitiTe
to possess, po wS d or
possibU, ponible
the post-qffics, lapoata
thepowikd, laliTze
to pour, Teraar
(the) poverty, I'indigenoe (L)
the power, le pouvoir
topraise, looer
to prefer, ptMtei, aimer mieuz
(ke pr^erence, Upt^Unaob
ths prts &iU, leeadean, leacadeauz
prtsenHy, toot k Vhenxe
iopremrvs, oooaerver
l^retty, Joli,Jolie;aMB
to prtvenl, em pte her
Ihs prioe, lepriz
pnAMy, piobablement
the progress, le piogrte
the prcmmadis, la promenade
toprondss, promettre
promised, prookia
(thou) pnmissst, (in) ptometa
to pronounce, proiumoer
the prommelation, la prononciation
proper, propie; it is proper, il convient
the property, le bien
to propose, propoaer
to protect, prot^ger
provided, pourvu
prudent, prudent, prudente
to punish, punir
the pupU, r^ve (m. & f.)
the purchase, Femplette (f.)
the purse, la bourse
to pursue, poursuivre
put, mis
to put, placer, mettre; to pvU back,
remettre; to put off, renvoyer; to
put on, mettre; to put on one's hat,
se couvrii
197 —
Q.
the quality, la qualite
the quarter, le quart
the queen, la reine
the question, la question; the question
is, il est question
quickly, vite, promptement
quiet, tranquille
quietly, tranquillement
quite, tout; quite opportunely, fort a
propos
R.
the rain, la pluie
to rain, pleuvoir
to raise, lever
raised, leve
the rampart, le rempart
rare, rare
rarely, rarement
the rat, le rat
read, lu
to read, lire
(^^/le j reading, la lecture
ready, pret, prete
rea?, vrai, vraie
reaZ^^/' ^raiment
the reason, la raison
reasonable, raisonuable
to receive, recevoir
received, re9U [je reconnais
to recognize, reconnaitre; I recognize,
to recommend, conseiller
to recover, recouvrer
red, rouge
to refuse, refuser
the regiment, le regiment
to regret, regretter
to rejoice, rejouir
to relate, raconter
the relatives, les parents
to remain, rester; to remain seated,
rester assis
the remainder, le reste
remained, rest^
remarkable, remarquabje
the remedy, le remade
to remedy, apporter remede
to remember, se souvenir de; remember,
retenez
to remit, remettre
to render, rendre ; to render a service,
rendi-e service
to repent, se repentir
to reply, repondre
the repose, le repos
the reproach, le reproche
to reproach, faire des reproches
the reputation, la reputation
to rest, se reposer
to restore, rendre
retail, en detail
to return, retourner, revenir; to return
home, rentrer chez soi
returned, revenu, de retour
on returning, de retour
the revjard, la recompense
to reward, recompenser
the ribbon, le ruban; pink ribbon,
rich, riche [ruban rose
riches, les richesses (f.)
the ride on horseback, la promenade a
cheval; to ride on horseback, monter
a cheval; to ride in a carriage, se
promener en voiture
the riding -school, le manege
right, raison; J am right, j'ai raison;
that lohich is right, le bien; 7'ight,
juste; (to the) right, a droite
righteous, juste
to ring, sonner
to rinse, rincer
ripe, mur, miire
to rise, se lever
the road, le chemin
to roast, rotir
Robert, Robert
the rocki7ig-horse, le cheval de bois
the roof, le toit
the room, la chambre, la salle, la place;
to make room, faire place
the rose, la rose
— 198 —
round, antonr de
the ruUy la r^le
to ruk, r^ler
to run, courir; to run away, fuir, 8*en-
fuir; to run through, parcourir
Itmsia, la Bnane
S.
aad, tariste; iolookaad, aToirrairtriste
fki Bokarjf, 1« AppoialanmtB (m.)
iheaaU, le sel
the actme, le, la mAme
the 9cUisf action, UaattsflMStioii; to ki$
(her) MtisfaeHonj k mm gr6
Saturday, samedi (m.)
to save, aaaver
saving, ^ooiiomd
say, dites
to 8ay, dire
soaroelif, ne. .godte, presqoe pas;
soareety .lohm, 4 peine que
scented, perftun^ parfum^
the scholar, T^colier (m.)
the school, Tecole (f.)
the sea-side^ le bord da la mer
Uie season, la aaiaon
seaied, aaaia; to 66 seated, toe aaaia;
to remain seated, reeter aniB
the itecotui, le second, la seoonde
a secomU une seconde
to see, voir, aperoeyoir, s'aperccroir,
to let see, fedie voir
to 9M Of/am, revoir
/o seek, chercher
it seettis, il semble
seen, vn
selctom, rarement
self, meme
to sell, vendre; (he) sells, il vend
to sendy envoyer; to send /or, faire venir
sensible^ sense, sensee
.sen/, envoye
September, Septembre (m.)
serious, serieax, seriense
the servant (m. db /.), 1© domestique,
la dometitique
to serve, servir; to «ert'e for, to he qf
use to, servir k\ to sert^ for or in-
stead cf, servir de; t^iey have served
up, onaservi
the service, le serrloe; to do a service,
lendrs service
to set out, partir; set out, parti
tosetik, xiifia
seven, sepi
setMNlMM, dix-sept
the seventeenth, le, la dix-septitoae
<^ MtwO;^ le, la aeptikne
the ssvenMh, le, k soixante-dizitoe
ssvmdy, toiiante et diz
aev sni y o m, soixante et onxe
s e v en ty tw o , toizante-douie
several, phuienzs
toseie, oondre
the shadouf, Tombre (f.)
(the) shame, la honte; to be ashamed,
avoir honte
the share. Taction (f. )
toshare, partager
«^elle
the sksep, la brebis
the sMisr, le comTert; to get under
Miter, se mettre k convert
to shine, Inire
the sh^, le vaiasean, les vaiaseanx
the shirt, la chemise
the shoe, le sonlier
the shoemaker^ le cordonnler
short, coort, conrte; in a short time,
dans pen de temps; to be short-
sighted, avoir la vue basse
(I) should wish, (je) voudrais
(you) should have seen, it fallait voir
to show, montrer
to shut, fermer
sick, malade [a cote de
the side, le cote; by the side of, beside,
the sight, le spectacle, la vue; / am
short-sighted, j'ai la vne basse; /
have good sigfd, j'ai la vue bonne
th^ silver, I'argent (m.)
simple, simple
199 —
since,depuis;5mcew/ienf depnisquand? somey quelque, certain; some one,
to sing, chanter
the sister, la soeur
to sit down, s'asseoir; to sit down to
table, se mettre a table
six, six
sixteen, seize
the sixteenth, le, la seizieme
the sixth, le, la sixieme
the sixtieth, le, la soixantieme
sixty, soixante
the skill, I'adresse (f.)
skillful, habile
the skittles, les quilles (f.)
the sky, le ciel, les cieux
to slander, medire
the slate, I'ardoise (f. )
(the) sleep, le sommeil; to he sleepy,
avoir sommeil
to sleep, dormir; to sleep late in the
morning, dormir la grasse matinee
slept, dormi
the slice, la tranche
slowly, doucement, lentement
small, petit, petite
the smell, I'odeur (f. )
to smell, sentir, to smell had, sentir
mauvais; to smell burnt, sentir le
brule; to smell nice, sentir bon
to snow, neiger
so, si, tant; so many, tant; so much,
tant, antant; so that, afin que, pour
que
the soap, le savon
soberly, sobrement
the society, la societe
the sofa, le canape
softly, doucement
to soil, salir
sold, vendu
the soldier, le soldat
some, en; some to him, to her, to it,
lui en; some to me, m'en; some to
thee, t'en; some to them, leur en;
some to us, nous en; some to you,
vous en
some, quelqu'un, quelqu'une, quel-
ques-uns, quelques-unes
something, quelque chose; something
else, autre chose; something has hap-
pened, il est arrive quelque chose
sometimes, quelquefois
the son, le fils
the song, la chanson
soon, bientot; sooner, plus tot; so soon,
(de) sitot
Sophia, Sophie
sorry, fache, fachee
the sou,le sou
sought, cherche
the soul, I'ame (f . )
soundly, profondement
the soup, la soupe
to spare, epargner
the sparrow, le moineau, les moineaux
to speak, parler; I speak, je parle
the speech, la parole
to spend, employer, depenser, passer
(of time)
splendid, superbe
to spoil, gater
the spoon, la cuiller, cuillere
the spring, le printemps
the stable, I'ecurie (f,)
standing, debout; to be standing, etre
debout
to start, partir
started, parti, partie
the sto^gjl'etat (m. ) ; the United States, les
Etats-Unis
to stay, rester; to stay at home, rester
chez soi
stayed behind, reste, restee
the step, le pas
still, encore
the stocking, le bas
the stone, la pierre
to stop (one's self), s'arreter
the storm, Torage (m. )
the story, I'histoire (f. )
the stranger, Tetranger (m, )
— 200 -
the strawberry, Ik fniat
(he street, la nie
to strike^ frapper, Honuer; to .ttrikt
stroiuj, fort, forte [mrf, eflKcer
the siudent, lY'tudiant (m.)
the study, letade (f.)
to succeed, reushir
the successt le succcsb
such, tel, telle
to suffer, Boufl&rir
the sugar, lo tmcre
to suit, convenir
sultry, ^ufB^nt, ^toufftmte
the sun, lo Boleil
Sunday, dimancho (m.)
to siq>, sonper
supj^ied, aaaorti, aasortie
the support, le soutiim
to suppose, pr^sunier
sure, 8Ur, sfire
fo surretuter, ae renilro
to survive, 8tin'i>Te
to sustain, sout^^'uir
sweet, doux, douce
Swiixertand, la Suisse
T.
the tatit, la table; to sit down to tafJt,
se mettre k table; at table^ k table
the tailor, le tailleur
to take, prendre; to take care, prendre
garde; to take kindly, savoir bon gre;
to take leave, prendre conge; to take
. out, oter; to take piensure, se plaire;
to take a seat, se placer; to take a
walk, se promener, faire une pro-
menade
taken, pris
t(dl, grand, grande ;tv ^ . uuir
the task, h\ tache
the taste, le gout
the tea, le the
to teach, enseigner
the teacher, le maitre
the tear, la larme
^o teii, dire, raconter; tell, ditee
fhe temper, ninmeur (f. ) ; in a had
temper, de maavaise humenr
to tempt, tenter
ten, dix
the ten-pins, lee qnilles (f )
the tenth, le, la diziime
than, que
to thaidc, remercier: thank you, merci
that, those, CO, cct, cetto, ccs; celui;
celle, ceux. cellos; celui-Uk, celle-U^
ccuz-l^ celles-E
thai, cela; that is, c'est, il est, cela est;
that which, cequi, ceque; th/it trhirh
is right, le bien
that (reiaL), qui, que; thatfcohj. , , vj.u
the, le, la, lea
the theater, le thMtre, le spectacle
thee, toi. te
their, leur, leurs
theirs, le lour, la leur, les leurs
titem, eux, ellee, les; to them, Icur, y;
cf them, en; Uiem to him, le« lui;
Mem to me, me lea; them to thee, te
les; them to you; vous les; Oiem to
them, les leun; them to tts, les nous
themselves, se, enx-mdmeB,elle8-mgmeB
thence, de Ik
there, ]k, j; there is, there are, il y a;
there is srmebody, il y a quelqu'un;
there w€Ls, there tcere, il y avait ;/rom •
there, de ]k
therefore, par cons^uent
these are, ce sont
they, ils, eux, ellee; they are, ce sont
thick, epais, ^paisse
the thimNe, le d6
thin, maigre
thine, le tien, la tienne, lee tiens, les
tiennes
the thing, la chose
to think, penser, songer, croire; I think
of you, je pense a vous; you think,
vous croyez
the third, le la troisi^e
(t?ie) thirst, la soif ; to he thirsty, avoir
soif ; to be very thirsty, avoir bien soif
— 201 —
ihirieen, treize
the thirteenth, le, la treizieme
the thirtieth, le, la trentieine
thirty, trente
thirty-one, trente et tin
thirty-two, trente deux
this, these, ce, cet, cette, ces; celui,
celle, ceux, celles; celui-ci, celle-ci,
ceux-ci, celles-ci; this, ceci
thither, y
thou, toi, tu
thoughtless, etourdi, etourdie
thousand, miUe, mil
the thousandth, le, la millieme
the threat, la menace
three, trois
to throw, throw away, jeter
the thunder, le tonnerre
to thunder, tonner
Thursday, jeudi (m.)
thus, ainsi
thy, ton, ta, tes
thyself, toi-meme
to tie, attacher
the tiger, le tigre
tm, jusque; till to-day, jusqu' aujour-
d'hui
the time, le temps; la fois; the time (of
the day), Theure; at the time when,
lorsque ; in time, a temps ; three times,
trois fois; in a short time, dans pen
de temps
timid, craintif, craintive
tired, las, lasse; fatigue, fatiguee
to, a, vers, envers, pour ; /o mi/ brother's,
chez mon frere; to or at my house,
chez moi
to-day, aujourd'hui
to-morrow, demain
together, ensemble
too, aussi; trop; too little, trop peu; too
many, too much, trop
the tooth, la dent
to touch, toucher
towards, vers, envers
the towel, ressuie-main (m.)
the town, la ville; half the town, la
moitie de la ville
(the) trade, le commerce, le metier
the tradesman, le marchand
to translate, traduire
translated, traduit, traduite
to travel, voyager
treacherous, faux, fausse
the tree, I'arbre (m. ) [preuve
the trial, la preuve, to m<ike a trial, faire
the trick, la ruse
a trifle, un rien
to trot, trotter
the trouble, la peine
troubled, embarrasse, embarrassee
the trowsers, le pantalon
true, veritable
the trunk, la malle, le coffre
to trust, se fier (a)
the truth, la verite
to try, essayer
Tuesday, mardi (m.)
to turn to account, mettre a profit
the twelfth, le, la douzieme
twelve, douze
the twentieth, le, la vingtieme
twenty, vingt
the twenty-first, le, la vingt-et-unieme
twenty-one, vingt-et-un
twenty-two, vingt-deux
twice, deux fois
two, deux
U.
the uncle, I'oncle (m.)
under, sous
to understand, comprendre
understood, compris, entendu
the undertaking, I'entreprise (f. )
unfortunate, malheureux, malheureuse
ungrateful, ingrat, ingrate
unhappy, malheureux, malheureuse
united, uni, unie; the United States,
les Etats-Unis (m.)
unjustly, injustement
unless, si. .n©
-. 202 —
untharUeful, ingrat, iugmto
up iOy juaque
tqxm, siir
us, to uSt nouB
the %jue, I'liBage (m.)
to use, se servir de
usrfult ntile
uaeleast inntile; that U quUe
oda ne sert de rien
usuaUyt ordinairement
the txitue, la valeor
to vanquish, Taincro
the vasty le vase
the vegetabies, les legumes (m.)
t>ery, trts, bien, fort
the vessdt le vase
to vex, tonrmenter
(the) vice, le vice
yiennOy Vienne
the vUlagty le village
the vinegar, le \inaigre
the violin^ le violon
(the) virtue^ la vertu
r\rt<ious, vertueux, Tertoetifle
risihlij, i\ \'\ie d'oeil
(fit' visitt, hi visito
the voicej la voii
w.
to xoait for, attendre; to ujoU on, servir
the VMiier, le gar^on
to toake \q>, eveiller, reveiller
the uxiUcj la promenade ; to take a teaOc,
se promener, faire one promenade
to toaUc, se promener, marcher
to tDoIk round, feire le tour
to want, avoir besoin de
the war, la guerre
warm, chaud, cbaade
to team, avertir
the waich, la montre
the waier, I'eau, les eaux (1)
tcatered, arrose
the wayt le chemin
ice, nous
weak, fidble
to wear, porter
the weather, le temps
Wednesday, mercredi (m.)
(the) u>eed, Yhethe {t); HI ufted, man-
Taiaeherbe
(he week, laBWimine; a week, buit jonrs
to weep, pleorer
xM, bien; at toeB <u, mubi bieu que
tMp(, pleore
10^ / que? quoit quel, quelle, quels,
qoelles? comment? what is the inai'
fertoU^youf qii*aTes-T0ii8? what is
the use qf that? I^quoi sert oela?
wkakver, qneloooque; quelqne; quel
que, quelle que* quels que, quellee
que; whatever If may be, quoi que
ceaoit
when, quftnd, lorsque, dhs que
whence? d*oti?
tohere? oh7
which, qvd, que; quel, quelle, quels,
quelles; oe qui« ce que
the while, le temps, le moment; to be
worth white, valoir la peine
whitst, tandis que
to whip, fouetter
the whirl, le tourbillon
to whisper, dire k Foreille
white, blanc, blanche
who, qui? of whom, de qui? from
whom, de qui ? to whom, k qui ? for
whom, pour qiii? who, qui, lequel,
laquelle, lesquels, lesqnelles
tMoetTer, quiconque; whoever he may
he, qui que ce soit
whole, tout, toute; the whole, le tout
wholesale, en gros
why ? pourqnoi ?
wide, large
the widow, la veuve
(U) will directly, (il) va
TFifliam, Guillaume
to be willing, vouloir; lam perfectly
wUUng, je veux bien
— 20S —
willingly, volontiers; most willingly, je
le veux bien
the wind, le vent; it is windy; il fait
du vent; it is very windy, il fait
beaucoup de vent
the window, la fenetre
the wine, le vin
to wipe, essuyer
(the) icisdom, la sagesse
toise, sage
to wish, desirer, souhaiter, vouloir; to
wish for, desirer; I should wish, je
voudrais; one (they) would wish,
on voiidrait
wished, voulu
he wishes, il veut
(the) wit, resprit(m.)
with, ayec; with him, loith her, with it,
with them, en
within, y
without, sans; without fail, sans faute
the woman, la femme
to wonder, s'etonner
the word, le mot, la parole; to keep
one's word, tenir parole
the work, I'affaire (f.), le travail, les
travanx
to work, travailler
the xoorkman^ I'ouvrier (nu)
the world, le monde
worse, pire; pis
to he loorth, valoir; to he worth while,
valoir la peine
would you have the kindness ? voudriez*
vous ?
it would he desirable, il serait a desirer
one would wish, on voudrait
to wound, blesser
to icrite, ecrire
the writing, I'ecriture (f.)
written, ecrit
wrong, tort; lam wrong, j'ai tort
the year, I'an (m.)> Tannee (f.); each
year, chaque annee
yes, oui
yesterday, hier
yet, cependant, encore, pourtant
to yield, ceder, se rendre
yonder, la-bas
you, to you, vous [moiselle
young, jeune; the young lady, la de-
your, votre, vos
yours, le votre, la votre, les votrea
yourself, vous-meme
yourselves, vous-memes
youthj la jeunesse
t
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of Califorr^ia Library
or to the
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
BIdg. 40a Richmond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
• 2-month loans may be renewed by calling
(510)642-6753
• 1 -year loans may be recharged by bringing
books to NRLF
• Renewals and recharges may be made 4
days prior to due date.
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
APR1120D0
12,000(11/95)
YB 01083
STEIGER'S German Series.
Edited by W.
S German Primer
A.UEBT. Boards $0.45.
S Oertnan Reading Charts. 25
tea with Hand-book lor Teachers. By
P. Henn. $1.00
same. The 25 Plates mounted on 13
irds. '$4.50.— Varnished $6.00.
S German Script Charts. 4 Plates
unted on 4 boards, varnished $1.25.
S First Gennan Booh. By Dr. P.
NN. (Exercises in Beading, Writing,
jUing, Translation, and Conversation,
nted in bold type and containing a very
ge amount of German Script. De-
aed for the lowest two grades.) Boards
25.
S Second German Book. By Dr. P.
NN. (Exercises in Writing, Beading,
mslation, and Conversation. Contain-
• much German Script. With Paradigms
1 Vocabularies.^ Boards $0.45, Half
rhese
'S E
age.
AHN'S Second Germam, Reader. With
Notes and Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn.
Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.20.
The same. With Foot-notes and Vocabu-
lary. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.20.
Key to same. Boards $0.50.
AHN'S Rudiments of the German Lan^
guage. (Edition of 1870.) Boards $0.35.
AHN'S Method of Learning the Ger-
man Language. Revised by Gustavtjb
Fischer. First Course, Boards $0.50. Sec-
ond Course, Boards $0.50. Both Courses
bound together. Half Roan $1.00.
Key to same. Boards $0.30.
AHN'S New Practical and Easy Method
of Learning the Getnnan Language.
With Pronunciation by J. C. Oehlschlae-
GEH. Edition of 1873. First Course. (Prac-
tical Part.) Boards $0.60. Second Course.
(Theoretical Part.) Boards $0.40. Both
toeether. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.25.
-Vith
otes
irds
tier,
lan
md
3tes
on.
ing
ge.
and
irst
iry.
Dnd
,rds
ind
).
in-
_ *^'
GRAIJERT'S Manual of the German
Language. First Part, Boards $0.40 ;
Second Part, Boards $0.40. Both together.
Boards $0.70, Half Roan $0.90.
KEFFELT'S First Book for School and
Souse. With Vocabulary. Boards $0.30.
REFFELT'S Second Book for School and
House. With Vocabulary. Boards $0.50.
SCHLEGEL'S Getmian Grammar for Be-
ginners. Half Roan $1.25.
SCHLEGEL'S First Classical Get-man
Reader. With Notes and Vocabulary.
Half Roan $1.00. — Second Classical
German Reader. With Notes and Voca-
M122844
THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY
ards
nan
i Fir
the
This
Gen
to A
ngn
'S 2
;nn.
toi
P. ]
'S i
Hen:
to
Dr.
'S li
age.
lis c
urth ^ ^_
00, HaK Roan $1.25.
'S Complete Method of the Gertnan
<nguage. By Dr. P. Henn. (Ahn-
nn's Firsts Second^ Third, and
airth German Books together.)
ongly bound in Half Roan $1.75.
S Synojisis of German Grammar.
Dr. P. Henn. Boards $0.60, HaK
an $0.80.
'S First German Reader. With Notes
1 Vocabulary. By Dr. P. Henn. Boards
60, Half Roan $0.80.
same. With Foot-notes aaid Vocabulary,
ards $0.60, Half Roan $0.80.
to same. Boards $0.30. 1 bulary. Half Roan $1.50.
The several Keys above enumerated will be supplied only
on the direct application of a teacher to the publisher,
E. Steig-er, 25 Park Place, Kew York
AHjrs
^^ AM
STEIGER'S French SeHen.
reach Ri
Ro.'i dor
*tf*r-\ riter.
<^ollcyuitc Loi:
'^rPDch Gran} war.
The $eperat Keys above enumerated vui be .<
fji^ jii'.rf ^yy^plicQ/ion of a teacher lo the pf/hlM^^r.
B. Steij^er, 25 Tark Place. >; w York